SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 /

SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 SOFTWARE MANUAL

SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / 8 English Software Manual

Copyright (C) 2004-2018, Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co.,Ltd.

All rights reserved.

Thank you very much for using SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8.

[SILKYPIX® Developer Studio] was developed to expand the limits in quality of digital images by using a highly advanced raw
engine – helping the user of Digital SLRs to get the most out of every picture taken and providing an easy way to control the
path from the picture to the image.

This manual is a common software manual of "SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8" and "SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8".

As for the contents described in this manual, there is no difference depending on the version in function, usage, set value etc.
unless there is a special notation.

In this manual, the software is shown with the following icons for explanation targeting only "SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8".

SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8

Contents

0. Overview and Introduction

0.1. Section Names
0.1.1. Entire SILKYPIX Display
0.1.2. Menu bar
0.1.3. Toolbar
0.1.4. Information Box
0.1.5. Parameters Controls
0.1.6. Sub-controls for adjusting development parameters
0.1.6.1. Category Selection Icons
0.1.6.2. Sub-control icons
0.1.7. How to Locate Controls
0.1.8. How to Operate GUI
0.2. What is SILKYPIX®?
0.2.1. Basic Image Adjustment Items
0.2.2. Features of SILKYPIX®
0.3. Difference to Other Photo Retouching Software
0.4. Differences with conventional products
1. Startup
 1.1. Installation and Execution
1.1.1. Windows Version: Installation and Execution
1.1.2. macOS: Installation and Execution
1.2. Trial and Registration of Product Key
1.2.1. Beginning Trial
1.2.2. How to Register Product Key
1.2.2.1. Online Registration of Product Key
1.2.2.2. Offline Registration of Product Key
1.2.2.3. Note for Offline Registration
1.2.3. Product Key Registration Cancellation
1.2.4. Inquiries Regarding Product Key Registration
1.3. Operations using Windows
1.3.1. Reason to execute program as administrator
1.3.2. Caution when you use the program in Windows

2. Designating image files for processing

2.1. Opening File
2.1.1. Selecting from dialogs
2.1.2. Designating by drag and drop
2.2. Opening Folder
2.2.1. Selecting from the "Folder" sub-control
2.2.1.1. Load from Sub-folder
2.2.2. Selecting from folder history
2.2.3. Assign Using Drag & Drop
2.3. When RAW data does not open as expected
2.4. How to Handle JPEG/TIFF Image
2.4.1. Color temperature of JPEG / TIFF images
2.4.2. Sharpening / Noise Reduction for JPEG/TIFF Processing
2.4.3. Feature that cannot be Used for JPEG/TIFF
3. Display modes

3.1. Switching Display Modes

3.2. Preview window
3.2.1. Multi preview
3.2.1.1. Operation Methods
3.2.1.2. Selecting Reference Preview Images
3.2.2. Changing display position / magnification
3.2.2.1. Changing preview display position and magnification
3.2.2.2. Change display position / magnification with the mouse
3.2.3. Displays of images with default parameters by mouse operations
3.2.4. Coarse Preview
3.2.5. Development Preview
3.2.6. Grid Display
3.2.6.1. Moving Grid Position
3.2.6.2. Grid settings
3.2.6.3. Background color
3.3. Thumbnail window
3.3.1. Selecting Multiple Images
3.3.1.1. Selecting multiple images
3.3.1.2. Select all images
3.3.1.3. How to Change "Representative Image" when Multiple Images are Selected
3.3.2. Sort thumbnails
3.3.2.1. Control description
3.3.3. Changing the Size of Thumbnails
3.4. Operations for selected images
3.4.1. Marks
3.4.2. Protect
3.4.3. Rating
3.4.3.1. Setting and Clearing "Ratings"
3.4.3.2. Filtering images by "Rating"
3.4.3.3. Sort thumbnails by "Rating"
3.4.3.4. Switching between Display / Non-Display of "Rating" at the top of the thumbnail.
3.4.4. Switching to previous / next image
3.4.5. Rotating images
3.4.6. Filtering images for processing
3.5. Arranging parameters controls and sub-controls
3.5.1. Types of Locations
3.5.2. Location of Parameters controls
3.5.3. Location of Sub-Controls
3.5.3.1. "Close / Open" Controls
3.5.4. Grouping Floating Windows
3.5.5. Registration and restoration of window positions
 3.5.5.1. Register window positions
3.5.5.2. Restore window positions
3.6. Turning floating window display on / off
3.7. Icons that show status of image
4. How to Adjust Development Parameter
4.1. "Parameters Controls" and "Sub-control"
4.1.1. Taste
4.1.1.1. All category tastes
4.1.1.2. Other tastes
4.1.1.3. Add taste
4.1.1.4. Edit tastes
4.1.2. Tastes/Parameters
4.1.2.1. Storerooms
4.1.2.2. Hot folder
4.1.3. Control box
4.2. Sub-control
4.3. Exposure Bias
4.3.1. Auto Exposure Bias
4.3.2. Fine-Tuning Exposure Bias
4.3.3. Exposure bias tool
4.3.4. Dodge / Color Burn / HDR
4.3.4.1. Dodge / Color Burn
4.3.4.2. HDR
4.4. White Balance
4.4.1. Adjusting White Balance with Taste
4.4.2. Auto White Balance
4.4.3. Color Temperature and Color Deflection
4.4.4. Gray balance tool
4.4.5. Skin color tool
4.4.6. Gray balance tool for underwater photo
4.4.7. Dark Adjustment
4.4.8. Multi-light source compensation
4.4.9. White Balance Adjustment
4.4.10. Summary of Color and Adjustment
4.5. Tone
4.5.1. Adjusting Tone with Taste
4.5.2. Fine-Tuning Tone
4.5.2.1. Black level tool
4.5.3. Tone Curve
4.5.3.1. Selecting a Taste
4.5.3.2. Editing Points
4.5.3.3. Control explanation
4.6. Color Adjustment
4.6.1. Adjusting Saturation with Taste
4.6.2. Fine-Tuning Saturation
4.6.3. Color profile
4.6.4. Color representation
4.6.4.1. Standard color
4.6.4.2. Memory color
4.6.4.3. Portrait color
4.6.4.4. Film color
4.6.4.5. Monochrome
4.6.4.6. Photo style/Camera color
4.6.4.7. FILM SIMULATION
4.7. Sharpening / Noise Reduction
4.7.1. Adjusting Sharpening with Taste
4.7.2. Sharpening Adjustment
4.7.2.1. Natural Sharp
4.7.2.2. Normal sharp / Pure detail
4.7.2.3. Unsharp mask
4.7.3. Noise Reduction Adjustment
4.7.3.1. Color distortion
4.7.3.2. Fringe reduction
4.7.3.3. Neat noise
4.7.3.4. Smoothness
4.7.3.5. Reduce Moiré
4.8. Development settings
4.8.1. Demosaicing Sharpness Adjustment
4.8.2. Resolution Plus
4.8.3. Color space
4.8.3.1. Input color space
4.8.3.2. Output color space
 4.8.4. Develop JPEG/TIFF images
4.8.5. Develop mark
4.8.6. Develop
4.9. Highlight controller
4.9.1. Emphasis on Chroma/Luminance
4.9.2. Emphasis on Saturation/Hue
4.9.3. Luminance restoration
4.9.4. Dynamic range
4.9.4.1. Method for Effectively Utilizing Dynamic Range
4.10. Fine Color Controller
4.10.1. Adjustments using the color circle
4.10.2. Adjusting with the sliders
4.10.3. Methods and Notes on Utilizing Fine Color Controller
4.11. Lens Aberration Controller
4.11.1. Shading (Peripheral Brightness Reduction) Correction
4.11.1.1. Angle of View
4.11.1.2. Correction Ratio for Amount of Light
4.11.1.3. Shading center tool
4.11.1.4. Detail of Shading Reduction
4.11.1.5. Color vignetting auto-correction
4.11.2. Distortion Correction
4.11.2.1. Distortion Rate
4.11.2.2. Center/Edge Control
4.11.2.3. Automatic Bias
4.11.3. Chromatic aberration
4.11.3.1. R rate
4.11.3.2. B rate
4.11.3.3. Chromatic aberration tool
4.12. Rotation/Shift lens effect
4.12.1. Rotation
4.12.1.1. Rotation tool
4.12.2. Shift lens effect
4.12.2.1. Angle
4.13. Effects
4.13.1. Portrait beautification
4.13.1.1. Effect
4.13.1.2. Range of effects
4.13.2. Add noise
4.13.2.1. Amount
4.13.2.2. Size
4.14. Crop tool
4.14.1. How to Operate a Handle in Cropping Area
4.14.2. How to Operate Crop Tool
4.14.3. Crop image on preview
4.14.4. Extend processing area to entire recorded area
4.14.5. How to handle the RAW data with the aspect ratio set on a camera
4.15. Monochrome controller
4.15.1. Color Filter
4.15.2. Lightness
4.15.3. Develop as monochrome
4.16. Underwater photo controller
4.16.1. Auto White balance for underwater photo
4.16.2. Gray balance tool for underwater photo
4.16.3. Water depth
4.16.4. Color deflection (unferwater)
4.16.5. Color restoration
4.16.6. Muddy reduction
4.17. Spotting tools
4.17.1. How to Erase Spots
4.17.2. Red Eye Correction
4.17.3. Operation Methods
4.17.3.1. Operation Modes
4.17.3.2. Tool effects
4.17.3.3. Emphasize Spotting Areas
4.17.3.4. Initialize Spotting Areas
4.17.3.5. Adjusting Correction Size
4.17.3.6. Changing Display Location / Magnification
4.17.4. Notes
4.18. Partial correction tool
4.18.1. Functions
4.18.1.1. Preparing and Managing Partial Correction Filters
4.18.1.2. Parameters Available for Adjustment
4.18.2. How to operate in Filter area mode
4.19. Editing history
 4.19.1. "Editing history" sub-control
4.19.1.1. Operation Methods
4.20. Image properties
4.20.1. File information
4.20.2. Data information
4.20.3. Image information
4.20.4. GPS
4.20.5. IPTC
4.20.6. Editing Items
4.20.6.1. Edit Item Dialog
4.20.6.2. DateTime
4.20.7. IPTC Information Taste
4.20.8. Register lens name
4.21. Other
4.21.1. Setting On / Off
4.21.2. Dynamic default
4.21.3. Keyboard and Mouse Operation for macOS
5. Saving Development Process and Development Results
5.1. Develop
5.1.1. Saved File
5.1.2. Settings
5.1.2.1. Develop Taste
5.1.2.2. Basic settings
5.1.2.3. Enhanced settings
5.1.2.4. Preview
5.2. Batch develop
5.2.1. Batch Develop Tastes
5.2.2. Basic settings
5.2.3. Enhanced Settings
5.2.4. Other settings
5.2.5. Batch development status
5.2.5.1. Waiting
5.2.5.2. Finished
5.2.5.3. Pausing and restarting batch development
5.3. Settings for development and saving
5.3.1. Basic Settings
5.3.1.1. File type for saving
5.3.1.2. File output settings
5.3.1.3. Image size to save
5.3.1.3.1. Fit to designated size
5.3.2. Enhanced settings
5.3.2.1. Imprint data
5.3.2.2. Unsharp mask
5.3.2.2.1. Amount
5.3.2.2.2. Radius
5.3.2.2.3. Threshold
6. Useful Functions for Adjustment
6.1. Display warning
6.2. Histogram
6.2.1. Display of Histogram
6.3. Navigator
6.4. Shortcut Keys and Function Keys
6.4.1. Operating Menu
6.4.1.1. File
6.4.1.2. Edit
6.4.1.3. Operation
6.4.1.4. View
6.4.1.5. Parameter
6.4.1.6. Development
6.4.1.7. Help
6.4.2. Using Context Menu
6.4.2.1. Display Magnification
6.4.2.2. Mark
6.4.2.3. Development
6.4.2.4. Change of Image
6.4.3. Shortcut Key List
6.5. How to Use Storerooms
6.5.1. Copy Development Parameter
6.5.2. Save Development Parameter Temporarily
6.5.3. Compare Development Parameter
7. Development Parameter Operation
7.1. Copy development parameters
7.1.1. Paste development parameters
7.1.2. Partial paste of development parameters
7.1.3. Partial paste of image properties
7.1.4. Special handling of pasted development parameters
7.1.4.1. Paste Cropping Area
7.1.4.2. Pasting Shift lens effect
7.1.4.3. Pasting the Partial correction tool
7.2. Save Development Parameters
7.3. Load Development Parameters
7.4. Initialize Development Parameters
7.5. Copy Development Parameters to Storerooms
7.5.1. Paste the latest editing development parameters
7.6. Set Development Parameters to Multiple Images
7.7. Operations for Multiple Selected Images
7.8. Select Taste
7.9. Add taste
7.10. Default parameters settings
7.11. About "SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8" Development Parameters
8. File Operation and Printing
8.1. Delete Procedures
8.1.1. Delete marked images
8.1.2. Delete selected images
8.2. Copy/Move Procedures
8.2.1. Copy/Move marked images
8.2.2. Copy/Move selected images
8.3. Files to be Deleted, Copied, or Moved
8.4. Rename/Batch rename
8.4.1. Rename
8.4.2. Batch rename
8.5. Printing
8.5.1. Basic Setting
8.5.1.1. Print format
8.5.1.1.1. Editing print text
8.5.1.2. Print range
8.5.1.3. Image layout
8.5.1.3.1. Automatic layout
8.5.1.3.2. Arbitrary layout
8.5.1.4. Print image
8.5.1.5. Other
8.5.2. Enhancings 1
8.5.2.1. Color management
8.5.2.1.1. Perform color management
8.5.2.1.2. Color management on printer side
8.5.3. Enhancings 2
8.5.3.1. Unsharp mask
8.5.3.2. Imprint data
8.6. Print Preview of Multiple Images
8.7. Plug-ins
9. Option and Setting
9.1. File output settings
9.1.1. Taste
9.1.2. Setting of File Type
9.1.3. Default folder to save
9.1.4. JPEG/TIFF options
9.1.5. Output options
9.1.5.1. When an image is rotated
9.1.5.2. Output color space
9.1.6. Default file name to save
9.2. Display settings
9.2.1. Color management
9.2.1.1. Monitor profile
9.2.2. Thumbnail window
9.2.2.1. When display mode is combination mode
9.2.2.1.1. Location of thumbnail window
9.2.2.1.2. Thumbnail scroll direction
9.2.2.1.3. Show rating on thumbnail
9.2.3. Preview window
 9.2.3.1. Preview rendering method
9.2.3.2. When double-clicking on preview window
9.2.3.3. Grid Settings
9.2.3.4. Partial Correction Tool Settings
9.2.3.5. Opening a folder in preview mode
9.2.3.6. Background colors
9.2.3.7. Blink preview frame during preview rendering
9.2.3.8. Insert margins for "Fitted display" / "Whole display"
9.2.4. Others
9.3. Function settings
9.3.1. Functions
9.3.1.1. When a JPEG/TIFF/DNG image is rotated
9.3.1.2. Luminance level of exp. bias tool
9.3.1.3. Luminance level of the black level tool
9.3.1.4. Threshold of highlight warning
9.3.1.5. Threshold of shadow warning
9.3.1.6. Threshold of focus peaking
9.3.1.7. Set automatic level correction
9.3.1.8. Tooltip
9.3.1.9. Handle only RAW images
9.3.1.10. Develop JPEG/TIFF images
9.3.1.11. Treat the same base name (file name without extension) files as a single image
9.3.1.12. Open last accessed folder when starting
9.3.2. Operations
9.3.3. Performance
9.3.3.1. Cache settings
9.3.3.2. Specify temporary folder
9.4. Shortcut keys settings
9.4.1. GUI Operation methods
9.4.2. How to assign a shortcut key(s)
9.4.3. Shortcut keys that can be assigned
9.4.3.1. Reserved keys
9.5. Default parameters settings
9.6. Imprint data settings
9.6.1. Edit imprint data
9.6.1.1. Layer settings
9.6.1.2. Character settings
9.6.1.3. Image settings
9.6.1.4. Base size
9.7. Import and export settings
9.7.1. Export
9.7.2. Import
9.8. Options
9.8.1. Delete access history
9.8.2. Initialize window positions and display states
9.8.3. Select skin
9.8.3.1. Large-sized skin
9.8.3.2. Skins for high-resolution monitors
9.9. Troubleshooting settings
9.9.1. Initialize user configuration files
9.9.2. Product key registration test
9.9.3. Troubleshooting settings
9.9.3.1. Prohibit parallel processing during developing
9.9.3.2. Develop slowly
9.9.3.3. Delete manufacturer name from Exif information
9.9.3.4. Restrict simultaneous file access
10. How to Handle SILKYPIX® Perfectly
10.1. Techniques
10.1.1. Speed up Refreshing of Preview
10.1.2. Utilizing Difference between Exposure Biases of Camera and SILKYPIX®
10.1.3. Utilizing Difference between ISO Speed Adjustment of Camera and Exposure Bias of SILKYPIX®
10.1.4. Relationship between Demosaicing Sharpness and Picture Quality
10.1.5. Adjustment for Over-saturation
10.1.6. Color Gamut and Adjustment Outside of Color Gamut
10.1.7. Sharpening Image
10.1.8. How to Take Advantage of Dynamic Range
10.1.9. Proper Use of Sharp in Development Parameters and Unsharp Mask when Developing / Printing
10.2. Photographic Techniques
10.2.1. Photography without Backlight Compensation
10.2.2. Should RAW be Photographed in Underexposed?
10.2.3. Turning Exposure Compensation Dial into ISO Speed Dial
10.2.4. Appropriate Exposure for RAW Photography
 10.3. Advanced Techniques
10.3.1. Desensitizing at Development
10.3.2. Linearity and Saturation of Image Sensor
10.4. Knowledge
10.4.1. Color Temperature and Color Deflection
10.4.2. Exif Information
10.4.3. Files Created Automatically
10.4.3.1. Development Parameter File and Collateral Information File
10.4.3.2. Virtual storage files
10.4.3.3. Temporary file
10.4.3.4. Other
10.4.4. DNG (Digital Negative) format compatibility
10.4.4.1. DNG Overview
10.4.4.2. DNG Files Available with this Software
10.4.5. Color management
10.4.5.1. What is color management?
10.4.5.2. Color space and color profile
10.4.5.3. Color management performed on SILKYPIX
10.4.5.4. Color management on monitor displays
10.4.5.5. Color management for print output
10.4.5.6. Restrictions to color management
10.4.5.7. "sRGB" vs "Adobe RGB"
10.4.5.8. Troubleshooting
10.4.6. Thermal Runaway
11. Supported Camera List
12. Troubleshooting
12.1. How to check the software version and your registered information
12.2. Troubleshooting for "Registration of Product Key"
12.2.1. Inquiries about merchandise
12.2.1.1. How to make inquiries
12.2.1.2. How to check serial number

13. License Agreement

Please acknowledge that the contents and price of the specific software and manual of this product will change without notice.

The specifications and the screen shots that have been described in this manual might be different from the product version.

This manual has been copyrighted. It is prohibited to reproduce, reprint any of the materials and product without obtaining
permission from Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd.

The manufacturers, the cameras, and the software names that have been described in this manual are the trademarks or
registered trademarks of each company.

SILKYPIX®; It is a registered trademark of Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd.

The re-distribution module that Microsoft® Corporation owns the copyright is included.

Copyright 1994-96 Microsoft® Corporation. All rights reserved.

This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

Copyright (C) 2004-2018, Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co.,Ltd. All rights reserved.
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 /
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 SOFTWARE MANUAL
back
prev menu next

0. Overview and Introduction

0.1. Section Names

An overview of section names and operation methods of the SILKYPIX® screen display will be explained.

0.1.1. Entire SILKYPIX Display

The SILKYPIX® display is composed of the following elements.

(1) Main window

The basic windows in this software are composed of the following parts.
(A) Title bar
Displays of the software name and status, as well as Minimize, Maximize and Close Software buttons
are located here.
(B) Menu bar
The various functions can be executed by selecting the Menu.
(C) Toolbar
Various functions can be executed by clicking on icons in the toolbar. Icons also have the function of
displaying status.
(D) Status bar
This displays information on the selected image.
(E) Information box
Main controls such as Folder and Parameters Controls, as well as controls for displaying information
such as image properties, navigator and histogram, can be displayed in this area.
(F) Parameters controls
This interface is for setting development parameters.
Parameters controls comprises four parts.
 (F-1) Main control
The main functions are for selecting tastes prepared for each category of development
parameters and for calling up sub-controls for adjusting parameters in detail.
Adjust exposure bias here.
(F-2) Sub-control icon
This switches between displaying and not displaying sub-controls displayed as floating
windows.
(F-3) Tab page
Sub-controls for detailed adjustments in each category of the development parameters are
displayed here.
The sub-controls displayed here can be changed through operations on the Main Control.
(F-4) Control box
Sub-controls for detailed adjustments in each category of the development parameters which
are regularly used can be displayed in this area.
We recommend that you arrange sub-controls that you use frequently here. Please see "4.2.
Sub-control" concerning sub-controls.
(G) Preview window
This displays an image of the selected image. By splitting it into two parts, in the window on the right
side you can either have the another image, or you can locate the results of processing the same
image with results from different development parameters.
(H) Thumbnail window
This is a thumbnail display listing images subject to operations. This window can be located outside of
the main window and displayed as a floating window.

(2) Floating window

Sub-controls for adjusting development parameters and windows for displaying status can be displayed as windows
independent of the main window.

These are collectively known as floating windows in this software.

(3) Modal dialog

These are windows that temporarily display various setting dialogs, setting changes, etc.

(4) Message box

Message boxes are displayed while running the software in cases such as special processing, when an error occurs or
when you are asked to select the next operation from multiple choices.

Messages displayed here are assigned their own message numbers. Please make note of this message number if
there is a problem, such as when an error occurs.

You may be able to use the troubleshooting sections in the manual or on our company's home page.
0.1.2. Menu bar

The Menu Bar is an interface from which you can select and execute various operations from the SILKYPIX menu.

Sub-menus for each menu item are displayed in dropdown form when you click on an item from the Menu Bar.

Each item on the Menu Bar is an entry point to locating menu items. They are categorized so that menu items are easy to
find.

* Here you can assign shortcut keys to any functions you may select.
Please refer to "9.4. Shortcut keys settings" to learn how to set keys.

(1) File (F) Menu items related to files are found here.
Open file (O) Open RAW data and JPEG/TIFF images for development
processing as single files.
Develop (D) Develop one selected image and save it to a file.
Close Close all developed images.
Print (R) Print selected images.
Load development parameters Read development parameters saved in files.
(L)
Save development parameters Save development parameters for a selected image to a file.
Delete marked images (E) Delete images that was marked for deletion.
Copy marked images (C) Copy images that was marked for copying.
 Move marked images (M) Move images that was marked for moving.
Batch develop marked images (B) Perform batch develop for marked images.
Delete selected images Delete selected images.
Copy selected images Copy selected images.
Move selected images Move selected images.
Batch rename Rename selected images as a batch.
Batch develop selected images Perform batch develop for selected images.
Immediately batch develop Register selected images as jobs for batch development.
selected images
Close selected images Close selected images.
Exit (X) Close SILKYPIX.
Plug-ins Execute plug-ins.
Folder access history Display history of folders that have been edited.
(2) Edit (E) Operations of the type that change the status of images for processing are found here.
Undo (U) Return to the editing state of the previous development
parameter.
Redo (R) Advance to the next position of the history state.
Select all images Select all images for processing.
Select Select all images set as marked.
Invert selection Invert status of selected images.
Copy development parameters Copy development parameters of a selected image to the paste
(C) buffer.
Paste development parameters Paste development parameters copied to the paste buffer to
(P) selected images.
Partial paste of development Paste a part of development parameters copied to the paste
parameters buffer to selected images.
Partial paste of image properties Paste edited status of image properties copied to the paste
buffer to selected images.
Initialize development parameters Initialize development parameters of the selected images to
(I) default.
Rotate right Rotate right selected image.
Rotate left Rotate left selected image.
(3) Tools (T) Items related to preview display operations are found here.
Fitted display Always fit display to size of preview display.
Zoom tool Resize and move preview display with zoom tool.
Loupe tool Resize and move preview display with loupe tool.
Palm tool Resize and move preview display with palm tool.
Exposure bias tool Adjust exposure of designated preview display to standard.
Black level tool Adjust black levels based on designated points in preview display.
Gray balance tool Adjust white balance of designated preview display to standard.
Skin color tool Adjust exposure and white balance using designated skin color
tool in preview display.
Rotation tool Use rotation tool to correct inclination of image in preview display.
Chromatic aberration tool Use Chromatic aberration tool to correct chromatic aberration in
preview display.
Shading center tool You can designate the center when using shading for correcting
lens distortion.
Gray balance tool for With the Gray balance tool for underwater photo, you can
designate parts of the photo you want expressed in gray (neutral
underwater photo colors), which automatically adjusts the white balance so that
those parts are expressed in gray, as well as calculating the color
depth and underwater color deviation.
Spotting tools Use spotting tools to correct images and remove spots.
Crop tool Use the crop tool to crop an image in preview display.
Partial correction tool You can designate areas and make partial corrections to
brightness, contrast, etc.
(4) View (V) Items related to Main Control and Sub-controls are found here.
Thumbnail mode Switch to thumbnail mode.
Combination mode Switch to combination mode.
Preview mode Switch to preview mode.
Multi preview Divide preview window into two windows and compare images.
Previous image Move selected image to previous image.
Next image Move selected image to next image.
Display magnification (M) Set magnification of display in preview display.
Display warning Display highlight warning, shadow warning, out of color gamut
warning,soft proofing and focus peaking.
Emphasize spotting area Highlight areas for modifying images with "Spotting tools".
Emphasize partial correction Highlight areas for modifying images with "Partial correction
tool."
filter areas
Display grid Turn grid display in preview display on / off.
Sort thumbnails Set rule for thumbnail display order and sort thumbnails.
Filter images Select images to be displayed from within images for processing.
Display toolbar Turn toolbar display on / off.
Display status bar Turn status bar display on / off.
Parameters controls Turn parameters controls display on / off.
Folder Turn "Folder" sub-control display on / off.
Image properties Turn "Image Properties" sub-control display on / off.
Navigator Turn "Navigator" sub-control display on / off.
Histogram (H) Turn "Histogram" sub-control display on / off.
Batch development status Turn "Batch Development Status" sub-control display on / off.
Sub-controls Turn sub-controls display on / off.
Display settings (D) Make settings related to display.
(5) Parameters (P) Items related to development parameters are found here.
Copy development parameters Copy development parameters for a selected image to paste
(C) buffer.
Paste development parameters Paste development parameters copied to paste buffer to selected
(P) image.
Partial paste of development Paste a part of development parameters copied to paste buffer
parameters to selected image.
Partial paste of image properties Paste edited status of image properties copied to paste buffer to
selected image.
Initialize development parameters Initialize development parameters of selected image to default.
(I)
Initialize crop area (N) Initialize crop area of selected image to default.
Add taste Add / register development parameters of selected image as
taste.
Edit tastes Edit registered taste.
Load development parameters Read development parameters saved to file.
(L)
Save development parameters Save development parameters of selected image to file.
Rotate right Rotate right selected image.
Rotate left Rotate left selected image.
Copy development parameters to Copy development parameters of a selected image to temporarily
ROOM register buffer.
Paste development parameters Paste development parameters copied to temporary register
from ROOM buffer to selected image.
Paste the latest editing Paste latest automatically stored editing parameters to selected
development parameters image.
Default parameters settings Set a registered taste as default parameter.
(6) Development Items related to development processing are found here.
 (D)
Develop (D) Develop one selected image and save to a file.
Batch develop marked images (B) Perform batch develop for marked images.
Batch develop selected images Perform batch develop for selected images.
Immediately batch develop Register selected images to batch development job.
selected images
Batch development status Turn "Batch Development Status" sub-control on / off.
File output settings (F) Make settings related to saving files of developed images.
Batch development settings Make settings for batch development.
(7) Settings (S) Items related to settings are found here.
File output settings (F) Adjust settings related to saving files of developed images.
Display settings (D) Adjust settings related to displays.
Function settings (U) Adjust settings related to overall SILKYPIX functions.
Shortcut keys settings (K) Assign SILKYPIX functions to shortcut keys.
Default parameters settings Set a registered taste as default parameter.
Imprint data for printing settings Edit data for imprint data for printing.
Imprint data for file output Edit data for imprint data for file output.
settings
Export settings Export various settings to setting file.
Import settings Import settings from various setting files saved to file.
Inherit settings tastes If a past version of SILKYPIX has been installed, this setting will
be transferred.
Register window positions Saves current window and control box positions.
Restore window positions Recalls current window and control box positions.
Options (O)
Delete access history Delete access history of folders for processing.
Initialize window positions and display Initialize sub-controls display location and status.
states
Select skin Select SILKYPIX skin.
(8) Help (H) Items related to help and SILKYPIX are found here.
Open software manual (H) Display this manual.
Visit SILKYPIX WEB Site Display SILKYPIX web site.
Registration Start product key registration.
Clear product key registration Clear product key registration.
Troubleshooting This is a function for overcoming troubles by following
instructions and operations from our company's support desk.
Initialize user configuration files Initialize SILKYPIX user configuration files.
Delete temporary files Delete temporary files prepared for high-speed SILKYPIX
processing.
Delete development parameters files Delete development parameters files for all images currently
being processed.
Product key registration test Perform a test to see if it is possible to do an on-line registration
of the product key.
Troubleshooting settings Adjust settings for troubleshooting.
Version information Display SILKYPIX version information and customer's license
information.

0.1.3. Toolbar

Icons for functions that are frequently used are located in the toolbar.

* Many functions that can be selected here can be assigned shortcut keys.
 Please see "9.4. Shortcut keys settings" for how to set keys.

(1) Previous image Move selected image to previous image.

(2) Next image Move selected image to next image.
(3) Thumbnail mode Switch to thumbnail mode.
(4) Combination mode Switch to combination mode.
(5) Preview mode Switch to preview mode.
(6) Multi preview Divide preview window into two windows and compare images.
(7) Full screen preview Switch full screen preview on/off.

(8) Preview tools Adjust settings for tool mode and display methods for the preview
display.
(9) Display warning Adjust display settings for highlight warning, shadow warning, out of
color gamut warning and soft proofing.
(10) Undo Return edited development parameters one step back.
(11) Redo Add one step in history to the status of the editing history for
development parameters.
(12) Exposure bias tool Set designated preview display to standard and adjust exposure.
(13) Gray balance tool Set designated preview display to standard and adjust white balance.
(14) Black level tool Adjust black level based on designated points in preview display.
(15) Rotate left Rotate left selected image.
(16) Rotate right Rotate right selected image.
(17) Develop mark Mark selected image for development.
(18) Develop Develop one selected image and save to file.
(19) Batch develop selected Perform batch develop for selected images.
images
(20) Batch develop marked Perform batch develop for marked images.
images
(21) Print Print selected images.
(22) Batch development status Turn "Batch Development Status" sub-control on / off.
(23) Environment settings Make SILKYPIX settings such as File output settings, Display settings
and Function settings.

0.1.4. Information Box

This refers to the boxes to which controls can be located on either side of the Main Window.

Each Information Box is divided into an upper and lower part. The "Navigator" and "Histogram" can be located in the upper
part of the box.

In addition, the "Folder", "Parameters controls" and "Image properties" can be located in the lower part of the box.
0.1.5. Parameters Controls
"Parameters controls" refers to the entire box to which various controls for
adjusting development parameters are located.

You can locate multiple controls within the box, or combine each control and
locate them on a tab page or in a control box.

You can change the location of a control are performed from the Context
Menu, displayed when you click on the upper right of the controls.

Please see "0.1.7. How to Locate Controls" for details on how to change
locations.

The kinds of parts in the Main Control are classified into the following four
parts.

(1) Icons for selecting Select sub-controls category displayed on tab page.
category
(2) Dropdown list for selecting Select taste registered in various categories of development parameters.
 taste Open dropdown list by clicking on "V" mark.
(3) Icon for adding taste Register current development parameter as taste.
(4) Control for adjusting Adjust "exposure bias", "exposure bias fine tune" and
exposure bias "HDR/Dodge/Color Burn" parameters within development parameters.
Select automatic exposure bias here.

0.1.6. Sub-controls for adjusting development parameters

Sub-controls for adjusting development parameters are displayed on the tab page
by default, or as a floating window, with each category prepared separately. (*1)

Sub-controls can be located in the control box.

Selection / adjustment to parameters through sub-controls are mainly composed
of controls for adjusting numerical values using sliders and edit boxes, dropdown
lists and check boxes.

Please see "0.1.8. How to Operate GUI" for operation methods.

*1 As an example, "Sharpening" and "Noise reduction" exist as separate

sub-controls, but they share the same development parameter
category.

0.1.6.1. Category Selection Icons

Located in the Main Control part, the six following sub-controls are
displayed upon selecting the Category Selection Icon.

Furthermore, these sub-controls are located on the tab page by default.

If the development paramer on the sub-control has been modified, Icons will
be colored like those to the right.

(A) Tastes/Parameters Switch to "Tastes/Parameters" sub-control.

Tastes selected here are tastes for all categories of development
parameters. There are two types of tastes, overall tastes and partial
tastes.
(B) White balance Switch to "White balance" sub-control.
Tastes selected here are partial tastes in the "White balance" category.
(C) Tone Switch to "Tone" sub-control.
Tastes selected here are partial tastes in the "Tone" category.
(D) Color Switch to "Color" sub-control.
Tastes selected here are partial tastes in the "Color" category.
(E) Sharpening Switch to "Sharpening" sub-control.
Tastes selected here are partial tastes in the "Sharpening / Noise
reduction" category. "Sharpening" and "Noise reduction" exist as
separate sub-controls, but they share the same development
parameter.
(F) Noise reduction Switch to "Noise reduction" sub-control.
Tastes selected here are partial tastes in the "Sharpening / Noise
reduction" category. "Sharpening" and "Noise reduction" exist as
 separate sub-controls, but they share the same development
parameter.

0.1.6.2. Sub-control icons

Sub-controls that can be selected from the sub-control icons at the bottom of
the Parameters controls are as indicated below.

Controls displayed from the sub-control icons are displayed as a floating window
by default.

If the development paramer on the sub-control has been modified, Icons will be
colored like those to the right.

(1) White balance adjustment This is the sub-control for adjusting the white balance according to
feeling.
(2) Tone curve This is the sub-control for minute tone adjustments with the tone curve.
It has a level bias function.
(3) Highlight controller This is the sub-control that adjusts the tint and gradation of parts
saturated by color. It can also perform dynamic range adjustments.
(4) Fine color controller This is the sub-control for performing hue / chroma / brightness
adjustments for each color hue.
(5) Lens aberration controller This is the sub-control for compensating for shading (when surrounding
light quality is low), and distortion, as well as chromatic aberration.
(6) Rotation/Shift lens effect This is the sub-control for rotating images and performing shift lens
effect.
(7) Development settings This is the sub-control that displays "Development settings". It is not a
taste that can be set.
(8) Effects This is the sub-control for adding various effects to images, such as
portrait beautification and adding noise.
(9) Monochrome You can make adjustments when making black and white images by using
two types of settings: a "Color filter" to simulate effects such as adding
controller the set color filter to a lens, and "Lightness" to adjust the lightness of
specified hue.
(10) Underwater photo You can make special adjustments for underwater photography, such as
white balance dedicated to underwater photographs and color restoration
controller to restore colors lost in the water.
(11) Spotting tools Use spotting tools to correct images and remove spots.
(12) Partial correction You can designate areas and make partial corrections to brightness,
contrast, etc.
tool
(13) Crop tool Use the crop tool to crop an image in preview display.
(14) Editing history This is the sub-control that displays editing history for development
parameters, and allows you to return to past editing conditions or to
display them on the preview window for comparison.

0.1.7. How to Locate Controls

A icon is displayed to the upper right of most
controls, such as Parameters controls and Sub-controls.

A context menu is displayed when you click on this
menu, and you can change the location of controls from
this menu.

In addition, the method for locating controls that can be changed differs depending on the type of control. Please see "3.5.
Arranging parameters controls and sub-controls" for details.

0.1.8. How to Operate GUI

Various GUI controls are located in parameters controls and sub-controls, but common methods of operation are explained
here.

(1) Slider control

This is a SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 standard GUI composed of slider bars,
text boxes and buttons for changing numerical values.

Use the following methods to change values.

a) Drag the needle on the slider to change the value.

b) Click the slider to change the value.
c) Click on the arrow located to the left and right of the text box
to raise or lower the value.
d) Directly input numbers in the text box
Moving the focus to the text box will turn the background of the text box red. This indicates that you have
entered direct editing of numerical values mode.

Push the [Enter] key to confirm edited contents and leave the direct editing mode. Moving the focus to other
controls will also allow you to confirm edited contents and leave the direct editing mode.

Push the [Esc] key to delete edited contents and leave the direct editing mode.

There are cases in which intermediate value settings cannot be set through other operation methods.
e) Raise and lower values with the mouse wheel
The mouse wheel can be used only when the mouse cursor is within a slider control composed of slider bars,
edit boxes and buttons for changing numerical values.

Except for direct editing modes in text boxes, the concept of focus was not adopted for "SILKYPIX®
Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8", so please use the mouse wheel to move the mouse
cursor on controls for operations.
f) Click on the default value mark on the slider bar to set to the default value.
g) Click on the scale on the slider bar and set values.
h) Double click on the text box to set to the default value.

(2) Edit control

This is a SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 standard GUI composed of text boxes
and buttons for changing numerical values. It is used in several sub-controls such as crop tool.

a) Click on the arrows located to the left and right of the

text box to raise or lower the value.
b) Directly input numbers in the text box
Moving the focus to the text box will turn the background of the text box red. This indicates that you have
entered direct editing of numerical values mode.

Push the [Enter] key to confirm edited contents and leave the direct editing mode. Moving the focus to other
controls will also allow you to confirm edited contents and leave the direct editing mode.

Push the [Esc] key to delete edited contents and leave the direct editing mode.

There are cases in which intermediate value settings cannot be set through other operation methods.
c) Raise and lower values with the mouse wheel
The mouse wheel can be used only when the mouse cursor is within an edit control composed of text boxes
and buttons for changing numerical values.

Except for direct editing modes in text boxes, the concept of focus was not adopted for "SILKYPIX®
Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8", so please use the mouse wheel to move the mouse
 cursor on controls for operations.
d) Double click on the text box to set to the default value.
This will not function if no default value has been set.

(3) Dropdown list

A dropdown list will open when you click on the "V" mark to the right. Make your selection by moving the mouse and
clicking on the selected item.

You can change the selected item with the mouse when the dropdown list is not open.

(4) Checkbox
You can turn these adjustments ON or OFF by clicking on them.

0.2. What is SILKYPIX®?

This SILKYPIX® software generates images by processing RAW data recorded by the digital camera.(*1)

This process of generating an image by processing RAW data is called "development".

RAW data is the unprocessed data recorded as digital light energy information that image sensors capture. Compared to normal
JPEG files, RAW files are bigger in size because native information is recorded at the time the photograph was taken.

When photographs are taken in RAW e.g. when photographs are saved as RAW data, you will be able to perform more varied image
processing from the unprocessed light energy information even after taking the photograph.

The role of SILKYPIX® is to get the most out of the photographic merits of RAW and to draw out as much image information as
possible when reproducing scenes shot in RAW data. SILKYPIX® was developed to make this a reality.

*1 ... JPEG/TIFF files can be developed. For more details, please refer to '2.4. How to Handle JPEG/TIFF Image'.
0.2.1. Basic Image Adjustment Items

In this software, you can adjust various parameters of development procedure. Basic development parameters will be
introduced here.

(1) Exposure bias You can adjust parameters at the development process with SILKYPIX®
Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 and obtain the same
effect when using the function of the camera.
Also, you can use a high-precision "automatic exposure bias" feature, which
makes it possible to drive into correct exposure quickly.
(2) White balance adjustment You can obtain results comparable to photographs taken with appropriate white
balance settings on your camera by adjusting parameters when you develop
them.
You can also obtain results comparable to photographs taken using color
temperature conversion filters by adjusting parameters when you develop them.
(3) Sharpening / Noise You can emphasize the outline of a shot image, or change the noise reduction
reduction adjustments during the development process.
(4) Tone Adjustment You can change the tone of the target scene (soft or hard, etc.) during the
development process.
(5) Saturation Adjustment The "Color representation" enables you to treat an image like changing reversal
film, even after taking a photograph.
(6) Lens aberration controller You can correct or reduce shading (when surrounding light quality is low),
distortion and magnification aberrations from a peculiar lens, and create images
of a higher quality.
(7) Rotation/Shift lens effect If you find pictures you took with a camera that was tilted, you can adjust the
angle by using the "rotation" function after taking a photograph.
In addition, the "Shift lens effect" function has the same effect as using a shift
lens which enables you to control the perspective and to shoot a building
effectively.

0.2.2. Features of SILKYPIX®

When you store image data as RAW data and use this software to develop them, you don't have to worry much about
adjustments during taking the picture because you can do most corrections at the development process stage. The merits
of recording and saving to RAW data compared with saving in JPEG / TIFF are that information is not processed and the
amount of information recorded is much richer.

It is also possible to readjust photographs recorded and saved as JPEG / TIFF with this software. However, compared to
RAW data, there is less information recorded because JPEG / TIFF images convert to a special color space (sRGB, Adobe
RGB, etc.) and color gradation converts to 8bit = 256 steps.

Therefore, if you readjust photographs saved as JPEG / TIFF, the breadth of adjustments are narrowed and deterioration
of the image from the adjustments becomes greater.

In order to adjust images while maintaining high image quality, it is necessary to save the RAW data when taking the
photograph.

By saving to RAW data and developing with this software, you will be able to obtain very similar results when developing
after taking the photograph, as when color and image quality are adjusted at the time the photograph was taken.

SILKYPIX® greatly shortens the time spent shooting and increases the chance of capturing that important "moment" on
the camera.

In addition, with the adoption of a high development algorithm, SILKYPIX® has the following features.

(1) High resolution, High resolving power

Although it is generally considered that resolution is decided by the type of lens and the number of pixels of the
image sensor, a key factor of actual image resolution is the demosaic process during development procedure.

When you select RAW data to record images and use SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer
Studio 8 to develop them, you can obtain higher quality pictures than the JPEG image which the camera records in
taking a photograph.

(2) Advanced color separation

When photographing with a digital camera, the color boundary in high saturation area is lost and becomes white
outline, which is a specific phenomena of digital cameras.

This effect called digital haloing is caused by the white outline through the phenomena that occurs when color
resolution is low compared to excessive brightness.

We have therefore created a completely new demosaicing logic and embedded it into the software in order to
provide advanced color resolution. This logic allows delicate and advanced color resolution.

(3) Less false color

Most of digital cameras now have sensors with a structure called Bayer array.

The R, G, and B sensor elements are allocated in order of Bayer array flatly. Each sensor can only capture one of
the R, B or G, so false color appears on the edge of picture or area including delicate pattern.

The software reduces this false colors highly effectively with advanced pixel value forecast logic.
Fundamentally, high resolution, high separation capability, and false color reduction are not realized at the same time
logically. High resolution causes increased false color phenomenon, and a trail of false color reduction results in low
resolution.

However, the software efficiently enables the realization of these processes simultaneously to create natural
pictures and colors.

(4) Color noise reduction at high sensitive photography

When photographing in high sensitivity mode for night photography or in a dark place, noise of the image sensor
generates color noise spots on the image, which is specific to digital cameras.

These color noise spots appearing irregularly on the picture are very unpleasant to the eyes, and supposedly many
photographers avoid high sensitive photography because of this phenomenon.

The software provides a function for reducing the color noise that surprisingly creates clean pictures for high
sensitive photography.

With this software, you can select a wide variety of photographic methods and objects to create a new photograph.

(5) Hue control for highlight area

The software has the function to reduce color reverse or overexposure (bleached-out looking) in the highlight area.

For example, when taking a picture of a person, if you increase a development gain to make a skin color white, color
shift phenomenon occurs and highlight boundary area often becomes yellow.

The Highlight controller of the software enables color control in over exposed area and creates fine color adjustment
in these highlight areas.

(6) Real color reproducibility with high linearity

In order to create accurate colors with various types of light sources, we have embedded our unique color matching
logic based on multiple color matching data acquired in many test pictures.

Many types of light source with various spectral distributions, such as sunlight (natural light), fluorescent light,
tungsten filament lamp, glow of sunset, electric flash and combination of them are supported, which realizes
accurate color reproducibility.

Based on this color reproduction, you can utilize "3-dimensional color mapping methods", which converts colors into
3-dimentional data to create (Memory color) expressing similar colors with the colors in a human's memory, (Portrait
color), expressing highlights of the skin, and Film taste expressing colors in a positive (Film color)". You can use
these color modes according to its utilization or picture image.

Also, '4.10. Fine Color Controller' can change the precise color and to control the delicate color.

(7) Highlight reproduction control by the "dynamic range compression"

The "dynamic range" control function allows you to make the best use of RAW's ability, which has enough "dynamic
range" and records whiter energy than the white point.

You can obtain the smooth gradation in highlight area similar to film.

0.3. Difference to Other Photo Retouching Software

RAW development process with SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 and image processing with a
photo retouching software are similar.

While various types of photo retouching software that support RAW data are increasingly available in the market, there is a critical
difference between them. Understanding of the difference helps you to use SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX®
Developer Studio 8 to its fullest.

The important point is that this software always starts every image processing function based on RAW data.

When you change parameters in image processing (for example, changing "Exposure bias", "white balance" or "saturation"), the
software always starts processing based on RAW data.

Development parameters are recorded in separate files different from RAW data.

Therefore, although the workload for the computer increases, you can obtain a lot of benefits described below.

(1) RAW data is not modified (non-degrading image processing).

Original image data is never changed, so you don't have to worry about losing it even if you make a wrong operation.

The basic design of this software is to "not modify RAW data files".

If JPEG files recorded on a camera are processed with photo retouching software or digital camera editing software, there
is a chance that the original image will be overwritten, but with this software the original data file is not modified. (*1)

(2) You can change parameters until you're completely satisfied

In photo retouching software, images are processed through independent procedures, proceeding in order, one by one.

For example, if you want to change brightness and then adjust color balance, you have to create the image with a new
brightness level and then adjust color balance of the newly created picture image. Adjustment work proceeds while
checking each result.

If it is necessary to make minute adjustments to brightness after adjusting the color balance, then you have to choose to
either start over again from the beginning or make the image at that time even brighter. Using the first method will not
degrade the quality of the image, but it is that much more trouble. The second method is accompanied by image
degradation.

Always having to start over again is not actually realistic, and in most cases a certain degree of image degradation is
allowed and work proceeds. The user's technique is shown in how he or she lessens degradation in image quality and
adjusts the image to fit the purpose.

With this software, image processing always takes place in the optimal order after reading the RAW data. If development
parameters are determined, development results will be the same and there will be no degradation to image quality,
whatever sequence is employed until adjustments are concluded.

Whether you adjust the white balance after adjusting exposure or adjusting exposure after adjusting the white balance, if
the final parameters are the same, the results will be the same.

Therefore, you can change the parameters a number of times until you are satisfied with the result.

(3) There is no degradation in image quality from adjustment procedures.

If you make adjustments through photo retouching software, the adjustment procedures will have an influence on image
quality.

You have to decide which one should be adjusted first, brightness or color balance. You also have to consider when you
should adjust: Sharpening, Tone curve, and Color space for working or the Lens aberration controller.
Always performing these in the optimal procedure demands a high degree of knowledge which to the lay person may result
in excessive image quality deterioration.

In addition, even if procedures are appropriate, there are times when gradation or a part of the color gamut is lost due to
the combination of procedures.

This software is designed so that image degradation like that through other photo retouching software will not occur,
through internal processing that appropriately combines high-grade pipeline image processing that can transmit pixels
brighter than pure white.

Leave the image processing order up to SILKYPIX®. Whatever order the adjustments made to development parameter are
performed, SILKYPIX® will output development results of the highest quality through optimal image processing.

(4) You can restart adjustments whenever you want

Development parameters are automatically read and updated for each image, and are managed in a file separate from the
RAW data. (*2)Therefore, you can later readjust development parameters from the previous adjustment results.

Development parameters are also concealed in JPEG / TIFF images that saved developments. The development
parameters buried in these developments can be viewed with this software and applied to other images for processing. (*3)
(*4)

If you have the developed JPEG / TIFF images and the original RAW data, the development parameters for the
development results can be read and minute adjustments can be made from the previous adjustment results at any time.

(5) Perform efficient image adjustments.

After image processing based on parameters that were set is complete, photo retouching software performs the next image
processing, so image processing is complete at the stage when all adjustments have been completed. With this method, in
order to go through multiple image processes, you must wait until the previous process is complete, which means that
there is a lot of wait time until image processing is complete.

With this software, development processing is gathered for later and can be processed as a batch. You can use a workflow
in which development parameters are set while looking at a preview image and development processing is performed later
in a batch.

In order to efficiently adjust images, a preview image makes full use of simple image processing and partial development
processing, and it is displayed quickly. Even if one image processing has not completely finished, there are many times
when making the next adjustment to development parameters is possible, so less time is wasted waiting for the next
development parameter to take effect.

Even if a certain amount of time is necessary for actual development processing under the final development parameters,
the work can be performed efficiently until the development parameters take effect.

This workflow shows its power when processing large quantities of pictures at the same time.
 *1 It is possible to rewrite rotation information tags, depending on the settings, on JPEG / TIFF / DNG images.
*2 Development parameters are automatically recorded in a "SILKYPIX_DS" sub-folder created within folders that
contain RAW data for editing and JPEG / TIFF / DNG images.
*3 Development parameters are buried within the Exif information in JPEG / TIFF images that record development
results. They will not be buried if not recorded with Exif information.
*4 "Spotting tools" information is not included in development parameters buried in JPEG / TIFF images that record
development results.
* From an early stage, our company developed this kind of "non-degrading image processing" (named OIP technology
by our company) and adopted it for many products beginning with digital camera software called "Daisy Digital
Camera Friend" which was sold in 1999.
With SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8, we have applied the technology to such
processes that irregular images like Distortion Correction and, Digital Shift and implemented a completely
continuous image processing in those processes.
The process causing rotation and deformation of image must be usually executed after development, however, this
software allows users to skip this step and enables a complete set of smart workflow from the basic adjustment,
such as exposure and white balance, to lens aberration correction.

0.4. Differences with conventional products

The following is an explanation of functions that have been added / modified since "SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro 7".
Clarity adjustment
A “Clarity” parameter has been added to the “Tone” adjustment item to adjust the luminance level of each pixel
based on information from surrounding pixels.

Increasing the effects of “Clarity” will make it possible to finish the details of the subject in a bold picture, so it is
effective when you want to finish bold scenes with a hazy surrounding.

In contrast, by lowering the “Clarity” you can finish with a soft ambience like with a soft focus, so you can use it to
effect with women and children’s photography.

A Brush added to the Partial correction tools

A “Brush” that makes it possible to select correction areas more freely to “Partial corrections” was added in
“SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8”.

Using the “Brush” makes corrections easier even in difficult areas of “circular correction filter” and “gradual
correction filter.”

More creative adjustments have become possible by making partial corrections that do not take the form of the
subject.

Strengthening the Monochrome Controller Function

A Monochrome Controller function has been installed specialized for adjusting monochrome pictures.

Eight kinds of “Color filters” can be selected, and it is possible to reproduce filters when shooting monochrome
photographs on your screen.

In addition, since the “Lightness” can be adjusted for each hue, you can make a thorough finish to your black and
white photographs.

Even beginners of black and white photography can easily switch between color and monochrome images after
applying parameters in the preview display, so you will be able to intensify the understanding of effects on
monochrome photographs due to changes in color.

Underwater Photo Controller Installed as a Function for Correcting Dedicated to Underwater Photography
A function from “SILKYPIX® Marine Photography Pro ” for RAW development software dedicated to underwater
photography has been installed into “SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8” called
Underwater photo controller.

With this Underwater photo controller, you can correct the bluishness that is difficult to adjust with the normal white
balance by using “White balance for underwater.”

It also features “Color restoration,” which actually reproduces colors lost in water, as well as “Muddy reduction” to
eliminate murkiness in water.
Focus Peaking Function Installed
A Focus peaking function has been installed to detect the parts focused on from adjacent pixels in the image, and to
display them with colors added to those parts.

With this function, you can clearly check the area of focus.

Improved User Interface

We have improved the design to be clean and simple to make it possible to concentrate on adjusting images.

In addition, the layout has been changed to make it easier to understand for those using adjustment functions for
the first time.

Also, you can now change the background color of the preview display according to your preference.

back
 prev menu next

Copyright (C) 2004-2018, Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co.,Ltd. All rights reserved.
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 /
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 SOFTWARE MANUAL
back
prev menu next

1. Startup

1.1. Installation and Execution

1.1.1. Windows Version: Installation and Execution

When you execute the downloaded set-up program (Windows

version), installation of SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 /
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 starts.

"SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8" or "SILKYPIX® Developer

Studio 8" icon is created on the desktop after the installation
is complete.

Double-click the above icon on your desktop to execute "SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8" or ”SILKYPIX®
Developer Studio 8".

When installing or running "SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8" for the first time,
process as the administer in order to record administer information on the PC you are using.

Your admin permissions become necessary to continue. Please continue processing at the "User Account Control"
dialog.

If your account is a "Standard user", please enter the password of the

administrator account and then click [Yes] button.

If your account is a "Administrator", please click [Yes] button.


During the first time start-up process, SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8
operates as an administrator. After the completion of this process, SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 /
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 operates as a standard user.

Please refer to "1.3. Operations using Windows " for more details.
The "Program Compatibility Assistant" dialog is sometimes displayed. In this case, follow the instructions in "1.3.3.
Program Compatibility Assistant".

1.1.2. macOS: Installation and Execution

When you execute the downloaded dmg by double-clicking, the volume "SILKYPIX..."
is mounted on your desktop, which includes the installer.

When you execute the installer by double-clicking, installation of SILKYPIX® starts.
Please proceed according to the instruction.

Double-click the SILKYPIX® icon which was installed to execute SILKYPIX®.

(The administrator's password is required for the first execution.)

*To uninstall the SILKYPIX®, go to the Application folder and place the SILKYPIX® into the trash can.

* You can access the SILKYPIX users technique from the [Help] menu [Open software manual].

1.2. Trial and Registration of Product Key

To use this software permanently it is necessary to register the license that was purchased.

Moreover, you have a Trial period to test the full functions of SILKYPIX®.
1.2.1. Beginning Trial
You can test the full function of SILKYPIX® and check the development quality before purchasing the software
during the trial period.

When staring-up SILKYPIX® at first time, the "Registration" dialog is displayed. Click [Begin trial] to start trial.

You can use SILKYPIX® during only trial period without the license. Please purchase the license to continue to use
SILKYPIX®.

When installing or running "SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8" for the first time,
process as the administer in order to record administer information on the PC you are using.

Your permission becomes necessary to continue. Please continue processing using the "User Account Control"
dialog.

If your account is a "Standard user", please enter the password of the

administrator account and then click [Yes] button.

If your account is "Administrator", please click [Yes] button.

Processing is performed as the administrator the first time the program is run, but after this process is complete, it
runs as a standard user.

Please refer to "1.3 Operations using Windows " for more details.
1.2.2. How to Register Product Key

When you register the product key on your PC once, you will be
able to fully use "SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 /
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8".

There are two ways of registration. One is online registration
that is connecting with our server via the Internet, the other is
offline registration that you can register the license on your PC
without Internet connection.

After performing product key registration on the PC you use, if
you change the PC you use this software on, such as when
buying a new PC, you can transfer the license to the other PC
by performing "Clear Product key registration" from the
registered PC.

Please refer to "1.2.3. Product Key Registration Cancellation"
for details.

Please keep your serial number and the product key in safe place. We will not reissue your serial number and the
product key when you lost them.

In principle, we will not reissue your license, so please take care so that it will not be lost.

One product key can be registered on up to three computers. Please purchase additional licenses if you will use
this on four or more computers.

When installing or running "SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8" for the first time,
process as the administer in order to record administer information on the PC you are using.

Your permission is necessary to continue. Please continue the process at the "User Account Control" dialog.
If your account is a "Standard user", please enter the password of the
administrator account and then click [Yes] button.

If your account is "Administrator", please click [Yes] button.

Processing is performed as the administrator the first time "SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX®
Developer Studio 8" is run, but after this process is complete, it runs as a standard user.

Please refer to "1.3 Operations using Windows " for more details.
1.2.2.1. Online Registration of Product Key
If your PC is connected to the Internet, you can use "Online registration" that connects to our server via
Internet and register your license automatically.

The number of PCs that can be registered with one product key differs depending on the type of product
key. Furthermore, if you have to reregister due to some kind of damage, you can reregister as is if it is on
the same PC.

Please refer to "1.2.4. Inquiries Regarding Product Key Registration" and make an inquiry to our company's
 support desk if you cannot reregister.

Please purchase additional licenses if you will use this on four or more computers.

Please enter your "Serial Number" and "Product Key" and then click [Register product key] button on the
"Registration" dialog.

Your "Product Key" and "Serial Number" are sent to our server via Internet for a registration. Please
confirm your network connection during the registration. If the registration is not completed by some
troubles or the network is disconnected during the registration, you cannot use SILKYPIX® until the
registration is completed.

(Please understand that you are responsible for any charges for the Internet connection during the
registration.)

After completing the registration, you do not need to enter your product key in next execution.

* Internet connection is required only for online registration. You do not need Internet connection for
operation of SILKYPIX®.

[Error during online registration]

Sometimes one may face an error during online registration in spite of an Internet connection working
correctly.

Many of the problems may be caused by your network, security software or proxy/firewall settings.
We may not be able to support you with your security software or network setting. It is your
responsibility that SILKYPIX® can connect to our server via Internet.

Please refer to '12.2. Troubleshooting for "Registration of Product Key"'.

If you could not complete online registration, we offer you offline registration as an alternative.

[When reregistering is required]

If product key registration information has been lost because there was some problem with the PC
that the product key was registered on and you had to reinstalled your OS, it will be necessary to
register the product key again.

If reregistering to the same PC, please re-register using the same procedures for new registrations.

A product key and a serial number are required for reregistering. In principle, we will not reissue your
license, so please take care so that it will not be lost.

[If you want to transfer to another PC]

Transfers to other PCs can be done automatically by performing "Clear Product key registration" only
if product key registration was performed by "Online registration".

Please refer to "1.2.3. Product Key Registration Cancellation" for details.
1.2.2.2. Offline Registration of Product Key
This is a method of registering your product key without
Internet connection. If your PC is not connected to the
internet, or your internet environment has other issues
due to security software or proxy/firewall setting, please
use this method to register your product key.

This is the way to enter "certification code" on the
"Offline registration" dialog.

You can acquire a "certification code" with Internet
browser, e-mail.

When you register offline on the PC you use and are
issued a "certification code," you cannot obtain a
"certification code" for use on the same PC again. If it
is necessary to reissue due to some kind of damage,
please make a request for reissuance by (C) e-mail.

Please purchase additional licenses if you will use this
on four or more computers.

Please enter your "Product Key" and "Serial Number",
and then click [Offline registration] button on the "Registration" dialog. To proceed the offline registration,
please follow instructions on the "Offline registration" wizard.

There are three methods (A-C) to register your product key. You should get "request code" at first, then
acquire "certification code" with some method.
Please go ahead according to the instruction.

Please refer to the notes for offline registration at '1.2.2.3. Note for Offline Registration'.

If product key registration was performed using this method, you cannot automatically perform "Product key
reregistering" and "Transfer to another PC".

Please refer to "1.2.4. Inquiries Regarding Product Key Registration" if you have to reregister due to some
kind of trouble or if you change the PC you use with the purchase of a PC.

A. Using the Internet browser with the PC that SILKYPIX® is installed

 This is a method in case that you can connect Internet and use the Internet browser but you cannot
complete online registration.
You can use this method if you can connect our "SILKYPIX certification site" with the Internet
browser on your PC that SILKYPIX is installed.

Step-1

Select "A. Using the Internet browser with the
PC that SILKYPIX is installed" and then click
[Next] button,

Select which PC (1st, 2nd, 3rd) you will use from
"PC requesting certification code".

Step-2

The "request code" will be displayed, which is
necessary to acquire a "certification code" at
Step-3.
"SILKYPIX certification site" will be displayed with
the Internet browser automatically.

Please click the [Next] button.

Step-3

Please enter the "certification code" which you
got from the "SILKYPIX certification site".

Then click the [Apply] button to complete the
registration of your product key.

B. Using the Internet browser with another PC

This is a method in case you cannot connect the internet on the PC where SILKYPIX® is installed,
but you can connect Internet on another PC.
You can use this method if you can connect our "SILKYPIX certification site" with the Internet
browser on any PC.

Step-1

Select "B. Using the Internet browser with
another PC" and then click [Next] button,

Select which PC (1st, 2nd, 3rd) you will use from
"PC requesting certification code".
 Step-2

The "request code" will be displayed, which is
necessary to acquire a "certification code".

Please display "SILKYPIX certification site" with
Internet browser on any PC.

And then please get "certification code"
according to the instruction on the "SILKYPIX
certification site".

If you got the "certification code", then please
click the [Next] button.

SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 English
certification site

http://www.isl.co.jp/SP8E/

SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 English
certification site

http://www.isl.co.jp/S8E/

Step-3

Please enter the "certification code" which you
got from the "SILKYPIX certification site".

Then click the [Apply] button to complete the
registration of your product key.

C. Offline registration by E-mail (or reissuing request of certification code)

This is a method for the case that you cannot connect Internet on your PC that SILKYPIX® is
installed, but you can send and receive e-mails on another PC.

Step-1

Select "C. Offline registration by E-mail" and
then click [Next] button,

Select which PC (1st, 2nd, 3rd) you will use from
"PC requesting certification code".
 Step-2

The "request code" will be displayed, which is
necessary to acquire a "certification code".

Please send an e-mail with the subject and text
reading "Request code" to our offline registration
center ([email protected]). We will
send reply e-mail with your "certification code"
to you in three business days or less.

Please include the following contents in your e-mail.

Subject: "Request SILKYPIX certification code"
※ If a reregistration, "Request reissuance of SILKYPIX certification code"

Text of e-mail:
1. Product Name

2. Acquired "Request code"

3. Customer name

4. Phone number

5. E-mail address for reply

(6. If reregistering, "Reason reregistration is required")

Step-3
Please suspend the procedure until you receive a
reply e-mail from us. Click [Suspend] button to
suspend the procedure.

After you receive the "certification code"
specified on our reply e-mail, please continue
"offline registration" from menu command [Help
(H)]-[Registration].

Please enter "certification code" that you have
received from us.

Then click the [Apply] button to complete the
registration of your product key.

* Please understand that you are responsible for any charges for the Internet connection during the
registration.
 1.2.2.3. Note for Offline Registration

(1) Offline registration of a product key used on the SILKYPIX certification site can only be performed
once per request code issued from the one PC you will use. If you need to perform offline registration
again because you are changing PCs or reinstalling your OS, please refer to "1.2.4. Inquiries Regarding
Product Key Registration" and send an inquiry to our company's support desk.
(2) You should complete offline registration procedure as soon as possible. Once the "request code" is
issued, you should complete the procedure within a week, or "certification code" will be expired.
(3) Once the "request code" is issued, offline registration procedure is started. If you do not get
"certification code" after issuing "request code", you can redo from the first step. But once you got
"certification code", you cannot redo anymore.
(4) Please refer to "1.2.4. Inquiries Regarding Product Key Registration" if you have to reregister due to
reinstalling your OS or if you change the PC you use this software on with the purchase of a new PC.

1.2.3. Product Key Registration Cancellation

These are the procedures for automatic performing a transfer to the PC on which you use this software, such as
with the purchase of a PC.

The transfer of licenses can be performed automatically over the Internet only if product key registration was done
by "on-line registration". These procedures cannot be used if product key registration was done by "off-line
registration".

You will perform "Clear Product key registration" on the PC on which you performed product key registration, and
then perform "Product Key Registration" on another (one) PC to which you wish to transfer.

One important matter to note is that you will not be able to reregister the same product key to a PC on which you
have performed "Clear Product key registration". Please be aware that this method cannot be used to alternate
between two PCs.

[Procedures for Product Key Registration Cancellation]

(1) Start the software on the PC on which you will perform registration cancellation.
(2) Select "Clear Product key registration" from the "Help" menu.
If the "Clear Product key registration" menu item is not available, you cannot perform "Clear Product key
registration" on your PC.

If you are using an environment of Windows, the "User Account Control" dialog will appear and ask if
you will continue. Continue by using one of the following methods.

If your account is for a standard user (if not a manager),
enter the manager's account password and click on the
[Yes] button.

If your account is as the manager, click [Yes].

This process requires "Manager Authority".

(3) Click the "OK" button when the "Clear Product key registration" dialog appears.
This contacts our company server and communicates the registration status of the product key
registered on the server.

(4) "Registration is initialized."

Click the "OK" button when this message appears.
(5) SILKYPIX will end.
This completes the procedures through "Clear Product key registration".

(6) Start SILKPIX on the new PC on which you will use the software and perform product key registration.
Product key registration can only be performed through "on-line registration". Please see "1.2.2.1. Online
Registration of Product Key" for registration methods.
If you cannot perform "Online Registration", please refer to "1.2.4. Inquiries Regarding Product Key
Registration" and contact our company's support desk.

[Important Points Concerning Product Key Registration Cancellation]

(1) Registration of a product key whose registration was cancelled from a PC must be registered by "on-
line registration".
(2) Reregistering a product key to another (one) PC must be registered by "on-line registration".
(3) You cannot reregister the same product key to a PC on which you have performed "Clear Product key
registration".
(4) Product key registration cancellation must be performed with manager authority.

1.2.4. Inquiries Regarding Product Key Registration

This software offers a method so that customers can automatically perform product key registration, reregistering,
and transfers to other PCs over the Internet on their own.

Before contacting our company, we ask that you confirm whether or not you can solve your problem by utilizing
these methods.

A method for solving your problem may be listed in the information on our company's web page
(http://www.silkypix.com). Please utilize user support's "FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)".

If you still cannot solve the problem on your own, please e-mail ([email protected]) our company's
support desk.

When doing so, please give as many details of the problem as possible and check that you have not left out any
required items.

[Required items to include when e-mailing]
Software name: "SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8"

Software serial number (Please see "12.1. How to check the software version and your registered
information")

Your name

Phone number

Return e-mail address

Description of the problem (as detailed as possible)

1.3. Operations using Windows

1.3.1. Reason to execute program as administrator
If you are using "SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8" on a Windows (Windows 7 /
8.1 / 10) and you run the product for the first time, start a trial period, or perform product key registration or
registration deletion, processing will take place as administrator in order to record administrator information on the
PC you use.

Your permission becomes necessary to continue. Please continue the process at the "User Account Control"
dialog.
If your account is a "Standard user", please enter the password of the
administrator account and then click [Yes] button.

If your account is a "Administrator", please click [Yes] button.

During these process, SILKYPIX® operates as an administrator. After
the completion of these process, SILKYPIX® operates as a standard
user.

1.3.2. Caution when you use the program in Windows

On Windows, you can run this software specifically as the administrator by assigning an administrator attribute to
the executable file (.EXE) or a shortcut, or by selecting "Run as administrator" on the context menu.

But there are some communication problems with other software if SILKYPIX® operates as the administrator.
Please execute SILKYPIX® as a standard user.

In case of the first time start-up, beginning trial, or registering product key in Vista, SILKYPIX® operates as the
administrator to record the information to your PC.

Processing as the administrator is automatically led but your permission becomes necessary to continue. Please
continue processing according to '1.3.1. Reason to execute program as administrator'.

back
prev menu next

Copyright (C) 2004-2018, Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co.,Ltd. All rights reserved.
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 /
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 SOFTWARE MANUAL
back
prev menu next

2. Designating image files for processing

To perform RAW data processing on SILKYPIX ®, first designate an image file (RAW / JPEG / TIFF / DNG) for processing.

There are two methods for designating image files: in file units or in folder units.

You can designate files on dialogs and through drag and drop.

You can designate folders from the "Folder" sub-control, from the history up to that point and through drag and drop.

There is also a way to add image files for processing when other image files are already designated for processing.

If image files and folders are designated for new processing, image files that had been set for processing to that point will
automatically be closed.

If you designate image files and folders through the method for adding image files for processing, the newly designated image files
will be added to the image files for processing to that point.
2.1. Opening File

2.1.1. Selecting from dialogs

This is a method for designating image files for processing

in file units. You can designate multiple files. You can also
add files.

When you select [File (F)]-[Open File (O)] from the Menu,
the "Open file" dialog will appear.

You can designate one or more image files for processing
from the "Open file" dialog.

When selecting multiple image files for processing, do so
while holding down either the [Shift] key or [Ctrl] key.

After selecting multiple files for processing, next designate whether they are for new processing or for adding to
processing.

When the [Ctrl] key is pushed, the "Open (O)" button changes into an "Append (O)" button. If adding, please click
on the "Add and open (O)" button in this status.

If you click [Open (O)] button without clicking [Ctrl] key, the RAW data files is closed automatically which have
been already loaded for processing.
And the RAW data files selected in this time is loaded instead of them.

2.1.2. Designating by drag and drop

This is a method for dropping image files for processing into SILKYPIX ® from a tool that files can be dragged from,
such as Explorer or Finder.

If files that are not for processing are included, they cannot be dropped. Multiple files can be designated. Files can
also be added.

If you start dragging with a left drag, files dropped into SILKYPIX ® will be available for new processing. Image files
for processing up to that point will be automatically closed.

If you start dragging with a right drag, when you drop them into SILKYPIX ® a menu will appear for selecting the
processing method. You can select new processing, adding or cancel processing for the dropped files.

However, if there are no image files for processing up to that point, the menu will not appear and they will be
processed as new processing.

2.2. Opening Folder

2.2.1. Selecting from the "Folder" sub-control

Open Folder function allows you to select and load the RAW data files from
the specified folder. All image files for processing in the designated folder
will be processed. This will be designated as new processing, and image
files for processing up to that point will be automatically closed.

When you select [View (V)]-[Folder] from the Menu or click on the
icon, the "Folder" sub-control will be displayed in the Information Box.

Designate the folder with image files for editing from this screen.

"Folder" sub-control of Windows version

(A) Folder name edit box

The path for the selected folder is displayed. You can also edit these characters and designate a folder
to open.
(B) "Select recent accessed folder" button
Designate a folder from the folder history. Please see 2.2.2. Selecting from folder history for details.
(C) "Select subfolder" button
You can set whether subfolders will also be searched when reading. See 2.2.1.1. Load from Sub-folder
for details.
(D) "Update" button
 This renews the folder display to the latest status. You can introduce media and reflect newly created
folders on the display.
(E) Folders
Folders are displayed.
Select a folder by clicking on a folder. The selected folder is for new processing. Image files that had
been processing to that time will be automatically closed. Also at that time, the selected folder will
become the focus and the folder name will be circled.
If you hold down the [Ctrl] key and left click on a folder not on the focus, you can add that folder.
If you hold down the [Shift] key and left click on a folder not on the focus, you can select multiple
folders that were left clicked while holding down the [Shift] from the folder of focus.
Additional folders cannot be designated subfolders. Only designated folders are referred.
The background of the folder name for the folder with files currently being read is white.
In addition, when you add an image for processing to a single folder that has been selected, the "Hot
folder" function for adding thumbnails will automatically turn ON. Please see "4.1.2.2. Hot folder"
concerning the "Hot folder" function.

2.2.1.1. Load from Sub-folder

You can select whether subfolders within designated folders will also be searched with the "Designate
subfolder" in "Open folder".

By using this option, you can simultaneously designate image files dispersed and stored in multiple folders
located hierarchically.
2.2.2. Selecting from folder history
You can select image files for processing in folder units from folder history to that point.

You can designate only one folder when designating files by this method. You cannot add image files for processing.
You can designate sub-folders.

There are two ways to make selections from folder history. The first is to open [File (F)] from the menu and display
a list of folder history at the bottom of the menu.

Another method is to click on the mark on the right side of the Folder Name Edit Box.

Use one of these methods to select one file from the list.

Furthermore, if you move the mouse cursor to the right edge of the menu, a submenu will appear. You can
designate subfolders from this submenu.
2.2.3. Assign Using Drag & Drop

This is a method for dropping a folder from tools that allow you to drag folders, such as Explorer and Finder, to
SILKYPIX ®. Only one folder can be dropped. If multiple folders are selected, they cannot be dropped. Furthermore,
you cannot designate subfolders.

An error will be shown if a folder that does not include an image file for processing is dropped. Drop folders that
include an image file for processing.

If a drag begins as a left drag, the folder dropped to SILKYPIX ® will be subject to new processing. Image files that
had been subject to processing to that point will be automatically closed.

If a drag begins as a right drag, a menu will appear for selecting processing methods for that which was dropped to
SILKYPIX ®. You can choose new processing, adding or cancel processing of the dropped folder.

However, if there are no image files that had been subject to new processing to that point, the menu will not
appear and it will be treated as being subject to new processing.

2.3. When RAW data does not open as expected

If RAW data does not open as expected, it may be that the RAW data is corrupt or that the RAW data is not compatible
with this software.

Refer to the Supported Camera List and check that the RAW data can be used with this software.
If RAW data from a incompatible camera is read, a warning such as, "A camera not supported has been detected," may be
shown. Even so, operations such as developing may be performed, but colors from cameras not supported may be strange
or other trouble may occur, so please do not use them.

In addition to RAW data (including DNG), JPEG image and TIFF image files can be processed by this software. Please note
that there are some types of files that are not supported, even if they are DNG, JPEG images or TIFF images.

Initial settings will open RAW data, JPEG images and TIFF images, but there is also a mode that makes only RAW data
subject to processing. Please see "9.3.1.8. Handle only RAW images" for details.

2.4. How to Handle JPEG/TIFF Image

SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 has the feature of developing JPEG/TIFF image like
the RAW data, which is called "SILKYPIX® RAW Bridge".

It may seem strange to use the word "development" for JPEG/TIFF image, however, it is extremely convenient to
process JPEG/TIFF images RAW files by using the same parameters.

There is a difference between SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 and a photo
retouching software: SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 does something like an "inverse
transformation" from a JPEG/TIFF image to a virtual RAW image and then treats them same as RAW data internally.

Therefore, SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 does the color processing which is more
correct than photo retouching software can be done.

As a result, you can use most functions with a sense similar to that of handling RAW data with extensions such as ".JPG"
and ".TIF".

JPEG/TIFF Processing Mode is enabled in the development settings, please refer to '4.8.4. Develop JPEG/TIFF images'
for the details.

SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 processes tone interpolation and wide reproduction
color mapping for JPEG/TIFF images, but JPEG/TIFF images have too little information compared to genuine RAW.
The substantial adjustment for JPEG/TIFF images causes the failure of the image.

2.4.1. Color temperature of JPEG / TIFF images

For the "RAW data", you can use the absolute "color temperature" to adjust white balance.
For example to the scene to have taken the photograph under the 3000K bulb, you can get the approximately right
white balance if you set "color temperature" on 3000K.

However, with JPEG / TIFF images, this is after white balance processing has been done on the camera, so
unfortunately the color temperature at the time the photograph was taken cannot be set to standard reference.

Supposing there are JPEG / TIFF images that have had perfect white balance adjustments, they cannot be
distinguished, no matter what source of light these photographs were taken under.

For actual photographed JPEG / TIFF images, the influence of the light source at the time it was taken will remain,
but in either case the color temperature at the time it was taken cannot be ascertained, so the default white
balance values are fixed at color temperature = 6500K, color deviation = 3. This color temperature is the white
point value for sRGB and Adobe RGB.

Whatever light source the JPEG / TIFF images were taken under, they will be processed under the assumption of
having been taken under a light source of 6500K.

Please understand that if you make adjustments to white balance on JPEG / TIFF images, they will be adjustments
relative to this color temperature = 6500K, color deviation = 3.

As this is not the actual color temperature of the light source when the photograph was taken, you may feel there
is a contradiction, but what is strange with this processing format is the displayed color temperature may be
inaccurate. There are no limitations to adjusting the white balance.

Relative adjustments are adjustments to the three parameters, color temperature, color deviation and shading
adjustments that diverge from the default values color temperature = 6500K, color deviation = 3. The numerical
value of color temperature itself is an assumed value and has no meaning, so this method cannot be used to
designate white balance with absolute values of color temperature.

Usage is the same as that of "Auto" white balance, gray balance tool and skin color designation tools on RAW data.

2.4.2. Sharpening / Noise Reduction for JPEG/TIFF Processing

For the "JPEG/TIFF" image, the default setting of the "Sharpening" sub-control and the "Noise reduction" sub-
control has no effect.

You have to relatively adjust "sharpening" or "noise reduction" from the original "JPEG/TIFF" image, because it
has already been processed in the camera or by software.
2.4.3. Feature that cannot be Used for JPEG/TIFF
You cannot use "Demosaicing sharpness" or "Resolution plus" for JPEG/TIFF images.

back
prev menu next

Copyright (C) 2004-2018, Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co.,Ltd. All rights reserved.
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 /
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 SOFTWARE MANUAL
back
prev menu next

3. Display modes

Displaying images for processing is done in two types of display windows.

The first is a "Thumbnail window" that displays a list of images for processing. The other is a "Preview window" for large
display of only one selected image.

The "Preview window" offers functions that divide the window in two for comparing two images or comparing results from
adjusting different development parameters of the same image.

Five display modes are available in SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 through the
combination of these two kinds of windows.

(1) Thumbnail mode

The thumbnail mode is a display mode in which the "Thumbnail window" is located in the main window and the
preview window is not displayed.

(2) Preview mode

The preview mode is a display mode in which the "Preview window" is located in the main window and the thumbnail
window is not displayed.

(3) Combination mode

The "combination mode" is a mixed mode of the "thumbnail mode" and "preview mode", displaying Thumbnails and
single view at the same time. You can change the location of the "Thumbnail Window" and "Preview Window".
Make changes to location from sub-menus under "Arrange on main window," displayed by right clicking on
 "Thumbnail Window". You can change the location of the "Thumbnail Window" and the scroll direction of
Thumbnails from the Display settings. You can change the number of images available for display and size of
thumbnails in the "Thumbnail Window" by dragging between the "Thumbnail Window" and the "Preview Window."
Please refer to "3.3.3. Changing the Size of Thumbnails" for details.
In addition, there are special display modes in both the "Preview Window" and the "Thumbnail Window".

(4) Full Screen Display for "Preview Window"

This mode is for displaying the "Preview Window" on the full screen. You can enter this mode by clicking on the
"Full screen preview" button in the toolbar. The overall ambience of the photograph can easily be checked by
using the full screen preview. In addition, if you use a multi monitor environment (with two or more monitors), the
preview can be displayed on a monitor separate from the monitor with the main window. You can perform editing by
locating the controls on the sub-monitor while displaying the photograph on the full screen of the main monitor.

(5) Floating Display of "Thumbnail Window"

This is the mode for displaying the "Thumbnail Window" as a floating window. Changing to a floating window can be
set from the context menu displayed by right clicking on the top of the "Thumbnail Window". The scrolling direction
of the "Thumbnail Window" while a floating window is the same as the scrolling direction under Combination Mode.
Special display conditions are conditions under which both the Thumbnail Mode button and the Preview Mode button
are selected at the same time. Under these conditions, when you click the button corresponding to the window for the
special display conditions, you can switch between Display / Close Display for the window.

3.1. Switching Display Modes

Switching to "Thumbnail Mode," "Preview Mode" and "Combination Mode" can be performed at any time with [View (V)]
in the menu or with the toolbar icon.

If you double click a selected image in "Thumbnail Mode," it will switch to "Preview Mode".

3.2. Preview window

The "Preview Window" is a window for displaying preview images of selected images.

By opening a preview image of a selected image, you can view the entire image or enlarge just one part to check it.
3.2.1. Multi preview

There is a "Multi preview" Function that displays two screens, separating the "Preview Window" into left and right
screens.

There are two multi preview modes. Three examples of ways to utilize them will be introduced here. Please make
full use of their applications.

(1) Reference preview mode

Of the two displays, make the left display your main preview, and use the right display as a reference
preview.

The selected image for adjusting development parameters will always be displayed in the main preview.

There are several ways you can choose images to be displayed in the reference preview, but whichever way
you choose, the reference preview display is for comparison uses and you cannot edit development
parameters there.

(A) Compare preview images of two images

Use this to choose the best scene taken from multiple images.

(B) Compare preview images of a single image with different development parameters applied
Use this to adjust parameters and compare parameter adjustments before and after they are made.

(2) Reproduction preview mode

Selected images for adjusting development parameters are displayed on both displays.

You can set options such as display position and magnification for the two images, so you can view one
overall image and use the other screen to display partial magnification.

You can also display two important parts of the photograph and decide how to adjust parameters.
3.2.1.1. Operation Methods
Switch to multi preview by clicking on the icon in the toolbar.

The status of the multi preview display is shown at the top of the screen in the icon bar as seen in this
figure. You can change modes and preview displays with these icons.

(1) To reference preview Display the image shown in the main preview in the reference preview as
well.
(2) To main preview Display the image shown in the reference preview in the main preview as
well.(*1)
(3) Reference preview mode This is a mode for displaying different images on two screens and
comparing.
You can compare different images or different development parameters of
the same image.
(4) Reproduction preview This is a mode that displays one image in two screens.
mode You can adjust development parameters while looking at two parts of the
image.
(5) Link display mode This is a mode for linking display position and magnification on two screens.
You can turn this on / off.
When this mode is on, you can move or resize images keeping the relative
relationships of the two images currently displayed.
Turn off this mode if you want to change the relative relationships of the
two images or if you want to move or resize an image on only one screen.
(*2)
(6) Initialize display position Initialize location and magnification of images in the reference or
reproduction previews, and match with the main preview display status.
(7) Previous image Change the image displayed in the reference preview to the previous image.
(*3)
(8) Next image Change the image displayed in the reference preview to the next image.(*3)
(9) Return to history Return to the editing state of the image displayed in the reference preview
one step before.(*4)
(10) Proceed to history Advance the image displayed in the reference preview to the state of the
following editing step.(*4)
(11) Close Close multi preview and return to a preview with one screen.

*1 This is effective only when the image displayed in the reference preview can be selected as an image
for editing.
Images displayed in the reference preview cannot be run if there is a past editing history or if it is an
image already closed.
*2 "Link display mode" status is reflected by pushing the [Ctrl] key and only while it is held down.
Use this for when you want to temporarily turn off linkage in order to change the relative relationship
of two images.
*3 This works only during reference preview mode. This cannot be used if in reproduction preview mode.
*4 This function is used for comparing differences in development parameters for one image.
Images displayed in the main preview and the reference preview must be the same.
This works only during reference preview mode. This cannot be used if in reproduction preview mode.

3.2.1.2. Selecting Reference Preview Images

You can display an image different from the main preview image in the reference preview or different
development parameters for the same image as the main preview.
 (1) Switching images displayed in the reference preview
(A) Switching to previous or next image with the icon bar
Use the and icons on the icon bar to go to displays of the previous or next image.
(B) Switch by clicking on an image for display on the thumbnail window.
The icon is displayed to the lower right of the image when the mouse is moved over the
image to be switched on the thumbnail window.

You can display the designated image in the reference preview by clicking on this icon.

You can also display the designated image in the reference preview by clicking on the image
while holding down the [Alt] key.

(C) Switching to previous or next image with keys

You can also switch images using [Alt + arrow key] when the Thumbnail Window is displayed.

(2) How to Display the Same Image under Different Development Parameters from the Main Preview to a
Reference Preview
When the same image is displayed on the main preview and the reference preview, you can return or
go forward to previous development parameters for the image displayed in the Reference Preview
with the two icons, and on the Icon Bar.

In addition, by clicking on , you can combine the editing conditions of the image displayed in the
Main Preview and the editing conditions in the Reference Preview.

3.2.2. Changing display position / magnification

The preview display comes with functions for changing display position and magnification for checking parts of the
image with the mouse in the preview display.

The aims of mouse operations in the preview display are switched in tool mode.

Be sure to select one of the following tool modes for changing display position and magnification: "Fitted display",
"Zoom tool", "Loupe tool (zoom in)", "Loupe tool (zoom out)" and "Palm tool".

"Fitted display" is a mode that fits the entire image in the display. The other four tools can be used to change
display position and magnification through their own methods.

3.2.2.1. Changing preview display position and magnification

There are several ways to change preview display position and
magnification.

Methods other than changes through mouse operations on the
preview display will be explained here.

(1) Change display magnification from the toolbar and the menu
Click on the "Preview tools" icon on the toolbar, and a menu will be displayed for changing tool modes
and display magnification in the preview display.

Also, items for changing display magnification are enumerated in a submenu opened from [View (V)]-
[Display magnification (M)] from the menu and in a context menu displayed by right clicking on the
preview window.

Display magnification can be changed from these menus.

Whole display Magnify display so that the entire image fits into the display area.
100% Display magnification (per pixel) so that one dot of developed RAW data is
 one dot on the display.
25% Change display magnification to each setting.
50%
200%
400%
Zoom in + Adjust magnification to enlarge one step from the current display
magnification.
Zoom out - Adjust magnification to reduce one step from the current display
magnification.

(2) Change display magnification with the slider control

At the bottom of the preview window there is a slider control for changing display magnification.

The slider control is composed of three controls, the slider, a dropdown list and a text box. You can
set display magnification using these.

(3) Change display position with the scroll bar

When "preview tools" is anything other than "Fitted Display," vertical and horizontal scroll bars are
enabled on the right and bottom of the preview window.

You can adjust the display position using these.

3.2.2.2. Change display position / magnification with the mouse

The relationship between mouse operations and functions in the preview display are determined by the tool
mode. There are five tool modes: "Fitted display", "Zoom tool", "Loupe tool (zoom in)", "Loupe tool (zoom
out)" and "Palm tool".

The following explains how to change display location / magnification in each tool mode.

(1) Fitted display

In this mode, the entire image is displayed so as to fit the image to the preview window. When resizing
the window, its display magnification changes automatically according to the window size.

In this mode, you can execute the following mouse operation

Left Double-click ... Display magnification becomes 100% and the "Zoom tool" is selected
[Shift] + Left-Drag ... The "Zoom tool" is selected and you can change display magnification
continuously.

Changing display magnification is possible from the menu, even if the tool mode is "Fitted display". If
the display magnification is changed, the tool mode will automatically switch to "Zoom tool".

(2) Zoom tool

"Zoom tool" is a convenient tool mode in which you can enlarge or reduce the preview
display instantly, and can change the displayed position. "Zoom tool" has both "Loupe
tool" and "Palm tool" functions.

Once you master these operations, you can change the size and position of the preview
display very quickly.

Left-Drag ... You can grab and move a picture (panning operation).
Left Double-Click ... When display magnification is at 100%, the magnification is changed so
that the whole image fits on the window (full display). When the
display magnification is at other than 100%, the magnification is
returned to 100% at which developed pixels are the same as those on
the window. Thus, only by left double-clicking, you can switch a
magnification value between full display and 100%. This turns out to be
a very convenient function.
[Shift] + Left-Drag ... You can change display magnification continuously, with the center of
changing being at the drag-starting point. You can instantly enlarge or
reduce the portion when you want to check in detail. This is very
helpful.

(3) Loupe tool (zoom in)

The "Loupe tool (zoom in)" offers a convenient mouse tool mode that can enlarge the
image, with the center of enlargement being at the clicking point.

Since this mouse operation has been adopted by a lot of other applications, it appears
 familiar to many users.

When you operate this tool while pressing the [Alt] key, (zoom in) does not work but
(zoom out) works.

Left-Click ... Zoom In

[Alt] + Left-Click ... Zoom Out

(4) Loupe tool (zoom out)

The "Loupe tool (zoom out)" offers a convenient mouse tool mode that can reduce the
image with the center of reduction being at the clicking point.

Since this mouse operation has been adopted by many other applications, it appears
familiar to many users.

When you operate this tool while pressing the [Alt] key, (zoom out) does not work but
(zoom in) works.

Left-Click ... Zoom Out

[Alt] + Left-Click ... Zoom In

(5) Palm tool

The "Palm tool" offers a mouse tool mode that can grab and move a picture (panning
operation). This operation similar to the mouse tool mode adopted by many other
software.

In addition, when you click on a picture while pressing the [Ctrl] key, the picture size is
enlarged with the center of enlargement being at the clicking point.

When you click on a picture while pressing the [Alt] key, the picture size is reduced with the center
of reduction being at the clicking point.

Left-Drag ... You can grab and move a picture (panning operation).
[Ctrl] + Left-Click ... Zoom In
[Alt] + Left Click ... Zoom Out

3.2.3. Displays of images with default parameters by mouse operations

You can check images with the default parameters during adjustments in the "Combination
mode" or "Preview mode."

When displaying an adjusted image on the preview window, line the mouse pointer with
on the bottom right corner of the preview window, click on , and while is pressed,
the image with the default parameters will be displayed.

3.2.4. Coarse Preview

The preview display in the preview window can perform concurrent processing in two formats, the coarse preview
that performs simple development processing for quick display of the whole, and the development preview for
 development processing the exact same as the output image of development results.

If this software need to update the preview display, first use the quick coarse preview. In the background, parallel
processing of partial development preview is performed at the same time. It is updated as display blocks that have
completed development preview processing are automatically replaced.

If selected images are switched and development parameters are changed, it may seem at first that the image
display is a little rough, but you will understand as details of the image change in order.

When changing development parameters, it is possible to confirm the process at different stages displayed in the
coarse preview without having to check the results of development preview processing.

In the coarse preview, the following processes are performed to speed up.

(1) It processes partially culled RAW data according to the display size, and executes a first and simple demosaic
process. Therefore, there are sometimes some jaggy and false colors around the outline.
(In the development preview processing, the entire RAW data are processed and a complete demosaic
process and color distortion is executed.)
(2) It does not process noise reduction, color distortion, sharpening, and other frequency surface filter
processing. Therefore, when you modify the parameter "sharpening", "noise reduction", "demosaicing
sharpness", "resolution plus", or "color distortion", the "preview image" will not be updated during coarse
preview.
(In the development preview processing, it processes all filters and the effect of the modified parameter is
reflected on the display.)

It processes data as well as the development preview except for the above description. Therefore, "exposure bias",
"white balance", "tone", and "saturation" is reflected also in the coarse preview.
3.2.5. Development Preview

Until development preview processing has been completed, two types of "preview images"
are intermingled.

While the mark is displayed at the right end of the status bar, it indicates that the
development preview processing is still under operation and there still remains the result
of coarse preview.

When development preview processing is completed, the mark disappears and it
indicates that the whole "preview image" has been replaced to development preview". Then you can check the
final development result on the screen.

If you select "Fast rendering (Coarse preview)" from the "Preview rendering method" dropdown list on the
"Display settings" dialog, SILKYPIX does not display a development preview when a smaller preview image than its
actual size is displayed.

It provides you to reduce the memory consumption and the load of CPU when updating a preview image.

This setting is effective for the PC that has few built-in memories or a notebook PC. Please refer to '9.2.3. Preview
window'.

3.2.6. Grid Display

You can display the grid on the preview image in the "Preview mode" or
"Combination mode".
Selecting the menu command [View (V)]-[Display grid] turns the grid on
or off.

Even when the grid display is OFF, the grid will be automatically
displayed for a set time period while adjusting the "Rotation/Shift lens
effect" category in development parameters.

Please refer to "9.2.3.3. Grid Settings" concerning settings in this
function.

3.2.6.1. Moving Grid Position

On the Preview window, you can grab and move the grid by the [Ctrl]
key + drag operation.
In addition, the [Ctrl] key + left-double-clicking reset the grid to the
initial position.
 3.2.6.2. Grid settings
While displaying the grid, the "Grid settings" dialog appears.
You can configure the interval and position of the grid on the dialog, and
reset the grid to the initial position, too.

(1) Grid interval Use the slider to adjust the grid intervals.
(2) Move grid When you click the icon, the operation mode is changed to the
"moving grid" mode and the mouse cursor is changed to .
You can grab and move the grid by dragging. Once you perform the
operation in the moving grid mode, the operation mode is returned to the
previous mode automatically.
(3) Initialize grid position When you click the icon, the grid position is initialized. The grid interval
is not changed by this operation. This feature is valid only in a status
where a grid position is customized.

3.2.6.3. Background color

You can select the background color when displaying a Preview from
"Background color" in the context menu.

The initial setting is set to "Gray (default)". There are a total of four
colors, "White", "Black" and "18% gray" in addition to "Gray." You can
make your selection by clicking on the background color.

You can also select [Background color] from the

[Display settings] dialog.
The [Display settings] dialog will be displayed by
selecting [Settings (S)] - [Display settings] from the
Menu.

You can choose from the four colors of "Gray
(default)," "White", "Black" and "18% gray" under
"Opening a folder in preview mode" in the middle right of the dialog.

3.3. Thumbnail window

You can select multiple images and perform operations on selected multiple images as a batch in the thumbnail window.

3.3.1. Selecting Multiple Images

3.3.1.1. Selecting multiple images

When you left-click on an image while pressing the [Ctrl] key, you can select the image keeping other image
selected. If you repeat this operation, you can select multiple arbitrary images.

When you left-click on an image while pressing the [Shift] key, you can select the images together from the
clicked image to other selected image.
3.3.1.2. Select all images

When you press the [Ctrl] and [A] keys at the same time, or click the menu command [Edit (E)]-[Select all
images], you can select all the images on the window.

* When the Preview Window is in Multi-preview Mode, multiple images cannot be selected.
3.3.1.3. How to Change "Representative Image" when Multiple Images are Selected

When multiple images are selected, the selected image with a border brighter than the others is called the
"Representative Image".

The image of the representative image is displayed in the Preview Window.

Please see "7.7. Operations for Multiple Selected Images" concerning the representative image.

The method for selecting / changing the representative image differs depending on the display mode and
settings for "Thumbnail Scroll Direction" under display settings.

Please see "9.2.2.1.2. Thumbnail scroll direction" concerning thumbnail scroll directions under display
settings.

(1) When Thumbnail Scroll Direction is "Vertical direction" or in Thumbnail Mode

You can change the representative image by pushing the [Left] or [Right] key.

Please note that if you push the [Up] or [Down] key that multiple image selection mode will be
cancelled.

(2) When Thumbnail Scroll Direction is "Horizontal direction"

You can change the representative image by pushing the [Up] or [Down] key.

Please note that if you push the [Left] or [Right] key that multiple image selection mode will be
cancelled.
The above operations are the same whether selecting images from multiple rows or multiple columns.
3.3.2. Sort thumbnails

You can specify the display order of the thumbnail.

Using the menu command [View (V)]-[Sort thumbnails] or clicking the
[Sort thumbnails] button on the "Display settings" dialog.

Set rules for arranging thumbnails in the order you prefer in the "Sort
thumbnails" dialog.

3.3.2.1. Control description

(1) List of sorting keys

You can specify the order of the sorting key on this list.
 The sorting key is applied in turn from top of the list.

"Ascending order" displays in order from small values to larger values, but if marked, set images are
displayed first and images not set displayed after those.

"Descending order" is displayed in reverse order to "Ascending order."

And you can specify whether ascending order or descending order to each sorting key.

(2) Unused sorting key list

A list of keys that can be added as sorting keys is itemized.

When selecting one key on the list and clicking the (3) button, you can add the key to the bottom of the list
of (1).

(3) Add sort key

When clicking this button, the sort key selected on the (2) list will be added to the bottom of the list of (1).

(4) Remove sort key

When clicking this button, the sort key selected on the (1) list will be removed.

(5) To upper
When clicking this button, the sort key selected on the (1) list will be moved upper of the list..

(6) To lower
When clicking this button, the sort key selected on the (1) list will be moved lower of the list..
3.3.3. Changing the Size of Thumbnails

[Settings under Thumbnail Mode]

You can change the thumbnail size with the "Image width in
thumbnail window" slider on the right of the toolbar.

[Settings under Combination Mode]

When the thumbnail window is located either above or below, you
can change the size of thumbnails within the boundary between
the preview window and thumbnail window to a range of one
third from the right side by dragging up or down under
conditions by aligning the mouse pointer.

In addition, if you align the mouse pointer to the remaining two
thirds of the range and drag up or down under conditions,
you can change the number of rows of thumbnails displayed,
without changing the thumbnail size.

When the thumbnail window is located to either the left or the
right, you can change the size of thumbnails within the boundary
between the preview window or thumbnail window to a range of
one third from the bottom by dragging left or right under
conditions by aligning the mouse pointer.

In addition, if you align the mouse pointer to the remaining two
thirds of the range and drag left or right under conditions,
you can change the number of columns of thumbnails displayed,
without changing the thumbnail size.

* You can also set the thumbnail image size using "Thumbnail window" - "Image width" on the "Display
settings" dialog.
 Please refer to "9.2.2. Thumbnail window" for details.

3.4. Operations for selected images

3.4.1. Marks

You can make marks for operating and managing images.

By right clicking on a thumbnail or preview image, a context
menu will appear, from which you can select marks and clear
marks.

(1) Delete mark This is a mark added to an image you want to delete.
After marking, you can move images marked for deletion as a
batch to Trash box through [File (F)]-[Delete marked images
(E)] from the menu.

(2) Copy/Move mark This is a mark added to an image you want to copy or move.
After marking, you can copy or move images marked for
copying or moving as a batch through [File (F)]-[Copy marked
images (C)] or [Move marked images (M)] from the menu.

(3) Develop mark By setting develop marks, you can develop multiple images in a
batch from [Development (D)]-[Batch develop marked images
(B)] from the menu.

(4) User mark 1 (Blue By setting User mark 1 (Blue mark), you can use blue marks as
mark) tags.

(5) User mark 2 (Green By setting User mark 2 (Green mark), you can use green marks
mark) as tags.

(6) User mark 3 (Red By setting User mark 3 (Red mark), you can use red marks as
mark) tags.

To clear marks from an image, right click on a thumbnail of a

 marked image to display a context menu.

Select "Reset all marks" to delete all set marks.

To cancel individual set marks, select a mark for deletion
from the context menu.

Furthermore, you can also set and clear marks, other than
"Rating" (*1), by selecting icons located on the status bar.

A maximum of six kinds of marks can be set to a single image.

The following combinations can be set.

(A) Delete mark or Copy/Move mark

(B) Develop mark

(C) User mark 1 (Blue mark)

(D) User mark 2 (Green mark)

(E) User mark 3 (Red mark)

(F) [Maximum 5] Ratings (*2)

*1 See "3.4.3. Rating" for details concerning how to set "Rating."

*2 When the image width on two thumbnails is under "129 pixels," "Rating" is not displayed.

3.4.2. Protect

SILKYPIX protect is not for setting attributes of the RAW data file image for
processing.

SILKYPIX protect prohibits moving or deleting files and changing
development parameters during SILKYPIX operations.

Protected images are displayed with in thumbnail displays and on the
status bar.

To cancel the "Protect" setting, right click on the thumbnail or preview
display and use the context menu, or use "Development settings" "sub-
control.

3.4.3. Rating

You can set the class of images by setting the number of stars with "Rating."

In addition, you can sort set ratings with " "Filter images," "Sort thumbnails," etc.

You can save additional information when set "Ratings" are saved on JPEG/TIFF image files.(*)

* See "9.1.4. JPEG/TIFF options," "(3) Discard SILKYPIX parameters and image information" regarding details on
how to make settings on JPEG/TIFF image files.

3.4.3.1. Setting and Clearing "Ratings"

Thumbnail mode

Set the number of stars by clicking on or dragging under each

image in thumbnail window.

Click to clear the set stars.

* When performing batch operations on multiple images *

You can set the number of stars on all images in a selected batch by clicking on or
dragging under any of the images when multiple images are selected.

You can clear the number of stars on all images in a selected batch by clicking on under any of
the images when multiple images are selected.
Preview mode

By right clicking on the preview, you can select and set the
number of stars from the menu items at "Set rating."

Remove the set stars by selecting "Clear."

Image properties

The "Rating" window opens when you align the mouse pointer with
"Rating" under "Image properties" and click on .

Click to set the number of stars.

Click to return the set number of stars to the number of stars
embedded in the image.

In addition, if you click , the setting of number of stars will
return to default, so the number of stars will return to the number of stars
embedded in the image.

= When set rating is not reflected in development (saved) results =

When you set the number of stars with a check at "Not record in a developed image" and click
the [OK] button, this rating will not be recorded when developing.

In addition, under conditions when the number of stars is not set, "Not record in a developed image"
is unavailable, and it cannot be used.

Therefore, this item is unavailable even if you click to set the number of stars to default.

When you click the [OK] button, the set contents is reflected on the "Rating" and the "Rating"
window closes.

If you click the [Cancel] button, the contents you were operating on will not be reflected and the
"Rating" window will close.

3.4.3.2. Filtering images by "Rating"

You can filter and display images according to the set rating.

See "3.4.6. Filtering images for processing" concerning filtering images.

3.4.3.3. Sort thumbnails by "Rating"

You can sort thumbnails according to rating.

See "3.3.2. Sort Thumbnails" concerning how to sort thumbnails.
3.4.3.4. Switching between Display / Non-Display of "Rating" at the
top of the thumbnail.
 You can switch between Display / Non-Display of "Rating"
on the thumbnail.

Right click on the thumbnail to activate the Context Menu.

By clicking on the "Show rating" item from the open Context

Menu and removing the check mark, you can remove the
rating from each image of the thumbnail, and it will not be
displayed.

3.4.4. Switching to previous / next image

If there are multiple images being operated on, click on to go to the

image prior to the currently selected one or on to go to the next
image.

3.4.5. Rotating images

Rotate the image of the currently selected image.

The image is rotate left when you click on and rotate right when
you click on .

3.4.6. Filtering images for processing

You can filter images for development, such as marked images
and selected images.

There are two ways you can filter images.

One method is by selecting [View (V)]-[Filter images] from the
 menu and designating filtering conditions from the "Filter
images" dialog. The other is by moving your mouse over the
icon located to the lower right of the thumbnail window and
designating "Filter images" from the pop-up window.

You can filter marked images and selected images

with one click in the "Filter images" pop-up
window.

You can filter using more sophisticated conditions, such

as images with multiple marks, in the "Filter images"
dialog.

Canceling the "Filtering images" is also done from these
dialogs and pop-up window.

When images for processing are filtered, "Filtering
images" will be displayed in the title bar.

In "Filtering images" mode, images not filtered will
temporarily be removed as subject to processing. When
"Filtering images" mode is cancelled, all images will
return to status as images for processing.

"Filtering images" will be automatically cancelled if a
new file or folder is opened or if added and opened.

"Filtering images" will remain open if images are
individually closed with the "Close selected images"
function.

3.5. Arranging parameters controls and sub-controls

Parameters controls and sub-controls are located to either side of the main window, the tab page and control box. You
can freely change the location such as displays in windows independent of the main window.

If you drag a floating window and adjust its position, and if another floating window is nearby, a function that automatically
arranges floating windows will come into play.

Automatically grouped floating windows can be moved as a group.

Changes to display methods are performed through the context menu displayed by clicking at the upper right of each
sub-control.

Please see "0.1.7. How to Locate Controls" concerning context menus.

Utilize these functions to customize the arrangement of windows and make your work easier.
 3.5.1. Types of Locations
There are five types of location methods as follows. The method for selection location depends on the control.

(1) Arrange to left of main window

They are located in the Information Box on the left side of the Main Window.

The Navigator and Histogram are at the top of the Information Box, while other controls are located at the
bottom.

(2) Arrange to right of main window

They are located in the Information Box on the right side of the Main Window.

The Navigator and Histogram are at the top of the Information box, while other controls are located at the
bottom.

(3) Make it a floating window

They are displayed as a window independent from the Main Window.

(4) Fix in control box

Sub-controls that can be displayed at all times may be located in a "Control Box".

Multiple sub-controls can be located in a "Control Box".

By selecting from icons and menus under "Parameters controls", sub-controls located in a "Control Box"
can be scrolled to until their location is visible.

(5) Locate it on the tab page

Sub-controls displayed as Category Selection Icons can be displayed in the "Tab Page".

Only one sub-control can be displayed on the "Tab Page". You can switch the displayed control by clicking
on the Category Selection Icon.

3.5.2. Location of Parameters controls

You can select from the following three types of methods for locating the "Parameters Controls".

(1) Arrange to left of main window

(2) Arrange to right of main window
(3) Make it a floating window

3.5.3. Location of Sub-Controls

You can select each sub-control from among five types of location methods as shown in "3.5.1. Types of
Locations".

However, methods for location differ depending on the type of sub-control.

Please see "4.1.2. Tastes/Parameters" for the default location of each sub-control.

In addition to (A) Menu to change location conditions, (B) Independent operation menus for each sub-control can
be displayed in this context menu.

Menu items for each sub-control displayed in the context menu are as shown below.

(1) Six sub-controls, "Tastes/Parameters", "White balance", "Tone", "Color", "Sharpening" and "Noise
reduction" are displayed under "Category Selection Icons".
(2) Fourteen sub-controls, "White balance adjustment", "Tone curve", "Highlight controller", "Fine color
controller", "Lens aberration controller", "Development settings", "Effects", "Monochrome
controller", "Underwater photo controller", "Spotting tools", "Partial correction tool", "Crop tool"
and "Editing history" are displayed under "Sub-control Icons".

Menu Items (1) Category (2) Sub- Folder Image Navigator Histogram
selection control icons properties
icons
(A) Change Location Condition            
Menu
Arrange to left of main window --- --- * * * *
Arrange to right of main window --- --- * * * *
Locate it on the tab page * --- --- --- --- ---
Fix in control box * * (*1) --- --- --- ---
Make it a floating window * --- * * * *
Close * * * * * *
(B) Menu of Characteristics of            
Each Sub-control
Add taste * (*2) * (*2) --- --- --- ---
Edit tastes * (*2) * (*2) --- --- --- ---
Copy image properties to --- --- --- * --- ---
clipboard
Do not display this setting dialog --- --- --- --- --- ---
Emphasize spotting areas --- --- --- --- --- ---
Initialize spotting areas --- --- --- --- --- ---

Menu Items Grid settings Batch Color Spotting Partial Crop tool
development management tools correction
status tool

(A) Change Location Condition            

Menu
Arrange to left of main window --- --- --- --- --- ---
Arrange to right of main window --- --- --- --- --- ---
Locate it on the tab page --- --- --- --- --- ---
Fix in control box --- --- --- --- --- ---
Make it a floating window --- --- --- --- --- ---
Close * * * * * *
(B) Menu of Characteristics of            
Each Sub-control
Add taste --- --- --- --- --- ---
Edit tastes --- --- --- --- --- ---
Copy image properties to --- --- --- --- --- ---
clipboard
Do not display this setting dialog * --- --- --- --- ---
Emphasize spotting areas --- --- --- * --- ---
Initialize spotting areas --- --- --- * --- ---

*1 "Editing history" cannot be located in the control box.

*2 This menu item is not displayed in the "Tastes/Parameters", "Development settings" and "Editing
history" sub-controls.

3.5.3.1. "Close / Open" Controls

When sub-controls are located in the Control Box, you can choose
to display only Tastes in order to effectively use the screen.

By clicking on displayed in the upper right of the sub-control, it
will fold until only the Taste Selection Drop Down List is displayed.

Click on to restore the folded sub-control to its original
condition.
 3.5.4. Grouping Floating Windows
All controls displayed as floating windows can be arranged freely, but they can also be set up together and moved
collectively as a group.

(1) Setting up floating windows

If you move the display location by dragging a floating window with the mouse, when it comes close to the
side of another floating window, it will automatically be attached to the closest side.

You can set floating windows neatly by using this function.

Floating windows that have been attached together can be moved as a group.

(2) Moving as a group unit

Floating windows that have been attached together can be moved as a group.

Drag the title bar of the floating window you want to move to change the display location of the floating
window.

When doing so, if you drag the left half of the title bar, all floating windows grouped together will be moved
collectively.

If you drag the right half of the title bar, or if you drag while holding down the [Ctrl] key, only that floating
window will be moved.

When you move the mouse over the title bar, the mouse cursor will become over the left half and
over the right half.
Determine which action will take place by looking at the shape of the mouse cursor.

3.5.5. Registration and restoration of window positions

You can restore the location of each control by registering each control position and selecting the registered
location data.

By registering the location of each control according to its purpose, you can use them while switching control
locations according to usage or purpose of operations.

3.5.5.1. Register window positions

You can register the location of controls by selecting [Settings (S)]-[Register window positions] from the
Menu.
3.5.5.2. Restore window positions

You can restore the registered control location by selecting [Settings (S)]-[Restore window positions] from
the Menu.

3.6. Turning floating window display on / off

This function turns off and restores to original status displayed sub-controls that are floating together in a group.

Temporarily turning off this display will help if many sub-controls are displayed on the screen, making the preview display
and thumbnail display difficult to view.

This function is assigned to a shortcut key only ([F9] by default).

After using this function and turning a display off, if you display sub-controls through another method, you will not be able
to return to the original status using this function.

3.7. Icons that show status of image

The status and designated reservations / marks for each image are shown with icons in the thumbnail display and status
bar.
This shows that the development parameters of the image have been edited.
This shows that the image is cropped.
This shows that the image is protected.
This shows that the image is marked for deletion.
This shows that the image is marked for moving / copying.
This shows that the image is marked for development.
User mark 1 (Blue mark) is added to the image.
User mark 2 (Green) is added to the image.
User mark 3 (Red mark) is added to the image.
This shows that only temporary editing is allowed on this image. If parameters are edited, they will be
cancelled when concluded.
This shows that parameters from previous versions are applied on the target image.

back
prev menu next

Copyright (C) 2004-2018, Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co.,Ltd. All rights reserved.
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 /
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 SOFTWARE MANUAL
back
prev menu next

4. How to Adjust Development Parameter

Adjustments to development parameters is performed through Parameters Controls and the GUI at the top of sub-controls.

We recommend that you adjust development parameters on SILKYPIX® in the following order: Exposure bias, White balance, Tone, Color,
Sharpening, and Noise reduction.

In order to make adjustments using this order easier, the GUI for each adjustment item is located in order from the top. It is recommended that you
make adjustments using the recommended flow by utilizing the parameters controls.

4.1. "Parameters Controls" and "Sub-control"

The GUI for setting each parameter is located in the Main Controls part at the top of Parameters
Controls.
GUIs in the Main Controls are placed in the following order from the upside.

Tastes/Parameters (Dropdown list + Select button)

Exposure bias and HDR/Dodge/Color Burn (Dropdown list + Slider control
+ "Automatic exposure bias" button)
White balance (Dropdown list + Select button)
Tone (Dropdown list + Select button)
Color (Dropdown list + Select button)
Sharpening/Noise reduction (Dropdown list + Select button)

On the bottom area of the "Parameters controls", sub-control icons to switch sub-controls for adjustment of the development parameter are
located.

The dropdown list is the GUI for selecting a taste (=preset value) that is prepared in advance by ISL (Ichikawa Soft Laboratory) or a user.
The "taste" is a value consisting of development parameters. For more details about the "taste", please refer to '4.1.1 Taste'.

When you select a taste from the dropdown list, the related sub-controls automatically appear on the "Tab page". However, according to
customer's preference, the sub-controls can be located on the "Control box" or a floating window.
4.1.1. Taste

Taste is a preset value , like a collection of development parameters.

You can easily define a "taste" value for frequently-used development parameters.

(1) Utilize maker tastes

Model development parameters are recorded in advance in SILKYPIX as maker tastes.

You can use these to easily make adjustments to development parameters.

Open the dropdown list and select a "Taste" to apply. By doing so, the development parameter registered in tastes will be
reflected.

There are both "Overall tastes" to replace all development parameters and "Partial tastes" for a set of part of the
development parameters found in tastes.

Applying "Partial tastes" is an action equivalent to "Partial paste of development parameters."

(2) Register development parameters often used as user tastes

Register development parameters which are used often can be saved as user tastes, making them easier to recall.

There are two ways to register to tastes, "All category tastes" for all development parameters, and other tastes registered as
category units in development parameters.

Please refer to "4.1.1.3. Add taste" concerning how to register.

4.1.1.1. All category tastes

The dropdown list of "All category tastes" located to the side of the icon at the
very top of the main control section in parameters controls will be explained here.

Tastes that can be selected here are all category tastes intended as "All categories"
of development parameters.

There are two kinds of tastes, "Overall tastes" and "Partial tastes" in "All category
tastes."

[Explanation of Display]

(1) "Underlined displays" means default "taste".

When default values are defined as tastes, if the name of the concerned taste is different from
the default value of any other registered taste, the name of the "Default" will be displayed as
follows.
When a selected taste is displayed with green underlined font, it means that there are no
development parameters file.Please refer to "10.4.3.1. Development Parameter File and
Collateral Information File" for detail of development parameters file.
(2) indicates that this taste is in "Overall tastes."
If "Overall tastes" is selected, all categories of development parameters will be replaced.
(3) indicates that this taste is in "Partial tastes."
If "Partial tastes" is selected, only a part of the categories of development parameters will be replaced.
(4) The mark indicates that this taste is currently selected. If "Overall tastes," one will be
marked, and if "Partial tastes," all that conform will be marked.

[Taste list for selection]

When you open the dropdown list, you can see and select the tastes on the list.

There are two kinds of tastes, one is "maker taste" prepared by us and the other is "user taste" defined by you. In
addition, you can find the following items on the drop down list:

Default If you select it, the development parameters are reset to default parameter.
However, if the default parameter is changed from "Default", and the selected
default parameter is the overall taste, the name of the registered overall taste
will be displayed as the default value.
Custom Custom is displayed when the current taste does not match other existing
tastes or the default parameter.
Even if you select this taste, the development parameters will not be changed.
Custom This shows the condition corresponding to one of the registered partial tastes,
(Taste applied) such as when a partial taste is applied.
Therefore, it will be displayed when the default parameter is changed from the
"Default", and the selected default parameter is a partial taste.
This item refers to the development parameter for the current setting, so the
development parameter will not be changed even if selected.
Default value This will be displayed if the default parameter is changed from the "Default"
(User settings) and the selected default parameter is a partial taste.
However, if this item is selected, it will be deemed to correspond to the
registered partial taste, and the display for the taste will be "Custom (Taste
applied)".

[Display of the selected taste]

When the dropdown list is closed, the name of the current taste is displayed.

When one of registered tastes is selected, the name of the selected taste is displayed.
The name of a partial taste is not displayed.
Instead, one of the following is displayed: "Default", "Custom", "Custom (Taste applied)".

Default This is displayed only when the development parameter matches with the
"Default" of the default parameter.
If the default parameter is changed from the "Default", and the selected
default parameter is the overall taste, the name of the registered overall taste
will be displayed as the default value.
Custom This indicates that neither results of adjusted development parameters nor
registered tastes are in agreement.
Custom This shows the condition corresponding to any of the registered partial tastes,
(Taste applied) such as when partial tastes are applied.
Therefore, it is displayed when the default parameter is changed from the
"Default" and the selected default parameter is a partial taste
 Please refer to "9.5. Default parameters settings" concerning default parameter.

* Partial taste is not displayed because the development parameters of the current taste can match those
of two or more partial tastes at the same time. The mark of the "Partial taste" is displayed only when
the dropdown list is opened.

4.1.1.2. Other tastes

The following will explain dropdown lists of tastes other than "All category tastes".

Dropdown lists for these tastes are located in the main control and at the top of each
sub-control.

Dropdown lists, except for "All category tastes" located in the main control section,
are, in order from the top:

[White Balance Taste]

[Tone Taste]

[Color Taste]

[Sharpening/Noise Reduction Taste]
When the sub-controls "White balance", "Tone", "Color", "Sharpening" and "Noise reduction" are displayed as floating
windows, these dropdown lists will have the following in common with dropdown lists located at the top of each sub-control.

(1) [Target parameter category]

These dropdown lists are used to select partial tastes for only one parameter category.

If a taste other than "All category taste" located in the main control section is selected from a dropdown list, only
development parameters that can be adjusted by the sub-control displayed on the tab page will be influenced.

If a taste is selected from these dropdown lists located at the top of the sub-control, only the development parameter
that can be adjusted by the same sub-control (*1) will be influenced.

*1 "Sharpening" and "Noise reduction" sub-controls are an exception. Its sub-controls are divided
to two parts despite one parameter category.

(2) Taste list for selection

When you open the dropdown list, you can see and select the tastes on the list.

There are two kinds of tastes, one is "maker taste" prepared by us and the other is "user taste" defined by you. In
addition, you can find the following items on the drop down list:

Default If you select it, the development parameters are reset to default.
However, this default value refers to the "Default" of the default parameter.
Default value This is displayed if the default parameter is set to something other than the
(User settings) "Default" and the currently set development parameter is equivalent to the
default parameter.
Please select this to return the development parameter to the selected default
parameter.
Custom Custom is displayed when the current taste does not match other existing
tastes or the default taste. Even if you select this taste, the development
parameters will not be changed.

(3) Display of the selected taste

When dropdown list is closed, the name of the current taste is displayed.

When one of registered tastes is selected, the name of the selected taste is displayed. But the name of a partial taste is
not displayed.

Otherwise, the following items are sometimes displayed.

Default This is the display when the development parameter matches the "Default" of
the default parameter.
Default value This is displayed when the default parameter is set to something other than
(User settings) the "Default" and the currently set development parameter is equivalent to
the default parameter.
Custom This indicates the status that the results of adjusted development parameters
are not in agreement with any of the registered tastes.

4.1.1.3. Add taste

You can add / register a development parameter applied to a
currently selected image as a taste.

There are two ways to add / register a taste. Select [Taste
category] from [Parameters (P)]-[Add taste] on the menu, or click
on the icon located on the right side of the dropdown list.

The "Add parameters taste" dialog will be displayed.

The "Add parameters taste" dialog format is the same as the "Edit
parameters tastes" dialog. Please see the next section, "4.1.1.4.
Edit tastes" concerning operation methods for this dialog.

"Tastes" added through the "Add parameters taste" dialog will be
displayed in dialogs as selected, so set an appropriate name for the
taste and click on the [OK] button to confirm.

Items set in the "Add parameters taste" dialog

(1) Taste name

By default, names are set sequentially, such as "User taste 1."

Change to an appropriate name to make it easy to distinguish from other tastes.

(2) Applicable development parameter category

If "Taste category" is added as a taste other than "All categories," it is not necessary to edit because "Applicable
development parameter category" is fixed to one category.

If the "Taste category" is "All categories," you can enable any category in "Applicable development parameter
category."

Enabled categories are set as taste masks.

4.1.1.4. Edit tastes

You can edit registered tastes.

You can customize by changing taste names and the order they are displayed to make it easier to select tastes.

You can also save / restore tastes and move then to other PCs through export and import functions

"Add parameters taste" is performed from [Parameters (P)]-[Edit tastes]-[Parameters tastes] on the menu.

(1) Subject data A taste is defined for a "RAW" or a "JPEG/TIFF". You can select either
of the two types.
(2) Taste category A taste is defined for each parameter category.
(3) List of tastes There is a list of tastes with a mark.
A mark at the left of a taste title:
The taste represents all development parameters if you select taste category "All parameters".
The taste only part of the parameters if you select taste category "All parameters".

There are two kinds of tastes, maker tastes created in advance by our company, and user tastes that you create.

Maker taste
These are displayed with a red background. They cannot be deleted, exported or moved.
 User taste
These are displayed with a green background.

(4) Upward button The upward button moves a selected taste upward.
(5) Downward button The downward button moves a selected taste downward.
(6) Delete button The Delete button deletes selected tastes. Maker tastes cannot be
deleted.
(7) Hide button Selected data is hidden.
/Show Maker data cannot be deleted, but they will not be displayed on the list
of tastes with this setting.
(8) Rename Change the name of selected tastes.
(9) Export all button All user tastes that have "Image type" and "Taste category" in
common are recorded and saved in a file.
All tastes displayed with a green background are "Taste list".
(10) Export button The export button exports a single selected taste.
(11) Import button The import button imports a saved taste.
(12) Development parameters When you select the "All parameters" in the list of the taste category,
applied by taste you can apply any of the parameter categories to a taste.
For example, you can apply "tone" and "tone curve" to a taste.

When you add a new taste, the "Edit parameters tastes" dialog is also displayed and you can customize a name of a new taste
and other settings as well as the taste customizing.
4.1.2. Tastes/Parameters

You can perform taste registration and editing, save development parameters, read, initialize
and temporarily register in the "Tastes/Parameters" sub-control.

4.1.2.1. Storerooms

The "Storerooms" is a function that temporarily records development parameters.

There are four rooms (ROOM 1-4) in which you can record development parameters.
There is also a special room named "Latest".

You can record optional development parameters in the first four rooms. Development parameters for the currently selected
image are recorded in a room by clicking the o button on the left side.

When development parameters are recorded in a room, the time they were recorded is displayed.

Rooms with recorded development parameters are turned into buttons, and when you click this button, the development
parameters recorded in the room are pasted onto the currently selected image.

In this way, you can copy development parameters from other images and past development parameters from the same image.

Rooms with recorded development parameters that match the development parameters of the currently selected image are
displayed in bold.

The icon on the right side is a button for entering "Continuous paste tool". "Continuous paste tool" is a mode for pasting
development parameters recorded in a room to multiple images. Click on a scene in the thumbnail display to paste development
parameters.

In order to leave this tool, click on the icon again.

The special room, "Latest", located at the bottom always stores the latest edited development parameters. Use this when you
want to paste the latest results from adjusted development parameters to other images.

There are several convenient ways to use the "Storerooms". Please see "6.5. How to Use Storerooms" for details.

4.1.2.2. Hot folder

"Hot folder" is a function for monitoring a selected folder and automatically adding images to thumbnails if an image for
processing is added.

This function can be used only when a single folder is selected.

By clicking on a button reading "No data" within the border of the "Hot folder", the development parameter of the selected
image will be registered and a check will appear in the check box next to "Enable".

While "Enable" is checked, images to which registered development parameters are applied are automatically added. The check
next to "Enable" is automatically removed when the selected folder is changed.
4.1.3. Control box
Multiple sub-controls can be located in a control box.

Sub-controls for parameter categories in the main control are located at the top of the
control box as tab pages.

A control box is added is "Arrange control box" is selected from the menu on the title bar
through sub-controls in floating windows.

When an added sub-control is selected from an icon or menu under Parameters controls,
the control box is scrolled and the selected sub-control is displayed.
4.2. Sub-control

Sub-control is prepared for each parameter category.

The types can be classified by function (A - F) and by default location (1 - 4).

[List of sub-controls]

(E) - (1) Tastes/Parameters

(A) - (1) White balance
(B) - (2) White balance adjustment
(A) - (1) Tone
(B) - (2) Tone curve
(A) - (1) Color
(A) - (1) Sharpening (*1)
(A) - (1) Noise reduction (*1)
(A) - (2) Development settings (*2)
(B) - (2) Highlight controller
(B) - (2) Fine color controller
(B) - (2) Lens aberration controller
(B) - (2) Rotation/Shift lens effect
(B) - (2) Effects

(B) - (2) Monochrome controller

(B) - (2) Underwater photo controller

(C) - (2) Crop tool

(C) - (2) Spotting tools
(C) - (2) Grid settings
(C) - (2) Partial correction tool

(D) - (3) Histogram

(D) - (4) Image properties
(D) - (2) Batch development status
(D) - (4) Folder
(D) - (4) Navigator
(E) - (2) Editing history
(F) - (2) Color management

[Type of sub-controls]
 (A) This sub-control is for adjusting basic category parameters found in development parameters.
The drop down list for tastes is located in the Main Controls, and if located in the Control Box, is also displayed
within the Control Box.
(B) This sub-control is for adjusting parameters belonging to parameter categories for minute adjustments found in
development parameters.
(C) This sub-control runs and displays tool modes in the preview display.
It is displayed only when switching to the concerned tool mode.
(D) This sub-control is for displaying information. It is not a control for operating parameters.
(E) This sub-control is for performing operation on tastes and development parameters.
(F) This sub-control is displayed in connection with the warning mode of the preview display.
It is displayed only when switched to the concerned warning mode.

*1 "Sharpening" and "Noise reduction" sub-controls are divided into two sub-controls, but they share a common
parameter category. Tastes are shared.
*2 "Development settings" do not have tastes.

[Classifications of Sub-control Initial Locations]

(1) This sub-control is located on the Tab Page.

(2) This sub-control is displayed as a floating window.
(3) This sub-control is located on the right side of the main window.
(4) This sub-control is located on the left side of the main window.

4.3. Exposure Bias

You can determine exposure bias using a development gain when developing. This results in very
similar exposure bias on a camera with processes equivalent to the push-process and pull-process
on film.
You can perform adjustments by selecting an a value from the exposure bias slider.

You can take a photograph on the premise that you can adjust exposure bias at development process later. Please refer to '10.1.2. Utilizing
Difference between Exposure Biases of Camera and SILKYPIX®' for more details.

4.3.1. Auto Exposure Bias

Exposure bias can be performed automatically by clicking the Automatic exposure bias button.

The algorithm for automatic exposure bias in SILKYPIX® detects an object and analyzes its
colors in detail. While restricting brightness and washed-out colors, it performs strong that
employs the best of our image processing technology in order to utilize the ability to
reproduce colors on your monitor or printer.

This is a quick way to getting the perfect exposure for your images, even if you underexpose your pictures a little. Slight
underexposure is typical for RAW photography, as it prevents the highlight areas from loosing structure.
This feature helps reduce time when adjusting development parameters.
4.3.2. Fine-Tuning Exposure Bias
You can fine-tune your exposure with the spin-button that shows the highest and lowest
values for exposure. This allows for more detailed adjustments to your exposure that cannot
be done on the exposure bias slider.

We recommend that you make rough adjustments to exposure bias and then fine-tune it with the fine-tuning exposure bias.
4.3.3. Exposure bias tool

Exposure bias tool allows you to adjust the brightness of a specified point to a certain
exposure level.
To adjust exposure level, you select "Exposure bias tool" from the menu [Tools (T)]-
[Exposure bias tool], or click on the toolbar.

When you designate an area by either clicking or dragging on a preview image or thumbnail
of a selected image, "Exposure bias tool" adjusts the brightness of the selected area to
become the "luminance level".
The "luminance level" is specified as the photosensitive level on the RAW data. You can
change it in the "Function settings" dialog. Please refer to '9.3.1.2. Luminance level of exp.
bias tool' for more details.

This function works effectively even when a specified point is not achromatic color. In
 that case, the largest value of R, G, or B is selected as a target value and the exposure is
set to the "luminance level". For example, when you click the red area, this feature sets
an "exposure bias" such that the R value becomes the "luminance level".

* About eyedropper operation, please refer to '9.3.2. Operations'.
4.3.4. Dodge / Color Burn / HDR

You can adjust Dodge / Color Burn and HDR. Select the adjustment item from the drop down
list and make adjustments to the appropriate amount with the slider.

Only the adjustment item selected from the drop down list will be applied. You cannot use
multiple adjustment items at the same time.

4.3.4.1. Dodge / Color Burn

Dodge is a technique for reducing exposure to photographic paper and adjusting partial brightness by covering dark parts in a
printing process for wet photographs.

On the other hand, color burn is a method of making parts brighter by increasing exposure to the photographic paper for bright
parts under a process for color burning on silver halide photography.

If the subject shows large differences in brightness, performing exposure bias to correspond with the darker portions will make
the brighter areas too bright.

In such a case, by using dodge / color burning techniques to adjust to an appropriate amount of exposure bias to each area of
the image, you can finish your photographs with higher gradation.

The dodge / color burning adjustments included in this software analyzes images and automatically distinguish between parts
that do not have enough exposure and those that do, and then performs an exposure bias on those parts with a precision close
to that of the human eye.

It reduces the exposure in areas that are too bright and adds exposure to dark areas, by adjusting each area to achieve a
balanced brightness.

It is effective on images of subjects that have a great differences in brightness that come from areas of overexposed and
underexposed conditions, where the dynamic range can be reduced to make bright portions and dark portions easy to view
lower overall contrast differential.

You can adjust the amount of dodge / color burn to suit, so try experimenting to see its effect. In addition, you can select the
following items as adjustments for dodge / color burn.

Color Burn ... You can automatically search for bright parts such as overexposure, and
restore the tone through desensitization.
In addition, this is applied only to bright areas and has no influence on the
brightness of dark areas.
Dodge ... You can automatically search for dark areas and reproduce brightness
through sensitization.
In addition, this is applied only to dark areas and has no influence on the
brightness of bright areas.
Dodge / Color Burn ... This adjusts dodge and color burn at the same time.

* The "Dodge" adjustment item in SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro 5 and earlier versions is handled as "Dodge / Color Burn"
in SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8.
4.3.4.2. HDR

HDR is short for High Dynamic Range imaging. It is a technique for photographic imagery that comes close to human memory.

Photographs cannot simultaneously image bright parts and dark parts. If you adjust exposure to the bright parts, the darker
parts will break down, and if you adjust exposure to the dark parts, the brighter parts will break down. However, the human eye
continually processes the luminosity and recognizes it as an image. Therefore, even when, for example, you look at a scene with
great differences in brightness, you recall the image without breaking down the whites or darks.

Put simply, HDR is a photographic technique for imaging in a much wider dynamic range compared to normal photographic
techniques.

Many conventional HDR techniques use a method of combining multiple images of different exposure to create a single image.
This software employs HDR imaging from the data of a single image by utilizing the wealth of information found in the image
data to the maximum.

Please search for the most effective adjustments as you adjust HDR to perfection. In addition, you can select the following
items as HDR adjustments.

Color Burn HDR ... You can automatically search for bright parts such as overexposure, and
restore the tone through desensitization.
In addition, this is applied only to bright areas and has no influence on the
brightness of dark areas.
Dodge HDR ... You can automatically search for dark areas and reproduce brightness
through sensitization.
 In addition, this is applied only to dark areas and has no influence on the
brightness of bright areas.
HDR ... This adjusts bright areas and dark areas at the same time.

Reproduce brightness only on dark areas. Reproduce darkness only on bright areas.

4.4. White Balance

White balance is the function to adjust white color.

Human eyes adjust to ambient light color. We perceive the white color of an object as the same under sunlight, tungsten lamps, and
fluorescent lamps. However, digital cameras, "white" under sunlight can be recorded as white, while white under tungsten lamps are recorded
as a reddish white, similarly fluorescent lamps are recorded as greenish or bluish white. What provides compensation for these color shifts is
"white balance".

White balance adjustments vastly change colors in photos. A white object in the photo can be expressed most accurately and naturally with
this function. In other words, the basic concept of white balance is the method of expressing white as white, irrelevant of color tint.

However, it is not always true for all types of scenes.

For example, if a white object in evening glow is expressed as a clean white, you will not be able to perceive this as sunset scene. If you want
to produce a melancholy mood on your picture in a cloudy sky, it may be appropriate to add a blueish tint.

Although most cameras today can automatically adjust the white balance, it is not always accurate and even if it is correct, the result is not
always what you intend. Therefore, it becomes necessary to adjust the white balance according to your artistic expression. However, it is
very difficult to select and correct the white balance when taking a picture.

When taking a photograph in RAW, you do not have to consider a white balance setting since it is deemed a parameters only required in the
process of developing RAW data into JPEG and TIFF images. White balance settings in digital cameras are required for development
processing in the camera and for converting to JPEG / TIFF images. It is not absolutely necessary to save them to RAW data.

The set white balance is reflected in preparing preview displays for displaying in thumbnail images and liquid crystal displays on the back of
the camera. Therefore, it is desirable to set a value as appropriate as possible, but you can freely change the white balance while processing
developments later.

If you take a picture with RAW data, you can change the white balance to what you want when you are developing the photo for a particular
expression of a scene. One of the major advantages of using the RAW data is this function.

4.4.1. Adjusting White Balance with Taste

This is the way to make adjustment by selecting the white balance adjusted for each light
source in advance. Select a taste that specifies a light source in the dropdown list of "white
balance".
You can also change settings in detail later, so it is convenient to select the light source first.
The preset items displayed in the dropdown list may be different for each type of camera.
There are "taste" that are prepared in the dropdown list of "white balance", which specify
each light source.
 Auto (Absolute) ... This automatically determines a suitable white balance. It automatically makes
adjustments to cancel out color from the light source and color cast.
Auto (Natural) ... This automatically sets an appropriate white balance. It automatically adjusts in order to
perceptually reproduce the atmosphere of the light source color. It is effective for
retaining the color tone of the light source without completely correcting color cast from
the light source color.
Auto ... This automatically sets an appropriate white balance. It automatically adjusts in order to
remove blueness from the underwater photograph.
(Underwater)
Daylight ... White balance suitable for shooting outdoors
 (Sunset) ... White balance suitable for shooting in the direct sunlight of the evening glow
 (Fine) ... White balance suitable for shooting in the direct sunlight of daytime in fine weather
 (Daylight) ... White balance suitable for shooting in the direct sunlight in fine daytime (including
obscured sky)
 (Cloud) ... White balance suitable for shooting in scattered light from clouds in overcast day
 (Shade) ... White balance suitable for shooting objects in the shade in fine daytime (including
obscured sky)
 (Fine shade) ... White balance suitable for shooting objects in the shade in clean and sunny daytime
 (Twilight) ... White balance suitable for shooting in the direct sunlight of the twilight
Fluorescent ... White balance suitable for shooting objects under fluorescent light
Three-band ... White balance suitable shooting objects under three-band fluorescent light widely used in
fluorescent home
Tungsten ... White balance suitable for shooting objects under incandescent lamp
Flash ... White balance suitable for shooting objects in the photoflash

4.4.2. Auto White Balance

If "Auto (Absolute)" / "Auto (Natural)" is set in white balance, it will analyze the image and automatically adjust to a suitable white
balance.

Don't worry. You can use the "auto white balance" function, which expresses a light source color in white automatically.
The method and logic of "auto white balance" of SILKYPIX® is fundamentally different from "auto white balance" in cameras. And it
allows very accurate detection of the white balance of high color saturation or an object having no white area, which typical "auto
white balance" function cannot handle well.

There is no correct white balance. Only "you," the one taking the picture, can make this determination based on what you want the
photograph to express.

However, if many photographs are being developed, setting an appropriate white balance for each photograph would be a lot of work.

You can utilize Auto White Balance as a step for efficiently determining the white balance in many photographs.

Expressing white things in white is the basis of white balance. Ultimately, when you adjust white balance for effective production, it
would be best to start your work by first adjusting to an appropriate white balance so that white things are shown as white.

If you use Auto White Balance, most photographs will be automatically adjusted to an appropriate white balance, so if you are making
adjustments to many photographs, first try using Auto White Balance to improve the efficiency of your work.

There are two types of auto white balance: "Auto (Absolute)" and "Auto (Natural)".

"Auto (Absolute)" automatically makes adjustments in order to eliminate color casting from the light source color as much as possible.
"Auto (Natural)" automatically makes adjustments in order to perceptually reproduce the atmosphere of the light source color. It is
effective for retaining the color tone of the light source without completely correcting color cast from the light source color.

4.4.3. Color Temperature and Color Deflection

This is the way to adjust the white balance by specifying the color temperature.
There is a "color temperature" adjustment slider on the "White balance" sub-control.
 Move this slider to find the point where colors of the object are well balanced.
When the color of the object is reddish or yellowish, move the slider to decrease the color
temperature.
When the color of the object is bluish, move the slider to increase the color temperature.

The "Color deflection" slider is used to remove color casts. Before using it, adjust the color
temperature first.
When the color of the object appears greenish, move the slider to the + side.
When the color of the object appears magenta, move the slider to the - side.

* Refer to '10.4.1. Color Temperature and Color Deflection' for your information.

4.4.4. Gray balance tool

This is a tool for adjusting white balance, targeting the gray subjects that appear in the photograph.

To adjust white balance in the "Gray balance tool" mode, you click "Gray balance tool" on
the "White balance" sub-control, select "Gray balance tool" from the menu [Tools (T)]-
[Gray balance tool], or click on the toolbar.

Then, click or drag the area that you want to change gray to specify the range. The white
balance will be set to express that area in gray.
When there is a gray object in a photo, you can easily adjust the white balance with this
function.
Taking a photograph of a gray chart or white paper in advance may be very helpful.

* For eyedropper operation, refer to '9.3.2. Operations'.

4.4.5. Skin color tool

This is a tool for adjusting the skin of a person appearing in the photograph to an
"expected pretty skin color".

You can switch to "Skin color tool" with the button on the "white balance" sub-
control, or menu command [Tools (T)]-[Skin color tool].
In the "Skin color tool" mode, you can click or drag a rectangle area at the target skin on
the preview, then the target area is automatically adjusted to beautiful skin color and also
exposure bias is adjusted.

This tool is used at the same time as adjusting white balance and exposure bias.

There are times when adjusting skin color does not change as expected with one operation.
If the result is too red, green, or blue, please click that area again. By a few repeatable
operations, you can find out the suitable skin color.
Then you can additionally adjust "White balance adjustment", "Exp. bias fine tune", or
"Tone" for fine-tuning.
If you use this tool on the woman's face, please avoid the emphasized make-up area. Basic
foundation area, especially dull color area is suitable for picking up,

* To adjust skin color continuously, you need to check "Enable Continuous Operation of Eyedropper Tool" on
the "Function settings" dialog. Please refer to "9.3.2. Operations" for detail.

4.4.6. Gray balance tool for underwater photo

With the Gray balance tool for underwater photo, you can designate parts of the photo you want expressed in gray (neutral colors),
 which automatically adjusts the white balance so that those parts are expressed in gray, as well as calculating the color depth and
underwater color deviation.
The White Balance Adjustment Mode is activated through the Underwater Gray Balance
Tool by either selecting [Tools (T)] - [Gray balance tool for underwater photo] from the
Menu, or by clicking on the button under Marine Controller.

Under this status, you can click on the portion of the preview image you wish to Gray, or
you can designate the range by dragging. This will set the portions for white balance to be
expressed in Gray.

This is an especially effective method when white objects (or objects with no color or of
neutral color) are shown in the picture. Even if not completely white, you can drive this by
using the color depth and underwater color deviation after using rough white balance by
clicking on sandy areas or such.

* For eyedropper operation, refer to '9.3.2. Operations'.

4.4.7. Dark Adjustment

While "color temperature" and "color deflection" change the white balance of the entire
image, the "dark adjustment" amends color casts of the dark portion of the image.
Green or magenta color casts sometimes occurs in the dark portion although the white
balance of the bright portion in a scene is well.
In this case, you can amend color casts with this function, and you can continuously remove
color fluctuation from the dark portion to the bright portion.

For example, the left picture is an illustration of strong magenta casts in the dark portion.

Looking at the enlarged portions, you can see that darker portions have magenta in them. You can alleviate this phenomenon through
using white balance only in the darker areas by adjusting them. The picture on the right is a sample of a photograph with the magenta
casting removed from the darker areas using the dark adjustment function.

No corrections. Dark Adjustment (Set value: -31)

(1) Detail of color casts in the dark area

The main purpose of the function is to remove color casts in the dark area, however, with this function, you can also change the
white balance of the dark area and bright area.

The left picture shows the photograph as shot. The picture in the center shows when white balance is set to "Fine," adjusting
to meet the parts lit by sunlight in the back. However, the sunshine filtering through the foliage changes the color of the clothes
greenish. If you use white balance on the color of the clothes, those colors will turn to magenta. In other words, you cannot
achieve a balance between both the clothes and the sunlit portions using only white balance. Of course, since the sunlight is
actually filtering through the foliage, the clothes look greenish and the center photograph reproduces the proper colors.
However, as humans adapt colors, we feel the image is different from when the photograph was shot. In this type of case, you
can adjust the white balance on the darker areas with dark adjustment. The photograph on the right is an example of removing
the greens without changing by much the brighter areas lit by the sun with dark adjustment. This is quite close to the image at
the time the photograph was shot.
 No Correction White Balance (Fine:5200K) White Balance (Fine),
    Dark Adjustment (+50)

(2) Using with "color temperature" and "color deflection"

When adjusting the white balance, first determine the white balance of brighter parts with color temperature and color deflection.
Next, perform dark adjustment if you want to remove color casting in darker areas.

(3) Detail of color casts in the dark area

Why do color casts occur in the dark portion?

This is caused by current leakage of an image sensor. Because of the leakage current, the intense black is not recorded as zero
value in RAW data. SILKYPIX® is subtracting such leakage current data from RAW data (optical black correction) to develop an
image.
However, a higher temperature increases leakage current of an image sensor, and vice versa. In most cases, a camera records
black with constant level, regardless of the temperature, but some conditions or photographing environment may affect the
level (optical black level). According to the color sensitivity of each image sensor, as the optical black level becomes larger, the
color of the dark area becomes magentish, and as the level becomes smaller, the color becomes greenish. The "dark
adjustment" function reduces coloring of the dark portion in those cases. It also corrects the white balance of the dark portion
when a photograph is taken under severe conditions such as extremely low temperature, high-sensitive photography, and long
exposure.

You can make corrections without affecting brighter areas (except when parameters are in compatible mode) because dark
adjustment is reflected after exposure bias from SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro 5.

4.4.8. Multi-light source compensation

This function automatically distinguishes and adjusts white balance when there are two or
more different light source colors within the same image.

Mixed light refers to pictures where there are two or more different light source colors within
the same image. For example, you may have a flash photograph while outdoors in the sunlight,
causing a mixture of sunlight and the flash, or you may be indoors with light coming from a window, causing a mixture of outdoor and
indoor lighting.

"Multi-light source compensation" alleviates part of the light source colors that are unnatural by adjusting the color temperature and
color deflection.

You can adjust bias as necessary.
4.4.9. White Balance Adjustment

The menu command [View (V)]-[Sub-controls]-[White balance

adjustment] displays the "White balance adjustment" sub-control.
Use this function when you want to adjust the white balance at
the final stage of your workflow e.g. tinting
You can adjust white balance in detail with this sub-control, which
has a "white balance target" graphic control, a "saturation"
slider, and a "hue" slider.
(1) White balance target
This graphic control is based on the accurate color space. You can set the white balance
visually by clicking a mouse directly.

[Mouse wheel operation]

You can change "saturation" parameter with the mouse wheel on the white balance
target.

And with [Shift] key, you can change "hue" parameter.

(2) "Hue" slider

It shows the angle from the right hand side of the white balance target in clockwise. Move the slider to change the angle in
detail.
You can specify the setting value indicates:
0 right from the center
90 downward from the center
180 left from the center
(-180)
-90 upward from the center
+ lower half from the center
- upper half from the center
 (3) "Saturation" slider
It shows the radius from the center of the white balance target. Move the slider to change the radius in detail. The range is 0.00
to 1.00 (0.00 is the center of the white balance target, 1.00 is the maximum radius).
4.4.10. Summary of Color and Adjustment

We will now introduce you some setting samples to show how to get the colors you want.

1) To remove reddish color (red casts)

(a) Move the "Color temperature" slider to the smaller (lower) side.

(b) With the white balance target in the "White balance adjustment"
sub-control, move the cursor to the opposite (blue) direction.

2) To remove bluish color (blue casts)

(a) Move the "Color temperature" slider to the larger (higher) side.
 (b) With the white balance target in the "White balance adjustment"
sub-control, move the cursor to the opposite (red) direction.

3) To remove purplish color (magenta casts)

(a) Move the "Color deflection" slider to the - side.

(b) With the white balance target in the "White balance adjustment"
sub-control, move the cursor to the opposite (green) direction.

4) To remove greenish color

(a) Move the "Color deflection" slider to the + side.

(b) With the white balance target in the "White balance adjustment"
sub-control, move the cursor to the opposite (purple) direction.

4.5. Tone

Tone adjustment parameter adjusts the contrast, high or low.

Use the "Tone curve" for making minute adjustments after you finish adjusting other biases.

4.5.1. Adjusting Tone with Taste

 Select a taste from the dropdown list of "Tone".

Tones in incremental steps from Low to Strongest are included as maker tastes.

"Average contrast" is the SILKYPIX default setting. "Average contrast" is a higher contrast
than that obtained using sRGB and Adobe RGB standard tone curves, and is set to improve
the overall appearance of an image.

Setting to "Standard" will give similar contrast levels to sRGB and Adobe RGB standard tone curves.

4.5.2. Fine-Tuning Tone

"Tone" adjustment can also be made to "Contrast", "Contrast center", and "Gamma."

(1) Contrast
Contrast means the difference between bright area and dark area.
When increasing the contrast, the bright area becomes brighter and the dark area
becomes darker, i.e. high contrast.
On the contrary, when decreasing the contrast, difference between the bright area and
dark area becomes smaller, i.e. low contrast.

(2) Contrast center

This is the reference to judge the brightness when adjusting the contrast. Upper levers
from the contrast center are considered bright, and lower levels are considered dark.
In other words, this reference decides the point where the brightness level is not
changed when adjusting the contrast.
When setting the contrast center smaller, the tone of an image becomes lighter.
This is because the contrast is increased based on the dark area, and causes the dark area to become smaller and the bright
area larger.

For example, by strengthening the contrast, "Bright areas" become brighter and "Dark areas" become darker, but "Mid
contrast" is the midpoint between "Bright areas" and "Dark areas," and there will be no influence on contrast.

When setting the contrast center larger, the tone of the image becomes darker.

While, setting the contrast center smaller, the tone of the image becomes brighter with the mid contrast level expanding.

Therefore, if a target object is dark, set the contrast center smaller, and if it is bright, set the contrast center larger to obtain
an ideal tone.

[Utilizing Histogram]

Mid contrast is displayed with the mark at the bottom of the histogram. The brightness of R, G, B where the mouse
cursor is pointed to on the preview display is also displayed here.

When you use this function to adjust while looking at brightness distribution on parts you want to use contrast, you can
find the optimal value relatively easily.

(3) Gamma
Gamma is a brightness adjustment. As the gamma increases, the overall brightness
becomes higher, and vice versa.

You may think it is the same as exposure bias operation, however, they are not the
same thing.

With the exposure bias, the brightness is adjusted without changing the ratio of bright range and dark range . However, with
gamma, the ratio is changed.

When increasing the gamma value, the bright range is compressed, and the dark range is expanded.

When decreasing the gamma value, the dark range is compressed and the bright range is expanded.

Therefore, in this software, this operation is considered as a tone-change-operation and classified as 'Tone Adjustment' since it
changes tone.

(4) Black level

Black level controls create clarity of the dark areas.

You can specify the level of black with this function. When increasing this parameter,
the color black becomes deeper black.
This function works effectively when a picture is taken against the sun and the image
becomes unimpressive, or when a landscape image becomes washed out, or when a landscape image becomes obscured or
influenced by haze.

(5) Clarity
Clarity adjusts the fine texture of the subject.

If you increase clarity, you can refine the details of the subject more clearly, so if you want to revive the texture of a sleepy
landscape photograph as a whole, this will have that effect.

In addition, if you lower clarity, you can finish with a soft focus and atmosphere such as with portraits of women and children or
macro image.

(6) Show tone on "Tone curve"

By placing a check next to 'Show tone on "Tone curve"', you can display the status of adjustments here in a graph in the "Tone
curve" sub-control.

By adjusting the "Tone" parameter when displayed as a graph in the tone curve, you can visually confirm the parameter status
in the graph.

Displaying the "Tone" graph can also be useful when making further minute adjustments on the "Tone curve".

4.5.2.1. Black level tool

This tool designates and sets the black level on designated points or areas.

Enter "Black level tool" mode through either [Tools (T)] - [Black level tool] from the
menu or with the icon on the toolbar.

When you designate an area by either clicking or dragging on a preview image or thumbnail of a selected image, the black level will be
adjusted on that area to the set brightness level.

The brightness level used here is the level of exposure in the RAW data. You can set the brightness level at "Function settings".
Please see "9.3.1.3. Luminance level of the black level tool" for details.

4.5.3. Tone Curve

The "Tone curve" is a tool for making minute adjustments to tone

expression after completing adjustments to other biases and for
converting brightness for effect.

The menu command [View (V)]-[Sub-controls]-[Tone curve (T)]
displays the "Tone curve" sub-control. You can also display it
using the sub-control icon "Tone curve" button.

Bias from the "Tone curve" is reflected after other bias
 processing is performed and converted to the color space on the
output color space of development settings.

Therefore, for example, if you set monochrome to color, when you

adjust R, G and B separately on the Tone curve, this will not be
monochrome, or if you change the output color space in the
development settings, you will have to make readjustments to match the color space. Keep this point in mind when you use this.

You can set the curve (= Tone curve) that converts brightness on this sub-control. The
horizontal axis means input (brightness of source picture) and the vertical axis means output (brightness results of a picture after
adjustment). You can control lightness in a picture by operating this curve.

* By dragging window's frame of the "Tone curve" sub-control, you can adjust a size of the dialog. In addition, by dragging it while
pressing the Shift key, you can adjust the size while fixing the aspect ratio of it.

4.5.3.1. Selecting a Taste

Several tastes that have good effects are included as Maker Tastes in tastes.

There are also special items such as "Initialize" and "Initialize all" within the tastes of the tone curve.

"Initialize" initializes only the tone curve of the selected channel (all RGB, R, G, B or L), while "Initialize all" initializes all five
tone curves.

4.5.3.2. Editing Points

The curve is drawn as passing through a point, and you can operate the curve by moving
the point.

Selected point information is displayed on the "Input / Output" control. You can move the
point by editing the value in this control or by dragging the point on the tone curve.

(1) Adding Point

Click the mouse on a graph to place a point at the position.

You can also click to switch to a mode that will add a point to the tone curve and add a point from the preview
display.

(2) Selecting a point

Select a point for operations. The selected point is displayed with .

You can switch selections by clicking the point with the mouse.

(3) Moving Point

You can move the composition point by either dragging the selected composition point on the graph or by changing the
coordinate value of the composition point shown in the "Input/output" control.

(4) Deleting Point

Move and right-click the mouse on the target point to delete.

In addition, you can delete the current point by pressing the
4.5.3.3. Control explanation

(1) Channel selection Select a channel for processing.

The process is reflected in order of tone curve settings for each R, G,
 B, and L first and then tone curve setting for RGB.

a. RGB　　　　 Set gradation process for all RGB values with the tone curve.

b. R　　　　　　 Set gradation process for R value with the tone curve.

c. G　　　　　　 Set gradation process for G value with the tone curve.

d. B　　　　　　 Set gradation process for B value with the tone curve.

e. L　　　　　　 Set gradation process for L (Luminance) value with the tone
curve.
* When changing tones, colors are changed with brightness on tone
curves combined with general RGB channels.

Because you can adjust only the tone of brightness with the L tone
curve, color omissions and changes in chroma are decreased, even
when using high key or high contrast, for example.

(2) Add point Switch to a mode for adding a point to the tone
curve.
The point clicked on the preview display adds a
point to the tone curve.
By clicking the point while pressing the Ctrl key,
you can add a point on all tone curves of RGB, R,
G, B, and L.
(3) Linear Create a tone curve at the interpolation of a
straight line between points.
(4) Curve Create a tone curve at the interpolation of a
curved line between points.
(5) Input / output Edit selected point coordinates.
(6) Level correction Edit input range of level correction.
(7) Automatic level This is a function that automatically adjusts level
correction correction on the currently selected channel.
It recognizes the image's histogram and adjusts
the level correction so that shadows and
highlights are to the set ratio.
Ratios of shadows and highlights can be set at
"Function settings". Please see "9.3.1.7. Set
automatic level correction" for details.

* The "Add point" function works only when the tone curve is monotone increase or monotone decrease.

[How to use "Add point" function]

Click "Add point" button to add the target tone point on the tone curve.

(1) Select the target image on the preview window.

(2) Display the "Tone curve" sub-control and click on the "Add point" button.
Switch to a mode to add a point on the tone curve.
(3) Click the target point on the preview image.
(4) Then the target point is added on the tone curve.
(5) Move the point and adjust the tone curve.
Moving the point edits the coordinate value by dragging the point on the tone curve or with the
"Input / Output" control.
(6) Then the tone curve that you adjusted is applied to the target image.

4.6. Color Adjustment

Color adjustment can be performed by selecting Color saturation adjustment, Color profile and Color representation.

4.6.1. Adjusting Saturation with Taste

Select a taste from the dropdown list of "Color".

4.6.2. Fine-Tuning Saturation

The taste includes a range of saturation that is considered to be appropriate to normal use.
However, if you want more or less saturation, or adjust saturation more precisely, you can
 set it manually.
4.6.3. Color profile

Color profile refers to the characteristics of Color representation. Select this from the
"Profile" dropdown list in the "Color" sub-control.

Color profiles include "V4 compatible," "Natural," "Faithful," "Monochrome," "JPEG/TIFF,"
"DNG," "Photo style/Camera color" and "FILM SIMULATION."

(1) V4 compatible
"V4 compatible" is a profile that passes down color creation when there is parameter information in SILKYPIX®
Developer Studio Pro or SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 4.0 or earlier. Please use if color tones were adjusted in previous
versions.

(2) Natural
"Natural" is a profile that creates colors standard to SILKYPIX.

(3) Faithful
"Faithful" features color representation with plain harmonies. Even if you change the contrast with tones, color taste will
be maintained. Therefore, you will be able to raise contract without over saturation and lower contrast without colors
fading.

(4) Monochrome
"Monochrome" is used when making a monochrome photograph. You can choose from two different kinds of color
representations under "Color representation".

(5) JPEG/TIFF
"JPEG/TIFF" is a profile when image data is either JPEG or TIFF.

(6) DNG
"DNG" uses color profiles saved on DNG formatted images.

Please see "10.4.4. DNG (Digital Negative) format compatibility" concerning DNG formatted images.

(7) Photo style/Camera color

"Photo style/Camera color" is a profile to reproduce color creation by Panasonic digital cameras, and user can select
this when you take RAW data by one of applicable cameras.

When you select "Photo style/Camera color," "Color representation" will be changed to dedicated item "Photo
style/Camera color." You can select available photo style or "Camera color" which represents basic camera colors.

You can see digital cameras which are capable of "Photo style/Camera color" in "11. Supported cameras list."

* "Photo style" is one of functions by Panasonic digital camera.

(8) FILM SIMULATION

"FILM SIMULATION" is a profile to reproduce color creation by FUJIFILM digital cameras, and user can select this when
you take RAW data by one of applicable cameras.

When you select "FILM SIMULATION," "Color representation" will be changed to dedicated item "FILM SIMULATION."
You can select available film simulation.

You can see digital cameras which are capable of "FILM SIMULATION" in "11. Supported cameras list."

* "FILM SIMULATION" is one of functions by FUJIFILM digital camera.

4.6.4. Color representation

Color representation determine the direction of color reproduction. You can select it from the
"Color representation" drop list in the "Color" sub-control. The following are categories of
color representations: "Standard color," "Memory color," "Portrait color," "Film color,"
"Monochrome," "Photo style/Camera color" and "FILM SIMULATION."

4.6.4.1. Standard color

This is the standard color creation of SILKYPIX®, which aims for true color
reproduction.
This mode provides reasonably natural colors for many scenes.
4.6.4.2. Memory color

True colors in photo are not always "beautiful colors."

It is common knowledge that colors in our memory, or colors of an object that we perceive are different from actual colors.
Although they differ in individuals, we can see a trend and directional characteristic.

We consider the picture "beautiful" when colors in our memory or colors we perceive are printed in the photo.

This mode creates colors of perception.

Although the directional character is different for each color, in short, saturation tends to be higher than the "Standard color"
mode.

This mode provides "beautiful colors" for many scenes, but colors of some objects with high saturation such as flowers become
too vivid and over saturated.

In such case, adjust with '4.10. Fine Color Controller', set lower saturation level or lower development gain to correct the
conflicting color.

Memory Color 1 reproduces colors equivalent to "Memory Color" in previous versions of SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro.
Memory color 2 provides a humanistic touch of memory color with a new color reproduction technology called "3-dimentional
color mapping method."

Select the mode, as you like.

* When decreasing the development gain to express dark images, it becomes easier to reproduce the
color of object with high saturation. This is because most display screens and printers are not good at
outputting high saturation and brightness simultaneously.
This mode is not effective in portrait photography.

Skin tones, or oranges, are often over saturated. This allows for high expressions in this mode, but as for skin tones, there are
many cases in which neither the subjects nor the photographer like this over saturation.

If you want more beautiful skin colors, select the "Portrait color" expression.
4.6.4.3. Portrait color

With pictures of people, you can create "pleasing skin tones" by creating more natural skin colors at the expense of accurate
and neutral color reproduction.

Portrait color mode is a color reproduction which emphasizes skin tones and is better suited to photographing people.

Skin color is easily effected by different lighting sources. More specifically, luminosity, saturation and hue of skin are all
effected under different the light source.

In this mode, overall saturation is reduced with luminosity being given to skin tones. Colors which are distant from skin tones
are slightly effected because of the necessity to achieve greater skin tone balance.

In "Standard color" mode, when you require "pleasing and expected colors" by adjusting the white balance, the color balance in
parts other than skin may easily be effected or break up. However, in this mode, colors close to skin tones are reproduced as
accurately much as possible and are adjusted to obtain a normal white balance. Therefore, when used on portraits, both a
natural background and pleasing skin tones are easy to achieve.

Female skin tones were mainly use as a reference in the development of this mode.

This emphasis in "expected" colors are especially strong in women, while men portraits seem to render better with tanned
healthy colors (tinted slightly with yellow).

Therefore, the portrait mode may not be appropriate for male portraits if one wishes to use this for natural skin tones or
brownish skin tones.

When this mode is not appropriate for your picture, use the "Standard color."

Portrait color 1 reproduces colors similar to "Portrait colors" in earlier versions of this software.

Portrait color 2 is a mode that provides skin color with a new color reproduction technology "3-dimentional color mapping
method", which is different from Portrait color 1.

Portrait color 3 provides colors of clothes and background slightly shifted to "memory color" based on "Portrait color 2."

* In order to reproduce pleasing skin colors, appropriate white balance adjustments may be required.
In cases other than photographs under fixed light sources, adjusting these will inevitably involve some
trouble.
Use these color modes according to your preference.

4.6.4.4. Film color

This mode provides color reproduction similar to reversal film.

In film, the light source or exposure impacts on colors, this is different in digital cameras. If you want a neutral color when using
film, the color of the light source is critical and the exposure range is limited.
Since we did not wish for this digital cameras to be limited in this way, we have adjusted each parameter to realize all
adjustment functions including the white balance or exposure bias and film tone colors simultaneously.

Therefore, you can easily obtain film-like colors by simply selecting this film color representation.

However, the tone of the gray axis is not effected when changing this mode. Adjust the tone, too, if required.

Since the film tone mode (for example, vivid film tone V) makes saturation high, colors in that mode are effected according to
the white balance adjustment.

In the "White balance" sub-control, adjust the white balance to create your favorite colors if needed.

'4.10. Fine Color Controller' allows more precise color adjustment.
4.6.4.5. Monochrome
This is a color representation when an user selects "Monochrome" from "Color expression" drop list.

In Monochrome, a monochrome photograph is produced by calculating an average value of RGB values.

In Monochrome 2, a natural monochrome photograph, which is fitted to a sensitivity characteristic of a human eye, is produced.

Select a mode that comes close to your own expression, based on the scene.

Making photographs monochrome is performed at the final stage of producing colors.

Therefore, you can make various types of monochrome by adjusting white balance and color representation.
4.6.4.6. Photo style/Camera color
This is a color representation when you select "Photo style/camera color" in a profile.

If a camera is capable of photo style function, available photo styles are shown in dropdown list and SILKYPIX® reproduces
color creation.

If a camera is NOT capable of photo style function, only "Camera color" is shown in dropdown list and SILKYPIX® reproduces
color creation.

* Please refer camera manuals regarding to each photo styles in dropdown list.

4.6.4.7. FILM SIMULATION

This is a color representation when you select "FILM SIMULATION" in a profile.

If a camera is capable of film simulation function, available film simulations are shown in dropdown list and SILKYPIX®
reproduces color creation.

When you select "Camera setting," color creation of film simulation being set at shooting will be represented. You can check
the film simulation in "Image Properties" sub-control.

* Please refer camera manuals regarding to each film simulations in dropdown list.

4.7. Sharpening / Noise Reduction

"Sharpening" and "Noise reduction" both have an own sub-control, but they belong to the common category of the development parameter.

Therefore they have a common taste dropdown list. Please remember that any taste generated from this function contains both sharpening
and noise reduction parameters.

If you make sharpness stronger, then noise is also emphasized. Therefore you should try and balance the adjustment of sharpening and noise
reduction at the same time, in order to achieve better results.

4.7.1. Adjusting Sharpening with Taste

Select a taste from the dropdown list of "Sharpening/Noise reduction".

4.7.2. Sharpening Adjustment
The sharpening adjustment of the software controls the outline phenomenon or noise
occurrence mentioned above.

The preset value provides you with well balanced parameters , but you can also set them manually to make more precise adjustments.

Set to an appropriate strength while referring to printed results.

You can select three type of sharpness: "Natural sharp", "Normal sharp", "Pure detail" and
"Unsharp mask".

Natural sharp can control false black and white edges that appear near outlines.

An additional feature is that noise in the background is not easily emphasized even with
strengthened sharpness.

Normal sharp is ordinary algorism.

Pure detail is an ISL original algorithm for obtaing higher resolution looking images. It gives a
stronger effect than with "normal sharp".

"Unsharp mask" is a process for color space defined only by our company. You can use sharpness while restraining coloring on
outlined parts.

4.7.2.1. Natural Sharp

(1) Outline emphasis

Use it to fix the overall level of the sharpness.

However, brightness changes and false black and white edges becomes more
prevalent near outlines when this parameter is high.

Use "Ringing artifact ctrl." and "Bokeh preservation" to control false black and
white edges.

(2) Ringing artifact ctrl.

Adjust the strength on false black and white edges that appear around outlines
when strengthening sharpness.

However, details may look weak, so adjust "Outline emphasis" and balance
while checking.

* A "ringing artifact" refers to false black and white edges near outlines.

(3) Bokeh preservation

This controls noise that appears when strengthening sharpness and false black
and white edges when overemphasized.

However, details may look weak, so adjust "Outline emphasis" and balance
while watching.

As the "Ringing artifact ctrl." has different tendencies in control, it is recommended that if you raise "Bokeh
prevention," you lower "Ringing artifact ctrl.," and that if you raise "Ringing artifact ctrl." you lower "Bokeh prevention."

4.7.2.2. Normal sharp / Pure detail

(1) Outline emphasis

Use it to fix the overall level of the sharpness.

(2) Detail emphasis

 Use it to fix the emphasis level of fine edge (detail).
When increasing this parameter, you can improve resolution of the detail without
emphasizing outline.
However, this function emphasizes noise at the same time, remember to balance
with noise level.

* Detail emphasis level changes according to both of (1) outline emphasis parameters and this parameter. When
decreasing (1) outline emphasis, detail emphasis also becomes smaller at the same time. At first, make rough
adjustments by (1) outline emphasis parameter and then adjust accordingly with this parameter.

(3) False outline ctrl.

Use this to adjust the level to control false black or opposite coloring which
appearing around the outline when the sharpness is increased.
However, when this parameter is increased, color separation doesn't work well
(The color in the color boundary between different colors is lost and the area
becomes white).
Keep this parameter and the color separation in balance.
4.7.2.3. Unsharp mask

(1) Amount
You can specify the "Amount" to apply "Unsharp mask". The larger value
makes the stronger sharpness.

(2) Radius
It sets the thickness of the edge of the outline emphasized. The larger value
makes the thicker edge, and the smaller value makes the thinner edge.

Typically, setting the range between 0.5-1.0 is recommended.

(3) Threshold
If the value is set smaller, the outlines are emphasized regardless of the
clearness of the edge. If the value is set larger, only the outlines are
emphasized which has clear edge.

You can prevent the emphasis of the noise with this parameter.

Typically it is set to '1'. Please adjust this parameter to balance noise and sharpness.

4.7.3. Noise Reduction Adjustment

Noise means the rough texture that occurs in high sensitive photography. We call it high
frequency noise in the software.
At the high sensitive photography, red, green, or blue spots appear, too. We call them color
noise in this software.
The function to remove such noise is the noise reduction.
In this software, the noise reduction function has independent parameters for every
category.
The following sections are summaries of the function of noise reduction.

* Noise reduction has been improved in SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro 6, so if you read development
parameters for noise reduction in SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro 5 or earlier versions, the effects of noise
reduction processing will differ from those earlier products.If development effects are different from what you
desire, please readjust on SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8. We apologize
for the inconvenience.

4.7.3.1. Color distortion

The color distortion function changes the process level of color distortion reduction.
The software enables one to reduce both color distortions occur in the fine structure
area (high frequency area) and color noise.

When too much color noise at high sensitive photography or color distortions in the
fine structure area occurs, increase the reduction level.

However, there are some limitations in this function.

As the reduction level becomes stronger, the color separation level goes down, which makes colors in the color boundary blur.
Also, there is a problem of "color spill," which is the phenomenon that occurs when the vivid color leaks around the picture.

Therefore, too strong reduction level may decrease the picture quality.
4.7.3.2. Fringe reduction

Fringe reduction adjusts the strength of processing to restrain fringe.

Fringe refers to the phenomenon of purple and green coloring that does not exist in
reality on the edges of less bright (dark) portions adjacent to very bright portions.

This kind of coloring can be removed.
4.7.3.3. Neat noise

This reduces broader noise associated with high sensitive photographs and generates a
clean image.

This function reduces two different types of noise.

One is banding noise that runs horizontally or vertically. If you notice banding noise,
 strengthen neat noise to adjust so that the banding noise will disappear.

The second are runs of color and brightness brought about by noise. If you notice runs of color or brightness, further
strengthen neat noise and color distortion.

* Neat noise simultaneously performs processing in accordance with strength to remove banding noise
and processing to neaten runs of color and brightness.Strengthening to remove banding noise varies
only through neat noise parameters. Strengthening neatness of runs of color and brightness changes
both neat noise parameters and color distortion parameters. (It is determined by the product of these
two parameters.)Therefore, when adjusting neat noise, adjust color distortion at the same time.If you
notice banding noise, first adjust so that it disappears using neat noise, then control runs with color
distortion.If it is running colors and brightness, not banding noise, that you notice, first strengthen
color distortion and then adjust neat noise.When adjusting parameters, it does not matter whether you
first do neat noise or color distortion, but it becomes easier to drive parameters by using the above
orders.

4.7.3.4. Smoothness

Use the "Smoothness" slider in the "Noise reduction" sub-control to reduce the high
frequency noise. This function reduces the noise, with using RAW data.

The default values for "Color distortion" and "Smoothness" will change depending on the type of camera, ISO film speed, etc.
Please see "4.19.2. Dynamic default" for details.
4.7.3.5. Reduce Moiré

This reduces the moiré that arises in images. Moiré is a pattern that does not actually
exist.

You may see moiré in everyday life when watching the news or such, and the announcer is wearing a shirt that is checked or
striped. You may be able to see patterns that are not really there.

This is moiré. Many people are probably familiar with this.

Moiré may also occur in photographs taken with digital still cameras. Moiré can easily occur in photography of minute frequency
patterns with an absolute focus. In addition, it may easily arise in cameras without optical low-pass filters.

Moiré arises in all cameras (sensors), image processing and output devices (monitors, printers, etc.).

This function reduces the moiré that arises in image development.

In addition, this function has an influence on outlines within the image. (Technically, the high frequency response changes.)
Outlines may smooth, or conversely, there may be a decrease in definition.

* If you use a camera with an X-Trans CMOS sensor such as FUJIFILM X-Pro1, moiré reduction will
already by in effect.

4.8. Development settings

4.8.1. Demosaicing Sharpness Adjustment

The "Demosaicing sharpness" in the "Development settings" sub-control fixes the

development quality.

The default value for "Demosaicing sharpness" changes depending on the type of camera
and ISO film speed. Please see "4.19.2. Dynamic default" for details.

* This cannot be used when JPEG / TIFF is selected.

Normally, set this value around "80."

Set it lower for a picture with full of noise. Please refer to '10.1.4. Relationship between Demosaicing Sharpness and Picture Quality'
for more information.

You can change it temporary in order to speed up preview display. Please refer to '10.1.1. Speed up Refreshing of Preview' for your
reference.

4.8.2. Resolution Plus

Resolution Plus is a parameter than can be used only if RAF files taken in WIDE mode on FUJIFILM
FinePix S3/S5 Pro are developed.

As for the Super CCD honeycomb SRII sensor installed in FinePix S3/S5 Pro, low sensitivity
pixels (R pixels) are located between high sensitivity pixels (S pixels).

At our company, we believed that we could raise the limited resolution by using information in low sensitivity pixels. This software has
a development engine that makes constructive use of low sensitivity pixel information in resolution.

However, compared to high sensitivity pixels, low sensitivity pixels have only about 1/16 the sensitivity and there is a lot of noise, so
when used in resolution, noise may increase and artefacts may be noticeable around the outlines.

This function, Resolution Plus, controls the extent of use of low sensitivity pixels in resolution.

When set to 0, low sensitivity pixel information is not used in resolution (even in this case, it is used as always in gradation
reproduction and in high dynamic range processing).

When set to 100, the maximum is used in resolution.

This parameter is influenced by the Demosaicing sharpness settings. Adjust "Demosaicing sharpness" settings at the same time and
 balance jags in resolution and the outlines.

* This cannot be used when JPEG / TIFF is selected.
4.8.3. Color space

4.8.3.1. Input color space

You can specifically set the input color space for a JPEG/TIFF image by this control.
SILKYPIX automatically determines the input color space of a JPEG/TIFF image according to the standard of Exif2.3.
When the JPEG/TIFF image does not include the color space information or when the color space is recorded by other way that
is not based on the standard of Exif2.3, SILKYPIX treats the image as sRGB color space. Furthermore, if an ICC profile is
attached, it will utilize the ICC profile's color space. (*1)

If an input color space cannot be detected and an input color space is not designated, it will be processed in sRGB.

When SILKYPIX® cannot determine the correct color space, it may not be possible achieve correct color reproduction. In this
case, please set specifically the input color space by this control.

*1 SILKYPIX® performs color management using the OS functions.

Please note that if an ICC profile incompatible with the OS color management system is attached,
accurate color reproduction may not be possible.
Please refer to "Determine color space (input color space) of images to be developed" for details.

4.8.3.2. Output color space

Select color space in "Color space" dropdown list in "Color" sub-control to decide the tone expression at development, working
color space adjusted by the tone curve, and color space for image file created after development.

You can select "sRGB" or "Adobe RGB".

sRGB is the standard color space for Windows. Since Windows handles sRGB color space by default, use the software with the
sRGB setting generally.

Adobe RGB is effective in processing images which are intended for additional photo retouching software, or for printing
purposes.

It has wider color reproduction range than sRGB, but cannot be utilized unless you have proper image processing environment
to handle AdobeRGB color profiles (Note that an improper environment will generate strange colors).

When reading files output by Adobe RGB with other software, set Adobe RGB color space for the profile setting (Operation
varies depending on each software, so refer to the manual of the software you are using).

This software also enables the embedding of a color profile indicating the color space into an output file. A file with an
embedded profile allows transferring the color space to the software supporting the color profile.

In addition, this software complies with Exif 2.3 Specification and outputs Exif information indicating Adobe RGB color space.

Please refer to '9.1. File output settings' for embedding profile or Exif information output.
* When selecting Adobe RGB, the preview is displayed based on Adobe RGB color space. Therefore,
when the color management of monitor is not used, colors are displayed inaccurately.
When selecting Adobe RGB, set the color management of monitor to a valid profile so that the correct
colors are displayed.
Please refer to '9.2.1. Color management'.

4.8.4. Develop JPEG/TIFF images

You can switch enable/disable the function to process JPEG/TIFF image.

You can do this with the "Develop JPEG/TIFF images" button or placing a check mark in the
"Develop JPEG/TIFF images" box under function settings.

You will not be able to edit JPEG / TIFF images with SILKYPIX if the check is removed (or the button is OFF) from "Develop
JPEG/TIFF images".

In this mode, controls for making adjustments to development parameters are disabled and operations cannot be performed.

Utilize this in the following cases.

(1) When you do not want to make original JPEG / TIFF images subject to editing
If you are someone who always takes photographs in RAW, you can prevent mistakenly making image adjustments to JPEGs
recorded at the same time as original images.

(2) When you view SILKYPIX development parameters recorded in JPEG / TIFF images
If you select a JPEG / TIFF image developed by SILKYPIX in this mode, you can view the development parameters included in
the development results.

The development parameters displayed here are those set when developing the image.

You can copy these development parameters in the paste buffer or storerooms and apply them to other JPEG / TIFF images.

Development parameters will not be displayed if the JPEG / TIFF images were saved under a setting that does not embed the
development parameters or if the JPEG / TIFF image was recorded and saved by something other than SILKYPIX.

4.8.5. Develop mark

Set marked development for selected image. When setting marked development, you can develop a batch of multiple images from
[Development (D)]-[Batch develop marked images (B)] in the menu.
 4.8.6. Develop
Please see "5.1. Develop" for details.

4.9. Highlight controller

Highlight controller function controls color creation in highlight

area.
The menu command [View (V)]-[Sub-controls]-[Highlight
controller] displays the "Highlight controller" sub-control.

This function controls a color clip in the highlight area, where one
of color components (R, G, or B) is saturated. There are several
types of controls. The "Chroma/Luminance" and the
"Saturation/Hue" controls impact on the area where at least one
of color components is saturated. The "Luminance restoration"
control restores the lightness of the area that were clipped at
capture. Combined with under exposure bias adjustment, you can
restore gradation to areas that have clipped. You can restore gradation to areas that have been whiteout.

* "Color reproduction" and "Gradation" has been greatly improved in SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro 7.
Because the developing engine has improved, when reading development parameters for Highlight controller
from SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro 6 or earlier versions, results from Highlight controller processing will
differ from earlier products.
If development effects are different from what you desire, please readjust on SILKYPIX® Developer Studio
Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8. We apologize for the inconvenience.
When applying development parameters from earlier versions, icons will be displayed in Thumbnail window and
in the status bar.
Please see "3.7. Icons that show status of image" to see if development parameters from previous versions
are applicable.

4.9.1. Emphasis on Chroma/Luminance

Chroma/Luminance controls the priority of chroma or luminance to create colors in the highlight area.

The following pictures were developed based on the RAW data with highlight area (flowers). They were developed with chroma,
luminance, or intermediate between Saturation/Tone.

Chroma emphasizes the colors of the flowers, and "Luminance" controls the highlight area effectively to emphasize the glare of
the reflected light.

Chroma (value: 0) Intermediate (value: 25) Luminance (value: 100)

 Here is another sample.

Highlight controller works effectively with the lighter area such as the sunset scene.

The following pictures, which are sunset scenes, were developed with each priority, chroma, luminance, and intermediate
between them.

Chroma (value: 0) Intermediate (value: 25) Luminance (value: 100)

4.9.2. Emphasis on Saturation/Hue

After giving priority to chroma with the "Chroma/Luminance" slider, you can also control the priority of saturation or hue to
finish development process.

As shown below, since R value (red) of the orange flower in orange was saturated, the hue of the highlight area became
yellowish.

In such case, emphasize the hue with the "Saturation/Hue" slider to prevent reversal of the hue.

This process is also effective for the highlight area of skin, which sometimes becomes yellow.

Saturation (value: 0) Intermediate (value: 50) Hue (value: 100)

In some cases, it is more helpful to give priority to saturation.

In the following picture (a bee and a flower), you can see the color of pink and yellow are nicely reproduced by putting priority
on saturation.
 Saturation (value:0) Intermediate (value: 50) Hue (value: 100)

4.9.3. Luminance restoration

This function restores original colors, which were lost by over-exposure photography.

In RAW data, the color information may be recorded correctly even though it is lost on the photo.

In such case, make the exposure bias under at the capture stage and you can restore the tones recorded in RAW data.

However, the area where the sensor is saturated cannot be restored with this way. Luminance restoration enables to restore
the lost lightness information based on information provided with a sensor with lower sensitivity.

The left is a picture of RAW data, which was taken with exposure set to the trees and ground and developed without exposure
bias. The center picture was developed with -2EV exposure bias. The tones of the sky and clouds were restored and you can
check lens flare. The right picture was restored by luminance restoration.

As you see, the sky and clouds become clearer with this operation.

Luminance restoration(value: 0), Luminance restoration(value: 0), Luminance restoration(value: 128),

No Exposure Bias Exposure Bias(-2.0) Exposure Bias(-2.0)

In addition, the following example is created with the image combine of the upper left picture and the sky and clouds in the right
picture.

This shows the best result with the restored sky and clouds, and appropriate exposure on the trees and ground. This sample
takes full advantage of development based on RAW data.

When you create two types of developed pictures with different exposure bias and luminance restoration parameters, and
combine them with a photo-retouching software, you can operate with wide dynamic range and create a better photo. This is
the excellent advantage of RAW data.
 Composite Picture

The example mentioned above is an example that comprised two development results with different exposure bias from photo
retouching software. However, there was no trouble in the composition by using dodging adjustments in this software. You can
compress and expand dynamic range by using exposure bias on parts of a large photograph with greater differences in
brightness.

Please see "4.3.4. Dodge / Color Burn / HDR" for details.

4.9.4. Dynamic range

This function allows you to compress the highlight gradation.

If you set it larger value, you can make smooth gradation of highlight area or make detail
expression of highlight area. Areas under moderate brightness will not be influenced.

This compresses and stores RAW data of a wider range in highlighted sections, so the
effects are such that gradation of highlighted sections is smoothed and details in
highlighted areas are emphasized. On the other hand, highlighted sections become more moderate.

Please remember that you cannot use this function for overexposed scenes.

If you adjust the "Dynamic range" alone, basically, it will be necessary to leave extra information in highlighted sections. Decide
how much extra information to leave and how effectively it will function. If there is absolutely no room in the highlighted
sections there will be no effects even if "Dynamic range" is adjusted.

If the highlighted section has more than 1.0EV space available and "Dynamic range" is set to 1.0EV, highlighted sections are
compressed so that values of 1.0EV brightness are expressed as pure white more so than values expressed as pure white to
that point.
4.9.4.1. Method for Effectively Utilizing Dynamic Range

In order to effectively utilize dynamic range, you must not lose highlighted parts during photography.

It is also desirable to have as much headroom as possible in the highlighted area when taking a photograph.

The method for taking photographs without losing highlighted portions and with as much headroom as possible depends on the
functions of the digital camera that you use.

Generally, photography that does not lose highlighted portions is possible by taking underexposed photographs, but there are
cases in which it is hard to lose highlighted portions even when taken with a reasonable exposure using your digital camera.
Using a digital camera with a wide dynamic range is advantageous.

However, no matter how wide the dynamic range of the digital camera photographs is, it makes no difference if it loses the
highlighted portion. Not losing the highlighted portion is the most important condition when taking pictures.

Develop an effective photography method taking into consideration the characteristics of the digital camera you use. How
effective you are when taking an underexposed photograph differs depending on the type of camera you use, its mode, the
surrounding environment and the purpose for creating the image. You must pay attention, because taking photographs that are
too underexposed leads to increased noise.

As an example, the following explains shooting and developing with a digital single-lens reflex camera with RAW data recorded
at 12-bit gradation.

This is a technique for giving attention to the expression of the highlighted parts, so generally, there are many times when the
subject is bright enough and it is possible to photograph with an ISO film speed of minimum sensitivity. Under these type of
photography conditions, take underexposed photos decisively at 1.0EV-2.0EV when clipping is a concern for the subject. Keep
the ISO film speed as is and take your photographs with your camera's exposure bias function set to -1.0EV to -2.0EV.

If you correct to a camera exposure bias of -1.0EV and take your photograph, the shutter speed doubles and exposure time is
halved. If you develop this photograph as is, you will end up with a dark photograph under 1.0EV, so sensitize SILKYPIX's
exposure parameter to +1.0EV.
Under these conditions, there are almost no changes if you take your photograph under normal exposure and develop it without
sensitization. One disadvantage of sensitization is that it emphasizes noise, but you cannot tell most of the increase in noise if
sensitization is around +1.0EV to +2.0EV with a digital single-lens reflex camera.

This condition means that brightness information will retain 1.0EV better than information projected on the image as
development results. This makes it possible to utilize the space from the highlighted portions and express the highlights.

If photographed at under 1.0EV, the dynamic range parameter functions effectively at 0.0-1.0EV. If photographed at under
2.0EV, the range of adjustments will increase to 0.0-2.0EV.

* When using FUJIFILM FinePix S3/S5 Pro, gradation to somewhere over 2.0EV is recorded if you
photograph in RAW at a setting of dynamic range mode = wide.
* Compared to conventional 12 bit devices, Nikon and Canon 14 bit devices record gradation to
 somewhere over 0.5EV-1.0EV.
* When RAW photographs are taken with a Canon 14 bit device in a mode that gives priority to high
brightness and gradation, gradation is recorded at somewhere over 1.0EV above conventional
photography mode.
(*1) This depends on the S/N ratio (ratio of image signal to noise) of the photographed image. This
assumes it was photographed at low sensitivity with a digital single-lens reflex camera. If using a small
digital camera with an image sensor and taken at high sensitivity, sensitization may be severe.

4.10. Fine Color Controller

The fine color controller is a powerful color adjusting function that can
freely handle colors.

Select [View (V)]-[Sub-controls]-[Fine color controller] from the menu
to display the "Fine color controller" sub-control.

It can also be displayed from the fine color controller icon in the sub-
control icons at the bottom of parameters controls.

The fine color controller divides colors into 8 hues and provides a function for adjusting colors in each of the hues.

The color circle hue display shown on the control is arranged so that white is in center of the chroma chart, with color positions starting at
the 3:00 position on a clock and going clockwise in the following order.

Color name
Rose red
Purple
Ultra marine blue
Turquoise
Blue-green
Green
Yellow-green
Golden yellow

Color placement is arranged on this color circle such that the further from the center of the color circle, the higher the chroma, and they are
placed at average color intervals as much as possible to meet human perception.

* A chroma chart of average color differences, called the CIE 1976 UCS Chroma Diagram, is used on the color circle.

There are two main ways to adjust parameters on the fine color controller. These are a method of operating a mouse on the color circle and
a method of setting parameter values using a slider control.

Please use these together for effective parameter adjustments.

4.10.1. Adjustments using the color circle

As seen in the diagram of the color circle shown above, the color circle is divided into 8 hue blocks, and there are operation points in
each of these blocks.

(1) shows a block, and (2) shows an operation point.

A hue for operation is selected by clicking any of the 8 blocks. Borderlines of the blocks of hues for operation are displayed in bold.

Operation points in each block can be moved by dragging the mouse or with the mouse wheel.

With either of these methods, movements along the circumference are interlocked with "Hue," and distance from the center of the
color circle is interlocked with "Chroma."

Adjusting the "Brightness" parameter can be done with the mouse wheel, but it will not be shown on the color circle.

Parameters adjusted through mouse operations are reflected on the slider control, so both the color circle display and the slider
control display are synchronized.

[Mouse wheel operation]
You can operate the "saturation" slider with the mouse wheel on color circle GUI.

[Shift] key + mouse wheel is for the "hue" slider and [Ctrl] key + mouse wheel is for the "lightness" slider.

4.10.2. Adjusting with the sliders

Adjustments to each parameter value on standard controls, compared to the method of adjusting
the color circle with the mouse, will be explained here.
 (1) Enable checkbox Enable the fine color control.
(2) Hue adjustment Select a hue for adjustment from the dropdown list.
(3) Hue Set how much change in hue. Set the angle in
counter clockwise rotation from the reference point.
(4) Saturation Set the ratio assuming that the distance from the
center of the color circle to the reference point is
100%.
When setting -20%, the operation point moves to the
inside by 20%, and the saturation level is decreased.
When setting 20%, the point moves to the outside by
20% and the saturation level is increased.
(5) Lightness Set the ratio assuming that the lightness of the
reference point is 100%. When setting -20%, the
lightness level is decreased, and setting 20%, it is
increased.
(6) (Initialize) Return all points to the initial state.

4.10.3. Methods and Notes on Utilizing Fine Color Controller

The Fine color controller is a color transformation tool that displays emphasized colors or, conversely, moderates them, and changes
colors.

It is advantageous to perform adjustments on the image as the last process because color engineering is a type of image processing
that destroys the balance of colors.

We hope that you will experiment and use the various functions, but one matter that requires attention is that it is advantageous to
adjust white balance, exposure, color profiles and color representations before adjusting the fine color controller.

White balance and exposure are basic adjustments and giving priority to these adjustments does not mean that you are limiting fine
color controller, but if you perform fine color controller adjustments first, you may not be able to adjust the white balance and
exposure as you would like.

The color profile and color representation are items you should try adjusting before using the fine controller if you want to emphasize
the subject.

It would not be an exaggeration to say that the color profile and color representation are types of fine color controller tastes. First
select a color profile and color representation that seems to be desirable before independently adjusting the fine color controller.

[Example of adjustment] One example would be a photograph of a person as the main subject taken close up against a background of
a blue sky and red flowers.

(1) If the sky turns purple under the influence of white balance adjustments so that the person's skin color
is a favorable pink, adjust so that the sky turns into a favorable sky-blue.
=> This technique is for adjusting only colors that seem strange such as when a sense of incongruity is
born out of the entire photograph due to over emphasizing the main subject by not using the right
amount of white balance.
(2) After appropriately adjusting the white balance, adjust the orange and red so that the person's skin
color will be flattering, and then further adjust so that the blue sky will also be a good color.
=> This is a technique for true adjustments of basic correct white balance and adjusting so that the colors
you want to emphasize are favored.
(3) Adjust so that the red flowers become pink.
=> There may be cases when you do not want to emphasize colors or adjust to a memory color, but rather
make adjustments with the effect of changing colors to something different than reality.
(4) If red flowers are two bright and there is a whiteout effect, control the whiteout by lowering the red
chroma.
=> Adjustments with the highlight controller to exposure and saturation will influence not just specific
colors, but the entire photograph. This is an effective method for adjusting only specific colors.
Please see "10.1.5. Adjustment for Over-saturation" for details.

* If the mouse cursor is over the preview image, the color the mouse cursor is pointing to will be displayed in a
circle over the color circle. Placing the mouse cursor where you want to adjust on the preview image will be
an indicator of what color block would be good to adjust.
* This parameter category can be turned on / off. Please see "4.21.1. Setting On / Off" for details.

4.11. Lens Aberration Controller

Lens aberration controller is a function to correct lens aberration at
development in order to create high quality image.
The menu command [View (V)]-[Sub-controls]-[Lens aberration
controller] displays the "Lens aberration controller" sub-control. The
sub-control can be displayed also with the lens aberration controller
button under the right.

Photo lenses have aberration. Today, the resolution of digital camera has improved, therefore, lens aberration may have a damaging effect on
the picture quality.
There are various kinds of lens aberration such as spherical aberration, coma aberration, astigmatism, curved field, distortion aberration, axial
chromatic aberration, chromatic aberration of magnification, and shading reduction that is a decrease of light volume occurring in the
periphery.
To adjust these aberration three corrections are available:
shading, distortion, and chromatic aberration.

Tabs corresponding to the above three correction functions are displayed in the "Lens aberration
controller" sub-control.

When adjusting each parameter, select either the Shading (peripheral light quantities) tab, the
Distortion tab, or the Chromatic aberration tab.

4.11.1. Shading (Peripheral Brightness Reduction) Correction

"Shading" corrections contained within the shading tab is a function to correct light falloff at
edges, which is a characteristic of a lens, making an area around the object darker. Use two
parameters to correct shading.

4.11.1.1. Angle of View

Input the diagonal angle of view of the lens at photographing. Calculate and correct shading
on lens design theory from this angle.

On a lens, light volume is decreasing toward the periphery area. The angle of view is larger in
a wide-angle lens and smaller in a telescopic lens.
Based on conversion to 35mm film format (full size digital single-lens reflex camera), the
angle of view of a 50mm standard lens is approximately 46 degrees, that of a 135mm
telescopic lens is approximately 18 degrees, and that of a 35mm wide-angle lens is
approximately 63 degrees. When you input the angle of view,shading correction of a lens is
performed through the calculation of logical lens shading.

However, it does not always match to the actual shading of the photograph. (Please refer to
'4.11.1.3 Detail of Shading Reduction') Please move the slider and find the best point using the value mentioned above.

4.11.1.2. Correction Ratio for Amount of Light

Input the ratio that you apply for the correction.

When you set the amount 0%, no correction is performed, and the amount 100%, the logical value calculated based on the angle
is used. You can set the parameter up to 200%.

You can use this function to adjust the level of correction for the following cases. The case you want to remain the shading
effect without complete correction since the shading is one of the tastes that are unique to a lens. Or a case that a bright
object is on the periphery of a photo and when you make corrections it becomes too bright and lost.

You can also increase the shading level by setting minus value. Use the value to emphasize the center area on purpose by
darkening the periphery, or to make the background quiet.
4.11.1.3. Shading center tool

The cross and circle control is displayed on the preview screen by clicking the button when the [Enable] box is checked.

The location of the cross in the center of the circle indicates the central location of shading effects. You can change the
center for correcting shading (peripheral lighting) by dragging this part.

This is useful for obtaining dimming effects equally in the four corners as an effect, even if the center of the angle of view is
moved by cropping.

In addition, you can reset the shading central location by clicking the button.

The central location of the shading effects is the center of the image. Its coordinates are expressed as (0, 0). Each edge of
rectangle of the shading effects is expressed as an edge with length 1 based on the edge of the extension area used in the crop
tool. Therefore, the extended area for the top left corner is (-0.5, -0.5), the top right corner is (0.5, -0.5), and the bottom right
corner is (0.5, 0.5).

In addition, if the shading center is outside the range of the preview display, the control display will turn pink and an arrow
indicating the direction of the center will be displayed.

4.11.1.4. Detail of Shading Reduction

Reducing shading happens through several complex factors.

Although image formation is distorted in a wide angle lens, the lens periphery tends to be lighter as the object is much
distorted.

For example, fish-eye lens prevents the shading effect by distorting the object in the lens periphery.

On the contrary, with a wide-angle lens, generally, corrections to distortions are performed so that a straight line appears as a
straight line, but the perimeter of the image becomes dark because this method corrects by enlarging the perimeter.

Also, in a certain type of lens, a lens aperture seen from an oblique direction becomes smaller (vignetting), and such lens
causes larger shading effect in the periphery area than the logical features.

An aperture value also impacts on the shading level. When it is the minimum value, large shading is caused, and when it is a
larger value, shading becomes smaller.
Moreover, with a digital camera, oblique incidence to the image sensor causes shading.

Therefore, use the angle of view for reference only. Find the best-balanced point by yourself.
It is helpful to understand that correction amount becomes smaller and correction between the center and periphery becomes
linear when making the angle parameter smaller, and correction amount becomes larger especially in the periphery when making
the angle parameter bigger.

When you find that most of the area is corrected well, except the periphery area, make the parameter bigger to increase the
light level in the periphery. When the relationship between the most of the area and the periphery is less, make the parameter
smaller.

4.11.1.5. Color vignetting auto-correction

"Color vignetting auto-correction" is a function to correct

color vignetting automatically.
"Color vignetting auto-correction" is only available for a
photograph taken with a certain camera and recorded in
RAW data.

The icon is shown in the shading tab on the "Lens
aberration controller" sub-control when you select a photograph which color vignetting auto-correction can be applied to.

By clicking the icon, a context menu to toggle "color vignetting auto-correction" is appeared.

Color vignetting is a reduction of brightness or colors at the image corners compared to the image center.
Color vignetting is caused by a difference of receiving angles at the image sensor.

In general, filters to cut infrared (IR) and ultraviolet (UV) are placed in front of the image sensor.

These filters are plate-like glasses with a certain thickness.
An incident luminous flux causes color vignetting.

Brightness or color reductions caused by color vignetting depend on light sources at shooting.
It makes color vignetting difficult to correct.
To correct color vignetting automatically, advanced image processing algorithms are required.

This function corrects color vignetting automatically with our original light sources detection technology.
Our light sources detection technology identifies colors of light sources from a photo taken with your smartphone.
According to identified colors of light sources, SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 determines
correction parameters and corrects color vignetting automatically.

Example of "Auto-correct color vignetting"

4.11.2. Distortion Correction

"Distortion" corrections contained within the distortion tab is a function that corrects lens characteristics such as when straight
lines turn and are distorted into warps and curves. Before using this function, check the "Enable" checkbox.

4.11.2.1. Distortion Rate

See the right picture. When the image is distorted like a barrel, move the slider to the left to set minus value. Adjust the
parameter with the slider to the point that the distorted line becomes straight. If the image is distorted like a pincushion, shown
in the left picture, move the slider to the right to find the best point. If the slider stays at the center 0, no correction is
performed. After the correction, you can compare the original image with the corrected image by checking and non-checking
the "Distortion" checkbox.

Pincushion Shape After Correction Barrel Shape

4.11.2.2. Center/Edge Control

Determine which one should take priority when adjusting distortion, center or edge.

If the image around the center is distorted greatly even though the straight line at the corner is corrected well, move the slider
to select the center priority. If the distorted level around the center is too weak, move the slider to an opposite side.
Iterative adjustments of this parameter and distortion rate can correct almost all of the distortion characteristics found in photo
lenses. If you use this parameter properly, it is possible to correct or modify a lens having complicated distortion aberration.

Original After Correction

  (Rate: -15)

Most camera lens distortion can be driven to a point where it is not noticeable by alternately repeating these parameter
adjustments and adjustments to the distortion rate. It is possible to correct or mitigate even from a lens with complicated
distortion characteristics, such as the so-called jingasa (complex barrel) type, if these parameters are adjusted effectively.

4.11.2.3. Automatic Bias

Cameras have an automatic bias function for distortion. Cameras can be

set this automatic bias for distortion ON or OFF, and if it can correspond
with SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8,
the automatic bias button will be displayed. This setting allows you to
change automatic bias later.

If set to "Camera settings" it will perform bias based on the value set on
the camera when the photograph was taken.

If set to "Enable" automatic bias will be performed regardless of the value set on the camera when the photograph was taken.

If set to "Disable" automatic bias will not be performed regardless of the value set on the camera when the photograph was
taken.

Automatic bias will be performed at the value already set, regardless of the status of checking "ON" for distortion bias on
 SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8.

Automatic bias and distortion bias on SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 is performed
separately. If both are ON, both will be performed.

Areas protruded by distortion correction are cropped automatically and are resized to the original image size. Pixels protruded by
distortion correction can be taken out by using the "Extend processing area to entire recorded area" function in the crop tool.

Please also refer to "4.14.4. Extend processing area to entire recorded area".

Distortion correction functions were developed with the aim to correct lens distortions, but it is possible to use them in various ways,
such as alleviating the phenomenon of radial images from wide-angle lens through exaggerated perspective, or on the contrary, strong
distortions. Different from the simple transformation functions in photo retouching software, corrections performed here simulate
distortion characteristics that occur with a lens in reference to the design of an actual photographic lens.

The next example is of a transformation from strengthening distortion. The image before corrections (left side) shows a bubble and
face that has been distorted, but the distortion is transformed to a natural form in appearance by making corrections that strongly
twist the distortion (right side).

Original After corrections

  (Distortion rate: 50, Mid / surrounding stress: -50)

Enjoy combining various parameters that give you the feeling you have a lens that can freely control distortion. You will surely find new
expressions.
4.11.3. Chromatic aberration
"Chromatic aberration" corrections contained within the Chromatic aberration tab is a function
that corrects lens characteristics such as when chromatic aberrations of magnification appear as
coloring on the edges around the image.

The transverse chromatic aberration is caused by the difference in lens magnification rates for
each colored light (red light, green light, and blue light) incoming to a lens.

The transverse chromatic aberration correction is performed by changing R and B magnification
slightly.
First, enlarge the area, where the edge of an object in the image periphery is colored, to more than
400%, and display it (Please refer to '[Reason to enlarge more than 400% and selecting edge for
proper correction]').
Then, decrease the color distortion in the "Noise reduction" sub-control (for example, 0 - 80).
After that, check the "Chromatic aberration" checkbox to adjust the R rate and the B rate.

When you correct a picture, enlarge the periphery area as shown below to check the correction result and change parameters.

4.11.3.1. R rate

This adjusts the lens magnification for red light. If the edge is colored by red or cyan (complimentary color of red), change this
parameter first.
4.11.3.2. B rate
 This adjusts the lens magnification for blue light. If the edge is colored by blue or yellow (complimentary color of blue), change
this parameter first.

When these two parameters are appropriate, coloring is decreased most.

First, look the edge condition and change the R rate so that "red <--> cyan" in the both sides of edge is decreased. Then
change the B rate to adjust "blue <--> yellow" coloring. Repeat the R rate and B rate adjustments to find the best point.

Do not try to decrease coloring, but try to distribute the edge coloring uniformly. After that, when increasing the "Color
distortion" slider in the "Noise reduction" sub-control, the remaining colors are disappeared. Increase the parameter until you
are satisfied, and finish adjustments.

At this time, if colors still remain even after the color distortion is maximized, there is a possibility that transverse chromatic
aberration is so big that it exceeds the correctable range or that coloring occurs because of aberration other than transverse
chromatic aberration. For example, too light background shows a possibility of coma aberration.

At the present time, you can correct transverse chromatic aberration.

The Original Picture

Before Correction After Correction

4.11.3.3. Chromatic aberration tool

This tool allows you to adjust "R rate" and "B rate" by one action.

Click button to switch to "Chromatic aberration tool", and drag the target rectangle area on the preview image.

Then "chromatic aberration" parameter is automatically calculated.

Please retry a few times with another position until you get the good result.

* Please refer to [Reason to enlarge more than 400% and selecting edge for proper correction].
[Reason to enlarge more than 400% and selecting edge for proper correction]

Enlarging preview with more than 400% stops simplified development and glare at the time of updating preview, so you can
view images more easily. In transverse chromatic aberration correction process, it is recommended to set the preview
ratio with more than 400% in order to check changes in the image and to adjust parameters. If updating preview
according to parameter changes is too slow to display, increase the preview ratio more, or make the window for
displaying updated preview smaller.

It is preferable to select the edge you want to change when enlarging a display for adjustments. Please pay attention to
the following points.

(1) Do not select edges in too light (white) background.

The background of the sample is not lost, though, the tone of this picture is light and aberration
appears in the twig against the background of the light sky. You should not select the point in
such background for aberration correction. The white background is too shiny, and coloring is
generated by not only transverse chromatic aberration but also by other aberration such as
coma aberration or astigmatism that make difficult to adjust parameters.
(2) Select an edge perpendicular to a radial line through the image center if possible.
Transverse chromatic aberration appears because of difference between the magnification for
each color. Therefore, it hardly appears on the radial line through the screen center and often
appears on the edge perpendicular to a radial line through the screen center. Selecting the
edge perpendicular to the radial line makes parameter adjustments easier.
(3) Select an edge in the periphery of the target image if possible.
Transverse chromatic aberration impacts most on the periphery of the screen. Coloring is
becoming stronger in the area far from the center of the image. Check the edge in the image
periphery to make adjustments.

* This parameter category has Enable/Disable setting. Please refer to '4.21.1. Setting On / Off' section.
4.12. Rotation/Shift lens effect

The menu command [View (V)]-[Sub-controls]-[Rotation/Shift lens

effect] displays the "Rotation/Shift lens effect" sub-control. The sub-
control can be displayed also with the Rotation/Shift lens effect button
under the right.

* When you are changing "Rotation/Shift lens effect" parameter, grid is displayed automatically as default setting.
(Please refer to '9.2.3.3. Grid Settings')

4.12.1. Rotation
Rotation is a function to rotate an image.
This software allows -45degree to +45degree rotation.

An image is rotated and cropped to the same aspect ratio of the image, and then the rotated
image is enlarged to the same size of the image. This procedure helps to keep the number of
pixels after a development and prevent to lose a resolution.
When a crooked photograph is shoot, rotation function is useful to straighten such photograph.

This software allows large rotations of -45degree to +45degree, but larger areas will be lost with larger rotations.

In this case, you can use Extend processing area to entire recorded area function to cut off pixels by displaying all pixels lost through
rotation.

4.12.1.1. Rotation tool

Rotation tool can correct a slant horizontal/vertical line to a horizontal or vertical.

You can use this tool on "preview mode" or "combination mode". You can use the "Rotation tool" by clicking menu command
[Tools (T)]-[Rotation tool] or button on the "Rotation/Shift lens effect" sub-control.

Then the mouse cursor shows you "Rotation tool" mode. In this mode, please trace the horizontal line or vertical line by mouse
dragging.

Then the rotation angle is set automatically so as to correct the horizontal line or vertical line horizontally or vertically
respectively.
4.12.2. Shift lens effect

Shift lens effect has advantages such as shift lenses have.

With this function, you can make perspective control, or correct a distorted building to a straight
one.

The "V perspective" can change the magnifications for the upper area and lower area of the
image. When moving it to the left (smaller value), the magnifications for the upper area becomes
larger, and to the right (large value), the magnifications for the lower area becomes larger. The "H
perspective" can change magnifications for the left area and the right area of the image. When
moving it to the left, the magnification for left area becomes and to the right, the magnification for
the right area becomes larger.

The modified image shape becomes a trapezoid or distorted rectangle, however, it is automatically cropped and modified to restore the
original shape at the original aspect ratio. Therefore, the number of pixels does not change, avoiding resolution reduction due to
deformation.

When you use pixels lost by automatic cropping in shift lens effect, you use Extend processing area to entire recorded area function in
the crop tool to display all lost pixels. Then, you crop unnecessary parts of these pixels.
In this case, the "extension" of cropping area is used. Please refer to '4.14.4. Extend processing area to entire recorded area'.

Shift lens effect can be applied to a wide range of photographs, not just pictures of buildings. As seen in the following example, you
can reduce the size of a face and make legs look longer in pictures of people. This is an example (after corrections) of an image
(before corrections) where legs look longer by making the difference in distance look shorter with a shift lens effect of +6 (bottom:
fall).
 The Original After Correction (V perspective: +6)

The deformation of this process is not a simple conversion from a rectangle to a trapezoid, but the projection conversion from three-
dimensional space to two-dimensional space. This is the same type of conversion when taking a picture of real three-dimensional
objects with a camera. Then you can get the same effect of using a shift lens.

Using this tool, you have the lens which can shift freely. Try various combinations of parameters to find a new expression.

4.12.2.1. Angle
You will need information on angle of view of a lens in order to get the right effect of shift lens effect.

The default angle-of-view parameter is set almost properly based on the Exif information of the input file.

However, when you don't attach a manufacturer-made lens or attach an old lens, the angle of view may not be set properly.

If you find that the image is distorted vertically or horizontally after the shift lens effect process, adjust the "angle" parameter.

Frequent use of the "angle" parameter gives an impression as if the aspect ratio with shift lens effect changes.

Enjoy this as a part of the expressions.

* This parameter category can be turned on / off. Please see "4.21.1. Setting On / Off" for details.

4.13. Effects

When you select [View (V)]-[Sub-controls]-[Effects] from the menu, the

Effects sub-control will be displayed. It can also be displayed from the
icon in the sub-control icon at the lower right.

4.13.1. Portrait beautification

You can control details such as skin chapping and keratin by automatically detecting and smoothing out parts close to the skin color.
Natural, high-resolution process is possible in skin tones and even in other borderline parts.
4.13.1.1. Effect

This adjusts the emphasis of effects to replace skin chapping and keratin with skin tones. Dark
colored blotches on skin can be easily eliminated by raising the effect.

However, as this effect is increased, the texture of skin and hair may appear as if it were painted.

4.13.1.2. Range of effects

This sets the range of effects for portrait beautification processing. By increasing the range of
effects, you can eliminate large blotches that cannot be removed simply by adjusting effect.

However, as the range of effects is increased, portrait beautification effects on smaller blotches
will decrease. Please use a range of effects that meets the blotches you wish to eliminate.
4.13.2. Add noise

When you select [View (V)]-[Sub-controls]-[Effects] from the menu, the Effects sub-control will be displayed.

4.13.2.1. Amount
You can adjust the strength of added gray scale noise. Strong settings strengthen the noise
contrast, leading to strong noise.

4.13.2.2. Size
 You can control the size of gray scale noise. Consider the final print size through magnifying or
shrinking so that you can determine the size of noise based on your usage.

4.14. Crop tool

Use to create your work by cropping a part of an image in the photograph.

Cropping can be performed by switching tool mode in the preview display to Crop tool.

The "Crop tool" can be used only if the Preview window is displayed from either Preview display mode
or Combination display mode.

Switching to tool mode can be performed by selecting [Tools (T)]-[Crop tool] from the menu, or by
clicking on the icon in the sub-control icon, or by pushing [Ctrl] + [T].

When tool mode changes to "Crop tool", the Crop tool sub-control will be displayed along with handles
for controlling the frame lines that show the cropping area on the preview image.

When the image is cropped, a cropping mark will be displayed on the thumbnail.

To crop the image, first you can determine a cropping method from the Cropping method dropdown list.

You can freely crop the image, and can crop in accordance with the purpose of the output by fixing the aspect ratio.

There are three way to crop the image: Adjusting a handle displayed in the Preview window with your mouse; Adjusting parameters in the
Crop tool sub-control; and dragging on the Preview window.

The cropping area has to be set for each image, but the Cropping method is common to each image as software settings.

4.14.1. How to Operate a Handle in Cropping Area

Cropping area can be set by using the mouse to operate handles displayed on the preview
image.

(1) Set the area with each handle at every corner and every side.
(2) Move the area with the center handle.
(3) The cropping area is rotated 90 degrees when the rotation
handle to the right of center is clicked.

* The cropping area is automatically adjusted so that the aspect

ratio is always constant, except for when Cropping method is
set to "Custom".

4.14.2. How to Operate Crop Tool

(1) Cropping area Set a numerical value for the cropping area.
 (A) Upper left coordinates (x,y)
(B) Size (width x height)
(C) One coordinates (x,y) for the area
(D) The other coordinates (x,y) for the area

(2) Cropping method Select a method to crop the image.

Select from "Custom", "Constrain original proportion", "Specify aspect ratio",
"Print size", and "Fixed size (fixed aspect ratio)".
Custom Designate when freely cropping the image.
Constrain original Crop while maintaining the aspect ratio of the original image.
proportion Designate when cropped image and original image share the same aspect ratio.
Specify aspect Designate when cropping to your own set aspect ratio.
ratio

(Set output size) When this setting is on, the numerical value of the aspect ratio set here is the
default pixel size at the time of "Develop".
For example, if cropping is set here to 640:480, whatever value the size of the
actual cropping, the default pixel size at the time of "Develop" will be set to
640x480.
Enable this when the output pixel size is set and cropping will match it.
Print size Crop to the aspect ratio of the printing area for the currently set printing paper.
Use this so there will not be any wasted space when printing.
When designating this setting format, you must first complete printer settings.
Fixed size Crop to an aspect ratio of a standard size found on the list.
(3) Apply specified Automatically crop the image with the selected cropping method.
aspect ratio If the aspect ratio is set, it crops to the designated aspect ratio.
(4) Initialize to default Set cropping area to the initial area.
(5) Crop image on Crop the image by dragging the mouse on the preview window.
preview
(6) Extend processing Extend so that you can designate all areas recorded in RAW data as subject to
area to entire recorded processing.
area

4.14.3. Crop image on preview

Click the icon to switch to crop the image by dragging the mouse on the preview window.

Set a rectangle from the start point of the drag to the end point as the cropping area, following the Cropping method.

The rectangle from the start point of the drag to the end point will be the cropping area when Custom is selected as the Cropping
method.

When other settings are selected, the aspect ratio of the cropping area is fixed. The rectangle cropping area is automatically
calculated and displayed from the location of the mouse while dragging.
 4.14.4. Extend processing area to entire recorded area
With RAW data, information on an area a little larger than the area for development processing may be recorded as a photograph
through default development processing. This area is called the extension area.

Also, whiteout areas caused by "Distortion" from "Rotation/Shift lens effect" and "Lens aberration controller" are included in the
extension area.

When Extend processing area to entire recorded area is on, the cropping area, including this extension area, can be set.

The size of extension areas varies according to the type of digital camera. Also, black areas from no exposure and invalid images such
as electronic noise may be recorded, depending on the type of camera.

Blank areas that occur as a result of edited parameters are processed in gray.
4.14.5. How to handle the RAW data with the aspect ratio set on a camera
There are two types of RAW data with the aspect ratio set on a camera. One is the RAW data that only contains image data in the
certain area cropped in accordance with the aspect ratio, and the other one is the RAW data that contains all image data of the
camera and the aspect ratio as EXIF information.

When you develop the latter RAW data, the developed image is cropped in accordance with the aspect ratio in one of the following
ways.

(1) Adjust the area for development processing in accordance with the aspect ratio
The area for development processing is adjusted in accordance with the aspect ratio.

The rest of the area of RAW data is considered as the extension area. So you may use the rest of the area by clicking “Extend
processing area to entire recorded area.”

(2) Adjust the initial cropping area of a developed image in accordance with the aspect ratio
The initial cropping area of a developed image is adjusted in accordance with the aspect ratio.

The image area for development processing is the same with the area of the RAW data that does not contain the aspect ratio.
This function is only available for RAW data taken with a certain camera. When this function is unavailable, the aspect ratio is ignored
and RAW data is developed with the same area of RAW data that does not contain the aspect ratio.

4.15. Monochrome controller

With the Monochrome controller, images are converted in black and white
using two kinds of settings. You can make adjustments by using the
"Color Filter" simulates the effect of designating a color filter on a lens,
and "Lightness" adjusts the brightness of a specific hue.

Select [View (V)] - [Sub-controls] - [Monochrome controller] to bring
up the Monochrome controller. You can also bring it up with the
[Monochrome controller] icon among the sub-control icons at the lower
right.

If the Taste drop down list is set to "Default," you can return to the
status just before starting operations with the Monochrome controller.

4.15.1. Color Filter

Color filters simulate situations when filters of the colors selected from the pull down list are
attached to the camera.

First, select the hue name of the filter from the following eight (8) colors using the pull down list.
Adjust the selected filter with "Hue" and "Depth."

Hue name
Red

Orange

Yellow

Green-yellow

Green

Blue

Purple

Pink

a. Hue
Adjust using the slider from "-5.0" to "5.0."

Correct the filter hues to be simulated.
 b. Depth
Adjust using the slider from "10.0" to "100.0."

Adjusting towards "100.00" will result in a status with darker filters attached.

4.15.2. Lightness
Adjust the lightness of various hues using the slider from "-50.0" to "50.0."

Adjusting to "-50.0" becomes darker and adjusting towards "50.0" becomes brighter.

Hue name
Red

Purple

Ultra marine blue

Turquiose

Blue-green

Green

Yellow

Orange

4.15.3. Develop as monochrome

Operations can be made by enabling the Color Filter or lightness on the Monochrome controller.

If you operate the Monochrome controller when a check mark is on this item, immediately after starting operations the image becomes
black and white and processes will be reflected on the image.

After selecting a hue with the Color Filter, by using the Monochrome controller with this item disabled, you can apply the selected hue
to the image and process it.

In addition, if you do not select a Color Filter and perform operations of the Monochrome controller with this item disabled, the image
will reflect processing without Black and White.

4.16. Underwater photo controller

With the Underwater photo controller, you can make special adjustments
for underwater photography, such as white balance dedicated to
underwater photographs and color restoration to restore colors lost in
the water.

The Underwater photo controller will be displayed by selecting [View
(V)] - [Sub-controls] - [Underwater photo controller] from the Menu.
You can also have it displayed by selecting the [Underwater photo
controller] icon from among the Sub-control icons at the bottom of
Parameter Controls.

4.16.1. Auto White balance for underwater photo

 By clicking on the button, the image will be analyzed, white balance will automatically run so
as to remove blueness from the underwater photograph, and the color temperature and Color
deflection, as well as the Water depth and Color deflection (underwater) will be set.

4.16.2. Gray balance tool for underwater photo

With the Gray balance tool for underwater photo, you can designate the portions to be
expressed in gray (achromatic color) within the photograph, and it will automatically adjust the
white balance and calculate the color depth and underwater color deviation in order to express
those portions in gray.

Click the button to enter the white balance adjustment mode using the "Gray balance tool for underwater photo".

This is an especially effective method when white objects (or objects with no color or achromatic color) are shown in the picture. Even
if not completely white, you can drive this by using the color depth and underwater color deviation after using rough white balance by
clicking on sandy areas or such.

4.16.3. Water depth

With Water depth, you can adjust the white balance corresponding to the water depth.

Use the slider to adjust from "0" to "3000."

The higher the number, less blue and more red will be emphasized.

4.16.4. Color deflection (unferwater)

Color deflection (unferwater) adjust greens and blues in images depending on the color of the
water.

Use the slider to adjust from "Green (-100)" to "Blue (100)."

When shooting in water that is highly transparent, blues in the image will be emphasized. In this
case, white balance can be done by adjusting the Color deflection (underwater) to the green side.

Also, in the case of muddy waters, the image will be greenish. In this case, white balance be done by adjusting the Color deflection
(underwater) to the blue side.
4.16.5. Color restoration
With Color restoration, you can adjust the amount of restoration of reds, as well as other color
changes that are lost in the water due to this.

Use the slider to adjust from "0" to "200."

When set to "0," Color restoration will be performed. This is a color reproduction that is almost similar to the color actually perceived
by the diver, and uses only white balance.

When set to "100," the amount of color restoration computed by the program is applied 100%, and attempts to restore colors to
underwater objects such as fish when seen from the surface of the water.
 4.16.6. Muddy reduction
This is a function to eliminate light scattering due to turbidity in the water.

Use the slider to adjust from "0" to "100."

If you increase the amount of Muddy reduction, the image becomes darker. This is because the
light scattered by turbidity is removed. If the image becomes too dark, adjust the brightness by
using Exposure Compensation in conjunction with this function.

4.17. Spotting tools

Spotting tools are tools for erasing dust and such found in photographs and correcting for red eye.

The main purpose is for making corrections when dust is found on the photograph or for removing dust from images made from film scanners
or red eye from flashes.

To use spotting tools, either select [Tools (T)]-[Spotting tools] from the menu or switch to "Spotting tools" mode from on the sub-
control icon when in the preview display.

A "Spotting tools" sub-control will be displayed when you switch to "Spotting tools" mode. Also, a navigation display will appear for the
"Spotting tools" display area on the preview display.

4.17.1. How to Erase Spots

Two methods to erase dust are included in "Spotting tools": "Auto Erase" mode and "Copy" mode.

"Auto Erase" mode automatically erases spots by clicking on the area with spots. "Copy" mode hides spots by copying designated
areas on top of spots.

You can also remove corrections to spots in the "Eraser" mode.

You can combine these two methods. If you are not able to completely erase in "Auto Erase" mode or if you can see traces of the
erasures, you can make additional corrections in the "Copy" mode.

You can also make more natural finishes by using the "Eraser".

4.17.2. Red Eye Correction

The "Red Eye Correction" mode effectively corrects for red eye from surrounding hues by clicking on the area including the whole iris.

If the clicked area falls on a previously clicked area for red eye correction, the previous correction is cancelled and the new area will
be used for processing the correction.

In addition, you can cancel corrections with the "Eraser" mode.

4.17.3. Operation Methods

Each of the four operation modes, "Auto Erase", "Copy", "Eraser" and "Red Eye
Correction", are performed by left clicking the mouse over the "Spotting tools" sub-
control preview display, and in the area inside the circle cursor in each mode.

You can remove dust and make red eye corrections by switching to operation mode and
adjusting the size of the circle cursor.

[Operating Mode]

Auto Erase
Copy
Eraser
Red eye correction

[Tool effects]
Wide pen
Medium pen
Thin pen

[Other Functions]
Emphasize spotting areas
Initialize spotting areas

4.17.3.1. Operation Modes

You can switch between the four modes, "Auto Erase", "Copy", "Eraser" and "Red Eye Correction", while doing your work.

Switch operation modes using the , , and icons.

4.17.3.2. Tool effects

The effects of each tool, "Auto Erase", "Copy" and "Eraser", take place within the area shown in the circle cursor.

The effects of these tools are stronger in the center of the circle cursor and weaker near the edges, but you can choose from
three degrees of strength.

Switch "Tool effects" using the , and icons.

However, you cannot select tool effects in "Red eye correction" mode.
4.17.3.3. Emphasize Spotting Areas

Emphasize the display of the area to which corrections were added to the image with "Spotting tools". Turn the emphasis
display ON / OFF by clicking on .

Areas processed under "Auto Erase" or "Copy" mode are emphasized in red, while areas processed in "Red Eye Correction"
mode are emphasized in green.

4.17.3.4. Initialize Spotting Areas

Initialize the "Spotting tools" parameters by clicking on .

Initialized parameters are different depending on the operation mode.

When in "Auto Erase" or "Copy" mode, dust removal parameters are initialized, and when in "Red Eye Correction" mode, red
eye correction parameters are initialized.

When in "Eraser" mode, parameters for both dust removal and red eye corrections are initialized.

4.17.3.5. Adjusting Correction Size

All four operation modes, "Auto Erase", "Copy", "Eraser" and "Red Eye Correction", display the area for corrections as the
area within the circle cursor.

The area surrounded by the circle cursor is the range of corrections. Adjust the area of correction for each operation by
adjusting the size of the circle cursor.

The size of the circle cursor is designated by displaying "Size" and setting the pixel unit.

In you are in "Copy" mode, you can also change the area to be copied.

The relationship between the area to be copied and the copy location is shown in "Relative position" and you can set the pixel
unit.

You can set and change "Size" and "Relative position" through three methods.

(1) Change the displayed numerical value

You can change the displayed numerical value of the "Size" and "Relative position" by adjusting with the spinner or by
directly entering in the text box.

(2) Change in the "Change size / relative position" mode

Enter the "Change size / relative position" mode by clicking either the "Size" button or "Relative position" button, or by
right clicking.

You can change the "Size" by either dragging the edge of the circle cursor or with the mouse wheel, and the "Relative
position" by dragging the center of the circle cursor with the mouse.

(3) Change by using the [Ctrl] key + mouse

You can adjust the "Size" by holding down the [Ctrl] key and turning the mouse wheel.

Also, if you are in "Copy" mode, you can change the "Relative position" by holding down the [Ctrl] key and moving the
mouse.

Once you are used to these methods, you can quickly change the "Size" and "Relative Position."

4.17.3.6. Changing Display Location / Magnification

The "Spotting tools" preview display can be displayed from 100%-1600% display magnification.

(1) Change controls on the "Spotting tools" sub-control

Magnification changes are adjusted with the display magnification slider
control. Display magnification cannot go below 100%.

Adjust display magnification with the scroll bar.

(2) Change the preview window's navigation display

Navigation display showing the area of the "Spotting tools" is
executed on the preview window displaying the preview image of the
selected image.

You can adjust the display area by moving the handles on the four
corners of the navigation frame and with the center handle.

You can also move the display area of the "Spotting tools" to the
 location of the mouse pointer on the preview window.

Display the context menu by right clicking and select "Move display
location of spotting tools".

(3) Change with [Alt] key + mouse operations

You can change the display location and magnification of the "Spotting tools" preview image with the "Zoom Tool" while
holding down the [Alt] key.

You can change the display location with [Alt] key + dragging and resize the display with [Alt] key + [Shift] key +
dragging.
You can efficiently proceed with your work by arranging the preview window display when using "Spotting tools".

4.17.4. Notes
Data to which dust is removed or red eye is corrected using "Spotting tools" is saved as development parameters.

The quantity of this data changes depending on the number of corrections made by "Spotting tools", but at 10KB-1MB or more,
please note that it is quite a large size of data compared to other data.

Correction data from "Spotting tools" cannot be applied with "Paste development parameters". Use the "Partial paste of
development parameters" function and explicitly designate a "Spotting tools" category.

"Spotting tools" data is recorded and saved in automatically saved development parameters and in development parameters explicitly
saved with "Save Development Parameters", but they are not recorded and saved in development parameters embedded as JPEG /
TIFF Exif information.

4.18. Partial correction tool

The Partial correction tool is a tool for designating areas to be corrected and for making corrections to parts such as shading and contrast
within the area.

The main purpose is for making corrections on parts of images, such as raising brightness on expressions on some subjects darkened by
backlighting, or for fine tuning the white balance on some subjects seeming to be to bright from reflected light.

To use the partial correction tool, either select [Tools (T)] - [Partial correction tool] from the menu, or switch to "Partial correction tool"
mode with on the sub-control icon.

The "Partial correction tool" sub-control will be displayed when you switch to "Partial correction tool" mode.

* The position of the filter area created with the "Partial correction tool" does not follow the transformations and
rotations of the image performed by the "Lens aberration controller" and "Rotation/Shift lens effect." Please use
the "Partial correction tool" after the adjustment of these parameters.

4.18.1. Functions
4.18.1.1. Preparing and Managing Partial Correction Filters

a. Add filter area
The "Partial correction tool" has three filter region operation modes: "Circular correction filter" mode, "Gradual correction filter"
mode, and "brush area" mode.
[Circular correction filter]
The "Add circular correction filter" mode reflects the results of settings for each item in the "Partial correction
tool" sub-control in a circle from the center of the designated area.
After clicking , you can drag across the preview image to designate the area for correction.

[Gradual correction filter]

The "Add gradual correction filter" mode displays a band on top of the image and reflects the results of settings
for each item in the "Partial correction tool" sub-control in that band.
After clicking , three bands will be displayed on the preview image.
The range of effects in the gradation state are displayed within the band.

[Brush area]
The "Add new brush" mode reflects effects set by the various items in the "Partial correction tool" sub-control
for the area you draw on your own by dragging the mouse.
When you click on , a double circle will replace the cursor on the preview image.

The tracks of the brush will be drawn in red on the preview image when you drag the area to be corrected.
After releasing the mouse, the brush area to be effected in accordance with the tracks drawn by the brush will be
created.

"Circular correction filter" mode "Gradual correction filter" mode "Brush area" mode

b. Delete all filter areas

By clicking , all items that had been added to the "Filter area" will be deleted.

c. Emphasize partial correction filter areas

The area where corrections were added to the image with the "Partial correction tool" is highlighted.

You can switch the highlight ON or OFF by clicking on .

d. Filter area

This manages the designated "Circular correction filter," "Gradual correction filter," and "Brush
area."

The filter selected here will be the area that can be operated at that time.

e. Enable selected filter area

This activates the effects of filters selected in the "Filter area."

The selected effects will be removed if you remove the check mark.

f. Add brush to the selected filter area

When you click on , the brush area selected as the "Filter area" will turn into Edit mode, and you can add a brush and draw with it.
(*1)

g. Brush eraser

When you click on , the brush area selected as the "Filter area" will turn into Edit mode, and you can erase the brush you had
drawn. (*1)

h. Duplicate selected filter area

When you click the , it will duplicate the filter that is selected in "Filter area".

The filter is duplicated under conditions saved for filter size and each parameter in a location a little to the lower right from the filter
center of the original.

i. Delete selected filter area

By clicking , only filters selected in the "Filter area" at that time will be deleted.

*1 This can be used when the filter selected in "Filter area" is the "Brush area."

j. Feather

Adjust from "0" to "100" with the slider.

You can adjust the shading degree on the borders of the designated area.

By increasing the value of "Feather", the shading increases and the effects taper off from the
outside to the center.

Conversely, by decreasing the value of "Feather", there will be less shading and the boundary lines of the designated area appear
more clearly.

* When used in the "Brush area," set before drawing with the brush. You can not change the feathering after
drawing with the brush.

k. Brush size

This can be set with the slider from "10" to "3000."

When drawing with a brush under "Add new brush," "Add brush to the selected filter area," or
"Brush eraser," you can adjust the size of the brush being drawn with.

Set according to the area to be corrected.

4.18.1.2. Parameters Available for Adjustment

Color / Contrast

When you click on the tab, you can adjust the color / contrast for the selected filter area.

a. Hue

You can adjust from "-180" to "180" with the slider.

This changes the relative hues within the designated area.

b. Saturation

You can adjust from "-100%" to "100%" with the slider.

The higher the chroma, the more brilliant the colors appear, but if the colors are already brilliant,
they may become saturated and you may lose details.

When adjusting chroma, check the overall vividness of the colors. It is necessary to adjust so that the vividly colored parts are not
saturated and details are not lost.
c. Lightness

You can adjust from "-100%" to "200%" with the slider.

The default value of lightness is 100%. Lightness decreases as this value lowers.

d. Contrast

You can adjust from "-100%" to "100%" with the slider.

Contrast means the difference between bright area and dark area.

When increasing the contrast, the bright area becomes brighter and the dark area becomes darker,
i.e. high contrast.
On the contrary, when decreasing the contrast, difference between the bright area and dark area becomes smaller, i.e. low contrast.

e. White Balance Adjustment

When you click on the tab, you can finely adjust the white balance for the selected filter area.


You can set the white balance visually by clicking a mouse directly.

You can also adjust white balance in detail by numerical value.

* "White balance target" control is based on the accurate color space.

f. Initialize white balance target

Click to set white balance target to the default value.

4.18.2. How to operate in Filter area mode

a. "Circular correction filter" mode

(1) Open the "Partial correction tool" sub-control and click the .
(2) Drag on the part of the image you wish to create to designate a rectangular area.

(3) When you designate the area of the first circular correction filter, this becomes "Circular correction filter 1"
and an item for this area is added to the "Filter area."
The designated area has a quadrilateral with a handle. Control the handles by dragging them and fine tuning
the area.
Operate the handles by dragging them and fine tuning the area.

[How to operate the handles]

i. You can adjust the rectangular height, by dragging the handles at the centers in
the up and down sides of the rectangle moving to the up or down.

ii. You can adjust the rectangular width, by dragging the handles at the centers in
the left and right sides of the rectangle moving to the left or right.

iii. You can expand or reduce the size of the rectangle, by dragging the handles at
the corners of the rectangle inside and outside of the rectangle.

iv. You can rotate the rectangle and adjust its angle by dragging the handle
projecting out of the top side of the rectangle.

In addition, you can rotate the rectangle 45 degrees by dragging this handle while
holding down the [Shift] key.

v. You can move the location of the rectangle by dragging the handle at the center
of the rectangle.

(4) After designating the area, control each item in the "Partial correction tool" sub-control and make
corrections.
(5) If you want to make adjustments to another area, follow steps (1)~(4) making a new area for a circular
correction filter.
By repeating steps (1)~(4), a new area will be added to the "Filter area" as follows: "Circular correction filter
2," "Circular correction filter 3," etc.

* You can control areas one by one on the image.

Therefore, when you have multiple designated areas, you can perform operations by switching areas of
operation in the "Filter area."

b. "Gradual correction filter" mode

(1) Open the "partial correction tool" sub-control and click on .

(2) Then, a band from three lines is displayed as operation areas in the center of the image. This becomes
"Gradual correction filter 1" and an item for this band is added to the the "Filter area."

(3) Using the middle line displayed (iii) as a standard, gradation effects become stronger from the lower line (ii) to
the upper line (i).
Effects set by the "Partial correction tool" sub-control in each item are applied from line (i) to the upper
edge of the image.
Conversely, it does not take effect from line (ii) to the lower edge of the image.

[How to operate bands]

The mouse pointer is replaced with when it is over the handle at the top of
the central line.

You can move the center of the band up or down by dragging up or down when the
band is horizontal.

You can move the center of the band left or right by dragging left or right when the
band is vertical.

The mouse pointer is switched to when you point it to any location on the
central line, except for on handle (iii).

You can rotate the area by dragging in this state.

You can move the location of the band by dragging handle (iii) on the central line.
(4) After designating the area, operate each item of the "Partial correction tool" sub-control and make
corrections.
(5) If you want to make adjustments to another area, follow steps (1)~(4) making a new area for a gradual
correction filter.
By repeating steps (1)~(4), a new area will be added to the "Filter area" as follows: "Gradual correction filter
2," "Gradual correction filter 3," etc.

* You can control areas one by one on the image.

Therefore, when you have multiple designated areas, you can perform operations by switching areas of
operation in the "Filter area."

c. "Brush area" mode

(1) Activate the "Partial Correction Tool" sub-control and click .

A double circle cursor will be displayed on the preview. The inner circle indicates the area where the effect is
strongest and the outer circle indicates the area where the effect becomes weaker.

(2) Set the "Brush size" and "Feather" in advance according to the area to be corrected, and drag on the
preview to draw the brush. The drawn area will be displayed in red.

(3) When you release the mouse, the item of that area will be added as the "Brush area 1" to the "Filter area."

(4) After setting the area, operate each item in the "Partial correction tool" sub-control to make your
 corrections.
(5) If you want to make adjustments to another area, follow steps (1)~(4) making a new area for a gradual
correction filter.
By repeating steps (1)~(4), a new area will be added to the "Filter area" as follows: "Brush area 2," "Brush
area 3," etc.

* If you want to add a brush drawing or delete a part of the red region, use "d. Add brush to the selected filter
area" or "e. Brush eraser."
* You can control areas one by one on the image.
Therefore, when you have multiple designated areas, you can perform operations by switching areas of
operation in the "Filter area."
* You cannot change the size of the Brush area.

d. "Add brush to the selected filter area" mode

This mode is activated when a brush area is selected in "Brush area."

(1) Activate the "Partial Correction Tool" sub-control and click .

A double circle cursor will be displayed on the preview. The inner circle indicates the area where the effect is
strongest and the outer circle indicates the area where the effect becomes weaker.
In addition, the brush area already written will be displayed in red.

(2) Make additional corrections to the Brush that has already drawn. Set the "Brush size" and "Feather" ahead
of time according to the area to be corrected, and draw the Brush by dragging on the Preview. The drawn
area will be displayed in red.

(3) When you have completed your additions, click on the button again. The Brush Edit Mode will be
cancelled and the corrected area will be added to the selected "Brush area."

e. "Brush eraser" mode

This mode is activated when a brush area is selected in "Filter area."

(1) Activate the "Partial Correction Tool" sub-control and click .

A double circle cursor will be displayed on the preview. The inner circle indicates the area where the effect is
strongest and the outer circle indicates the area where the effect becomes weaker.
In addition, the brush area already written will be displayed in red.
 (2) Portions of the Brush already drawn will be cancelled. Set the "Brush size" and "Feather" ahead of time
according to the area to be corrected, and erase the red area by dragging on the Preview.

(3) When you have completed your additions, click on the [Brush eraser] button again.
The Brush Edit Mode will be cancelled and the parts of the corrected area will be removed from the selected
"Brush area."
* If deleting from the entire Brush area, please use "Delete selected filter area".

4.19. Editing history

You can return or go forward to different edited conditions for the image as a whole with the toolbar's , or with [Undo] and [Redo]
under [Edit (E )] in the menu.

Also by using "Editing history" sub-control, you can check the list of edited history for the selected image, and re-operate the part of
history.

In addition, while "Editing history" sub-control opening when you select multiple images, you can manage only the representative image from
several selected images.

* Please see "7.7. Operations for Multiple Selected Images" concerning the representative image.

4.19.1. "Editing history" sub-control

The menu command [View (V)]-[Sub-controls]-[Editing history] displays the "Editing history" sub-
control.

Operations for editing and the history of development parameters for representative images are
displayed in the "Editing history" sub-control.

Operation contents, such as "Exposure bias" and "Color" are arranged in an easy to see format
and are collected by category.

Up to 30 histories of edited contents are saved for each image. When edited contents exceed that
number, old contents are deleted, and the most recent 30 histories are saved.

4.19.1.1. Operation Methods

(1) Undo/Redo
You can go back and forth to edited conditions for selected images using the and
functions in the "Editing history" sub-control.
 (2) Selecting history
You can restore edited contents of selected locations by clicking on displayed history items.

(3) Protecting history

Editing contents are automatically deleted when they exceed the regulated amount.

Therefore, you can set "Protect" to protect special edited contents so they will not be
automatically deleted.

Click on the left side of the history number on each edited content to protect it. A "Protect"
mark is shown.

Click on the "Protect" mark again to remove protection. The mark will be removed.

(4) Selecting histories displayed in the reference preview

If the multi preview is in the reference preview mode, you can apply an edited content to the
display of reference preview.

is displayed when the mouse cursor is moved to the right side of the edited contents for
the display.

The designated edited contents are applied in the reference preview when you click on the
designated edited contents under these conditions.

* , which is always displayed, means that this edited content is displayed as a reference
preview.

4.20. Image properties

Change properties of currently selected image

Select [View (V)]-[Image properties] from the menu. This can be displayed by clicking on in the
main control.

The "Image Properties" sub-control is also a control for viewing image property information, but there is also a function for simultaneously
editing image properties.

If photographic information recorded in the RAW data is incorrect, you can correct it or add information not recorded. You can edit comments
here.

You can also add information based on IPTC (International Press Telecommunications Council). You can also make settings that do not
record only specific information.

Contents edited here are recorded in JPEG / TIFF images development results by SILKYPIX ®.

Image Properties

4.20.1. File information

File information for the selected image file is displayed.

Editing is not available for items in this category.

Information related to the file format is displayed in "UniqueInfo". Refer to this information when a selected image is not shown in the
preview display, because information may be displayed if it is a format not supported by SILKYPIX ® or if the file is corrupted.

"Editing date and time" displays the date and time of the latest edit by SILKYPIX. This is the edit date and time development
parameter that SILKYPIX automatically records. It is not displayed for images that have not had development parameters edited or for
initial development parameters.
4.20.2. Data information
This is mainly information recorded in Exif information for RAW data and JPEG / TIFF images. Information related to the image and
secondary information on the image is displayed here.

"UserComment" and "Rating" are items that can be edited.

4.20.3. Image information

This is mainly information recorded in Exif information for RAW data and JPEG / TIFF images. Photographic information such as
camera settings at the time the photograph was taken is displayed here.

"DateTime", "ISO Speed", "ShutterSpeed," "ApertureVal", "FocalLength" and "Lens" can be edited.

You can freely edit items such as corrections to incorrect dates and times set on the camera or when photographic information is not
correctly recorded such as when you use a manual lens.

When recording to a developed JPEG / TIFF image, the "Name of Lens Used" is recorded in a standard format to XMP, while other
information is recorded as Exif information.
4.20.4. GPS
Positional information such as from GPS is chiefly found in information recorded in RAW data and Exif information in JPEG/TIFF
images.

It is possible to edit each item.

4.20.5. IPTC
Information is edited based on IPTC (International Press Telecommunications Council). If IPTC information is recorded to RAW data or
JPEG / TIFF images under IPTC standards and/or XMP standards, it is displayed as initial values.

If recorded to developed JPEG / TIFF images, it is recorded under a format based on both IPTC and XMP standards.

4.20.6. Editing Items

Some image property items can be edited.

Edited contents are reflected in additional information when saved to developed JPEG / TIFF images.

Utilize this for corrections to image property recorded in RAW data, for adding unrecorded information or if not recorded as additional
information when saving developed JPEG / TIFF images.

Items that can be edited have one of the following icons displayed on the right side of "Information." Items that do not show an icon
cannot be edited.
Show items that are unedited from their initial values. There are some cases where initial values are not set.
Show edited items.
Show items where the "Do not record when developing" setting was explicitly performed.
This item is not recorded as secondary image information when saving developed JPEG / TIFF images.

To edit an item that can be edited, place the mouse over the item and click on displayed on the left side, or double click on the
"Information" cell. An edit item dialog will appear.

4.20.6.1. Edit Item Dialog

The contents of the edit item dialog edit item dialog may slightly differ depending on the image property item, but the following
are common operations.

(1) Edit item contents

Set optional item contents. The setting format may slightly differ depending on the type of item.

Enter characters in the text box for characters.

There are also some items for which you can choose values from a dropdown list.

"Datetime" is a special case, so please refer to "4.20.6.2. DateTime".

(2) Select item contents from edit history

If there are items that can be set with optional values, you can choose item contents from the edit history up set to that
time.

Use this if you set the same information repeatedly, such as IPTC information items and the name of your lens.

(3) Initialize
Return to unedited status.

(4) When developing, non-record

Items with this check box checked will not record secondary image information when saving developed JPEG / TIFF
images.

Items without initial values set are checked in their initial status.

You can explicitly make a setting for items that you do not want to record as secondary image information when saving
developed JPEG / TIFF images.
4.20.6.2. DateTime
"DateTime" takes special handling, so it will be explained here separately.

The "DateTime" setting is used mainly for corrections to "<DateTime" when the date and/or time of the photograph recorded
by the camera is incorrect.

The set "DateTime" manages time differences in consideration of correcting the date and/or time the photograph was taken
for all photographs taken, such as when the time set on the camera is not correct.

Therefore, you can correct the "DateTime" at one time by editing the "DateTime" on one image and copying the contents onto
other images.

Use Change Date / Time of file as the default "DateTime" for image processing images that do not have "DateTime" recorded
such as images read by scanners.

In this case "(Date / Time changed)" is added to the end of the "DateTime" item in "Image Properties".
4.20.7. IPTC Information Taste

You can create tastes for IPTC information.

You can easily recall them by recording IPTC information you often use as a "Taste."

Please see "4.1.1. Taste" for details on how to use tastes.
4.20.8. Register lens name

This function is for recording lens names.

Depending on the camera and lens you use, there may be times when the lens name displayed is different from the lens you use, such
as when your lens is from a third-party manufacturer. In this case, you can record the lens name in order to lessen the trouble it takes
to change the lens name every time.

Enter the lens name you want to register in the lens item editing dialog and push "Register." Later, the registered lens name will be
displayed.

This function can be used only in cases when you can obtain information that can distinguish lens from the image data. There are
cases when this function cannot be used, depending on the camera and lens. The edit item dialog for the lens to "Register" will be on
when it can be used.

4.21. Other

4.21.1. Setting On / Off

Some settings within the development parameters can be set "On / Off." This is found in the "Fine color controller", " Lens Distortion
Correction" and "Rotation/Shift lens effect" sub-controls.

All sub-controls in "Fine color controller" and the development parameters divided into three blocks in "Lens Distortion Correction"
can be switched on / off.

If parameter blocks are off, they will have equal status no matter what value is used in the development parameters composed of the
parameter blocks.

4.21.2. Dynamic default

This function changes some of default parameters to values our company deems optimal, based on the camera model (such as the type
and size of an image sensor and a resolution), as well as information at the time of shooting in the RAW data (such as ISO film speed).

Initial settings for WB shooting information, lens distortion bias from angle of view shading, angle of view digital shift from
Rotation/Shift lens effect, Sharpening (Outline emphasis, Ringing artifact ctrl.), Noise reduction (color distortion, smoothness),
Development settings (demosaicing sharpness) and highlight controller (Luminance restoration and dynamic range) are dynamically
changed.

This function is enabled when the default parameter is "Default".

To enable the dynamic default in other tastes, you prepare a partial taste that does not adjust parameters which are adjusted by the
dynamic default and then you use the prepared one as the default parameter.

In addition, the initial cropping area of the developed image is also changed dynamically in accordance with the aspect ratio set on a
camera. Please refer to the “4.14.5. How to handle the RAW data with the aspect ratio set on a camera” for more detail.

By employing this function, SILKYPIX gives recommendations based on information at the time of shooting for the initial settings of
each parameter listed above from the status at the time the photograph (RAW data) was read and first opened. Therefore, even when
performing finishing work on adjusting parameters as a post-process, you can start from the status of making adjustments that meet
each of the shooting conditions so that you can proceed smoothly.

4.21.3. Keyboard and Mouse Operation for macOS

This manual is described on the assumption that the mouse has 2 or more buttons and keyboard operation is for Windows PC.

Therefore if you use macOS PC, please pay attention for the following;

Right click [Control] key + mouse click is the same as "Right click" of the mouse.
[Ctrl] key + Left click [Command] key + mouse click is the same as "[Ctrl] key + Left click" of the mouse.
[Alt] key [Option] key is the same as [Alt] key.

back
prev menu next

Copyright (C) 2004-2018, Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co.,Ltd. All rights reserved.
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 /
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 SOFTWARE MANUAL
back
prev menu next

5. Saving Development Process and Development Results

This will explain development processing of RAW data and JPEG / TIFF images, and how to save the results as JPEG and TIFF
image files.

There are two methods, "Develop", indicating development of one selected image, and "Batch develop", indicating development
of multiple images at the same time.

Format For Processing format Preview Other features

processing display
Develop One image Real time processing / Yes Possible to set details for each image
batch processing
Batch Multiple Batch processing No Possible to efficiently batch process
develop images

[Processing format]
Real time processing Development processing is performed immediately and processing waits until it is complete.
Processing status is displayed in a progress bar.
Batch processing Development processing is registered as a job and registered jobs are processed in the
background in order.
You can do other work at the same time, such as adjusting development parameters during
batch processing.
Batch processing status is displayed in the "Batch development status" sub-control.

5.1. Develop

This is a method for designating a way to save development processing and development results for selected single image.

It processes following set instructions. You can select from two formats, a format for processing in real time and a format
for registering jobs and processing in a batch.

You can also register jobs for batch develop from "Develop" dialog, but compared to designating development with the
"Batch develop" function, you can make more detailed settings and confirm development results in advance in the preview
display.

When you click the icon on the "Development settings" sub-control or the
toolbar, the "Save as" dialog is displayed.

You can specify the filename to save the developed image, and specify
settings for saving.

You can switch between "Saved file" and "Settings" pages in the "Develop"
dialog.

When the "Saved file" tab is selected, you can designate the file folder, file
name and file type for saving the development results.

When the "Settings" tab is selected, you can make settings for develop while
looking at the preview display of the development results.

After confirming instructions for saving files and development settings, click on the "Develop" or "Batch develop" button
and begin processing.
(1) Saved file This switches to the page for designating details of saved files.
You can designate the file folder, file name and type of file for saving the development
results.
(2) Settings Switch to the page for making settings for develop.
You can make settings for develop while looking at the preview display of the development
results.
(3) Develop tastes The status of "Develop" tastes will be displayed.
Registered tastes will be displayed when you open the list. You can switch to develop
settings from these tastes.
(4) Batch develop Confirm set development instructions and register development processing to batch
development as a job.Registered jobs are processed as batch development. When job
registration is complete, develop is closed, whether or not development processing has
been completed and you can go to the next operation.
(5) Develop Confirm set development instructions and begin real time development processing.
The status of processing is displayed on a progress bar until development processing is
complete.

5.1.1. Saved File

This page is for designating files to be saved.

Select a location (= folder) for saving files and designate a file name for the file to be saved.

Select the type of file, either a JPEG image (*.jpg) or TIFF image (*.tif). Please make detailed settings related to
JPEG / TIFF images on the "Settings" page.

If there are file names marked for a job registered for batch development in a location (= folder) for saving files,
those file names are displayed as marked file names.

When a file name marked here is designated, jobs registered for batch development are cancelled, and if that file
already exists, it will be overwritten.

5.1.2. Settings
This page is for making settings for develop while looking at the preview display of saved results.

Settings here include many that have an influence on the developed image itself and on the quality of the image.
Confirm appropriate development instructions while checking the effects and influence on the preview display.

5.1.2.1. Develop Taste

You can select tastes prepared in advance from "Develop" tastes. It is advisable to register settings you
often use as tastes.

5.1.2.2. Basic settings

(1) Image size to save

Set the pixel size of the image to be saved. There are two ways to make designations, as follows.

a) Designate any desired pixel size

When executing develop, you can specify the image size to save. In other words, you can save
an enlarged or reduced image with this feature.

You can select an image size from the history, which includes the original image size (100%),
the previous size, and the size that has been used for this image and also for other images.

It is convenient to select it from the history if you want to save it with the same size as the
previous image. However, the list shows only the size which is matched to the aspect ratio of
the target image.

Click the initialize button to return to default values.

b) Fit to designated size

This is the same as the method for "Batch develop". Please see "5.3.1.3. Image size to save".

(2) File output settings

This is the same as the method for "Batch develop". Please see "5.3.1.2. File output settings".
5.1.2.3. Enhanced settings
This is the same as the method for "Batch develop". Please see "5.3.2. Enhanced settings".

5.1.2.4. Preview

Before saving an image, you can check it with the preview, which reflects the effect of the "unsharp mask"
and "JPGE compression".
When you adjust the setting value for the "unsharp mask" or the JPEG image, the preview is automatically
refreshed.

It takes a time to complete the development of the entire preview image.
But when part of the image is displayed, only the part is developed, shortening the time for development.

You can change a tool mode or a display magnification from the context menu, which is displayed by right-
clicking on the preview image.

5.2. Batch develop

"Batch develop" is a function that develops multiple images together.

A single process of developing and saving to a file a single image is called a
"Job." When this job is registered in batch develop, batch development
processes the registered jobs in the background.
"Batch develop" develops in the background, so if jobs are registered, you do
not have to wait for the processing to be completed, but rather you can
immediately go to the next operation.

If multiple images are being processed, "Jobs" for the number of images are
prepared and these jobs are registered to batch development. They are
processed in order.

The following four methods are for performing batch develop.

(1) Batch develop selected images

This is a method for registering a currently selected image or multiple images to jobs in batch development. A dialog
for making settings will be displayed.

Select [Development (D)]-[Batch develop selected images] from the menu, or click on the icon in the toolbar to
begin processing.

The toolbar icons change based on the status of selected images. The (Batch develop selected images) will be
displayed only when multiple images are selected.

(2) Batch develop marked images

This is a method of registering images set with marks for development reservation to jobs in batch development. A
dialog for making settings will be displayed.

Select [Development (D)]-[Batch develop marked images (B)] from the menu, or click on the icon in the toolbar to
begin processing.

The toolbar icons change based on the status of selected images. The (Batch develop marked images) will be
displayed only when one image is selected.

(3) Immediately batch develop selected images

This is a method for registering a currently selected image or multiple images to jobs in batch development. No
dialog for making settings will be displayed. Current batch development settings will be used.

Select [Development (D)]-[Immediately batch develop selected images] from the menu.

This function is also assigned to the [F5] key by default.
(4) Register from "Develop" to Batch develop
This is a method for registering a currently selected image from "Develop" to jobs in batch development. Job
registration is performed from the "Develop" dialog.

Select [Development (D)]-[Develop (D)] from the menu, or click on the icon in the toolbar to begin processing.

Jobs are registered to batch development by clicking on the "Batch develop" button in the "Develop" dialog.

When job registration is complete, the batch development processing dialog will close, even if development processing has
not been completed. Registered jobs are processed in the background.

You can confirm the status of job processing at "Batch development status". The number of remaining jobs is also
displayed on the batch development status icon on the right side of the toolbar.

5.2.1. Batch Develop Tastes

"Batch Development Settings" can be chosen from tastes prepared in advance. It is advantageous to register
settings used often as tastes.

5.2.2. Basic settings

You can designate the type of file to be saved (JPEG or TIFF), pixel size of the image to be saved and development
result save settings here.

"Development result save settings" and "Develop" have common setting methods. Please see "5.3.1.2. File output
settings".

(1) Image size to save

You can specify the size in pixels of each developed image when you want to save an enlarged image or
reduced image. The following three methods are for designating.
a) Same size (100%)
The pixel size of the image to be saved will be the pixel size after cropping. The image is not enlarged
or reduced.

The cropping size is not designated, even if the output size is designated in the Crop tool.

b) Resize to cropped size

If the output size is designated in the Crop tool, it is resized to the size designated for cropping.

If cropping is not performed and if the output size is not designated in the Crop tool, a same size
(100%) is recorded.

c) Fit to designated size

This is the same as the method for "Develop". Please see "5.3.1.3. Image size to save".

(2) File output settings

This is the same as the method for "Develop". Please see "5.3.1.2. File output settings".
5.2.3. Enhanced Settings

This is the same as the method for "Develop". Please see "5.3.2. Enhanced settings".
5.2.4. Other settings

(1) Folder to save

You can select the folder to save a file using the following three
ways.

(1) Same folder as RAW images

You can save a developed image in the same folder as the original RAW image is stored.
(2) Subfolder in RAW image folder
 You can create a sub-folder under the same folder as the original RAW image is stored.
(3) Specify folder
Click [Select] button to display the "Select folder" dialog, and you can select the folder to save
developed images.

(2) When file names are conflicted

Select an option for when there is a file of the same name as a file output to that destination.

If you select "Overwrite", the existing file will be overwritten and lost. Please be extremely careful.

You can select one of the following four types of measures.

(1) Rename automatically

A different file name is automatically created and given to the file as RAW data.
(2) Ask for confirmation
A dialog box for confirming how to handle the file is displayed.

Please decide the file name.
(3) Overwrite
When the file name exists already, SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8
overwrites the existing file automatically.
(4) Skip
When the file name exists already, SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8
skips saving the file.

The file output in the above process is specified in detail at '5.3.1.2. File output settings'.

The default naming conventions use the base name of the RAW data file for image processing as is, and
convert and save with a JPG or TIF extension.

(3) Don't remove 'Develop mark' after develop

If you leave the check for 'Don't erase "Develop mark" after processing', the "Develop mark" will not be
removed.

If a mark for reserving development is being utilized as a mark for job registration, please remove the check.
5.2.5. Batch development status
In order to check the batch development status, select [View (V)]-[Batch
development status] from the menu or click on in the toolbar to make
the "Batch development status" sub-control appear.

Switch and display two kinds of information by selecting tabs in the "Batch
development status" sub-control.
5.2.5.1. Waiting
Jobs currently under batch development and a list of jobs waiting to
be processed are displayed.

You can delete a selected job with the icon.

When you delete a job here, batch development for the deleted job will not be performed.
5.2.5.2. Finished

This will display a list of completed batch development jobs.

You can delete a selected job with the icon.

Jobs displayed here have already completed batch development processing, so deleting a job is only erases it
from the displayed list so that it will not be seen.

Jobs displayed here will accumulate and increase as batch development proceeds. Delete and arrange jobs
when the number of jobs increases and the list becomes difficult to understand.

A context menu will appear when you select a job and right click on it.

By selecting "Open with Explorer (O)" after you select a job, you can open the developed and saved JPEG /
TIFF image file in Explorer.

You can also delete a selected job from the context menu.

5.2.5.3. Pausing and restarting batch development

Batch development processing can be paused.

All batch development will be halted by clicking on on the bottom right. Click on when paused to
restart batch development.

5.3. Settings for development and saving

Setting items common in both "Develop" and "Batch develop" are explained here.

5.3.1. Basic Settings

Basic settings differ slightly between "Develop" and "Batch develop", but items that can be set in the same way will
be explained.
5.3.1.1. File type for saving
From the drop down list, you can select JPEG or TIFF file. When you want to set this in detail, use the "File
output settings" dialog as described below.
5.3.1.2. File output settings

By registering a setting status from "File output settings" that you often use as a taste, you can easily
switch settings by selecting that taste.

You can also set JPEG and TIFF saving formats here.

There are many detailed setting items in "File output settings". Click on the "Setting details" button and
open the "File output settings" dialog to make settings for all items.

Please see "9.1. File output settings" for details.

You can make detailed settings for both "JPEG" and "TIFF" by selecting "Type of saved file" here.

Items that can be set here are the same as the items that can be set with "Setting details". Please see
"9.1.2. Setting of File Type" for details.

5.3.1.3. Image size to save

You can specify the size in pixels of each developed image when you want to save an enlarged image or
reduced image. The methods for designating pixel size for resizing differ slightly between "Develop" and
"Batch develop".

You can record and save at an appropriate pixel size that meets the purposes of the image.
5.3.1.3.1. Fit to designated size

You can designate a size for the image to be saved and
make settings so that you save it resized to the pixel size
you designated.

Select "Fit to designated size" in "Image size to save". It will be saved at a pixel size within the restricted
size that was designated.

This setting method can be set for both "Develop" and "Batch develop".

When creating the picture for a slide show that are displayed on a particular display, you can specify a
display size. For example, when you want to display images on a VGA display, you can specify the display
size of 640x480.
By this setting, the developed image files are saved with the size of 640x480. Therefore, you do not need to
adjust the image size at the slide show.

[Adjust orientation of the above rectangle to the target aspect ratio]
 When you check this setting, the specified size is automatically adjusted to match the orientation with
the aspect ratio of the target image.

For example, when specifying 640x480 as size, the result size will be inscribed to 640x480 for the
lateral image and it will be inscribed to 480x640 for the longitudinal image.
5.3.2. Enhanced settings
Settings for imprint data and unsharp mask are made here.

5.3.2.1. Imprint data

As the name of the function implies, "Imprint data" allows
you to imprint the date and time the photograph was taken
onto the development results.

In addition to the date and time the photograph was taken,
you can also include image information, optional characters
and credit images on the development results.

You can imprint the date and time the photograph was taken
and image information by selecting prepared data for imprint
data.

You cannot imprint the date if the developed file is a 16bit
TIFF.

Creating "Imprint data" is required for imprinting a credit
image you prepared

Only JPEG images and TIFF images can be selected as images to be imprinted. Semitransparent images are
also compatible with imprinting because it is compatible with TIFF with transparent color information.

(1) Imprint data Select which data for imprint data you will use.
(2) Settings Make settings for the data for imprint data
Please refer to "9.6. Imprint data settings" for details.
(3) Title Set the title. Use this if you want to temporarily set characters without changing
the data for imprint data. The character string entered here is replaced when the
control character "%t" of the character string for the data for imprint data is set.
Multiple lines can be set.
(4) Composition Make settings for the type of composition for the data for imprint data.
mode For "Develop", select an appropriate composition mode while looking at the preview
display.

Automatic size Resize the composite characters and image to match the image size of
adjustment the output development results.
It is adjusted to maintain the relative size.
Select this setting when imprinting to file output.
Composite by the Composite characters and images are composed to the set size.
fixed-size Use when the size of the characters for imprinting is fixed when
printing.
Edit the data for imprint data if the position of the letters and image for
printing is not appropriate.

5.3.2.2. Unsharp mask

This feature allow you to apply the unsharp mask filter to
the developed image Unsharp mask is applied to results
after development and resizing. You can adjust in terms of
Amount (%), Radius (pixel) and Threshold (level).

In addition to the sharpness set as a development
parameter, use this when you want to add more sharpness
in accordance with your purpose and output format for the
development results.

Please use this feature according to your purpose and the
output type, apart from the sharpness specified by the
development parameter.

The "sharpening" specified by the development parameter
should be used for each image to adjust resolution. The
other hand, the "unsharp mask filter" should be used for a
certain purpose and the output type. For example, when you want to reduce an image for using on a website,
you can use the unsharp mask to make up for the sharpness of the image, which will be lost by the image
reduction. Or when you want to prepare an image for printing, you can use the unsharp mask to increase
image sharpness, avoiding blurred prints.
Please refer to '10.1.9. Proper Use of Sharp in Development Parameters and Unsharp Mask when Developing
/ Printing' for more details.
5.3.2.2.1. Amount

You can specify the "amount" when you use the "unsharp mask". The larger the value is, the stronger the
sharpness is.
5.3.2.2.2. Radius

Radius sets the width of edge of the object to be emphasized.

The larger the value is, the wider the edge is (stronger sharpness), and the smaller the value is, the narrower
the edge is (weaker sharpness).

Typically, setting the range between 0.5-1.0 is recommended.

5.3.2.2.3. Threshold

If the value is set smaller, sharpness is emphasized regardless of the clearness of the edges of objects.

If the value is set larger, sharpness is emphasized only where the edges of objects are clearer to some
degree.

You can prevent noise in an image with this parameter, typically, when it is set to '1'. Please adjust this
parameter to balance noise and sharpness.

back
prev menu next

Copyright (C) 2004-2018, Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co.,Ltd. All rights reserved.
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 /
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 SOFTWARE MANUAL
back
prev menu next

6. Useful Functions for Adjustment

6.1. Display warning

This software has warning functions to support parameter adjustment.

When you click the button on the toolbar, you can enable each warning.

In addition, if there is a check at [View (V)]-[Display warning]-[Flash warning] in the menu, warning
displays will flash on the image in the preview display.

If there is no check the warning display is always displayed.

(Soft proofing is always displayed.)

(1) Highlight warning

The portion where highlight or color is saturated blinks.

The portion where highlight is saturated blinks in black, and the portion where color is saturated blinks in
negative color.

This function is convenient for adjusting "exposure bias" and for adjusting "saturation" of color.

(2) Shadow warning

The portion where the shadows are underexposed blinks in white.

(3) Highlight/Shadow warning

This feature gives both the highlight warning and shadow warning simultaneously.
 You can customize these warning levels. Please refer to '9.3.1.4. Threshold of highlight warning' and '9.3.1.5. Threshold of shadow warning'.

(4) Out of color gamut warning

This feature gives a warning for the portion where the color is outside of the color gamut. It means that
the saturation in this portion is to high.

Please refer to '10.1.6. Color Gamut and Adjustment Outside of Color Gamut'.

(5) Soft proofing

In this display mode you can check the colors processed and changed for color conversion with the color
profile.

When printing on a printer, this considers the characteristics of the print paper and ink and performs color
management processing for reproducing colors as faithfully as possible. However, there are limitations to
the range of colors that can be faithfully reproduced and colors outside that range and on borders cannot
be correctly reproduced.

In addition, there seems to be slight changes in the range of colors that can be reproduced depending on
the applicable color profile.

Please use this to check the influence on color management processing on your monitor.

In this display mode, the display effects change depending on the corresponding print color space and
matching methods.

However, you cannot check the influence of paper color because this is a simulation of color conversion
processing by color profile.

When this warning is selected, the color management sub-control is displayed. In the color management sub-control, you can set the color
management for printing with possible settings in "Enhancing 1" in the "Print" dialog.

Please see "8.5.2. Enhancings 1" for details.

(6) Focus peaking

Focus peaking detects portions that meet the focus from adjacent pixels, and displays attached inverted
colors (negatives) to that part.

Depending on the photograph, such if it is difficult to distinguish between subject and background, or with
single colored subjects, this may not be correctly detected.

Use this function as a standard to confirm if the focus of the photograph matches what you shot.

Please see "9.3.1.6 Set Focus Peaking" concerning changes to areas being detected.

6.2. Histogram

The menu command [View (V)]-[Histogram (H)] displays the "Histogram" sub-control.

Histogram displays a brightness distribution on a picture.

You can check which part of the picture has what level of brightness. The horizontal axis shows
brightness (0-255), and the higher the value (right side), the greater the brightness.
The vertical axis shows the number of pixels that corresponds to relevant brightness level. R,G, and B are
displayed in each color on a graph, and the place where these overlap it is displayed as an additive color
mixture.

6.2.1. Display of Histogram

The arrow displayed on the gray scale at the bottom has the following meaning.

(1) Contrast center

This indicates a contrast center of tone.
 (2) RGB marker
This displays RGB value at the point where the mouse cursor is on. The value corresponds
to the brightness position on a graph.

It is very effective to check where a color of a point on a screen is distributed on a
histogram.

(3) Channel
You can display the histogram of any channel of RGB.

In addition, by clicking a graph, you can see each brightness statistic of the RGB.

Lv is the value given to brightness (0-255) shown on the horizontal axis. "R", "G" and
"B" are the statistical values for RGB in percentage (%) units.

If the histogram of the image is evenly distributed for each RGB value (Lv value), the
value for each statistical value 0-255 will be 1/256 = 0.39%.

For normal photographs, most of the area will be in the range of 0.00-2.00, but
brightness distribution may be consolidated in a photograph whose subject is almost a
single color, such as completely dark photographs and macro shots of flowers.

6.3. Navigator

The "Navigator" is a guide display for places displayed on the preview screen
for the dedicated thumbnail.

You can change the position of the display by dragging the guide on the
"Navigator" in tool modes other than Fitted display, such as Zoom tool, Loupe
tool or Palm tool.

In addition, you can expand or shrink the preview with mouse wheel operations
on the "Navigator".

The Navigator is not displayed when in thumbnail mode because this is
effective only when in the preview window is displayed.

6.4. Shortcut Keys and Function Keys

Shortcut keys and Function keys that you can use in SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 are shown below.
* These are default settings, and you can customize the keys. Please refer to '9.4. Shortcut keys settings'.
* When your OS and SILKYPIX use the same shortcut keys, SILKYPIX® may not be operated by those.
In such case, please change those of your OS or SILKYPIX®.

6.4.1. Operating Menu

6.4.1.1. File

  (Windows) (macOS)
Open file Ctrl + O command + O
Develop Ctrl + S command + S
Print Ctrl + P command + P

6.4.1.2. Edit

Undo Ctrl + Z command + Z

 Redo Ctrl + Y command + Y,
shift + command + Z
Select all images Ctrl + A command + A
Copy development parameters Ctrl + C command + C
Paste development parameters Ctrl + V command + V
Initialize development parameters Ctrl + X command + X
Rotate right Ctrl + R command + R
Rotate left Ctrl + E command + E

6.4.1.3. Operation

Exposure bias tool F2 F2

Gray balance tool F3 F3
Skin color tool F4 F4
Crop tool Ctrl + T command + T

6.4.1.4. View

Previous image F11 ---

Next image F12 ---
Switching display floating/control F9 F9
Display grid Ctrl + G command + G
Folder Ctrl + F command + F
Histogram Ctrl + H ---
Tone curve Ctrl + M command + M

6.4.1.5. Parameter

Copy development parameters Ctrl + C command + C

Paste development parameters Ctrl + V command + V
Initialize development parameters Ctrl + X command + X
Rotate right Ctrl + R command + R
Rotate left Ctrl + E command + E
Paste the latest editing development parameters Ctrl + L command + L

6.4.1.6. Development

Develop Ctrl + S command + S

Immediately batch develop selected images F5 F5

6.4.1.7. Help

Open software manual F1 F1

6.4.2. Using Context Menu

6.4.2.1. Display Magnification

Zoom in Shift + Up key shift + Up key

Zoom out Shift + Down key shift + Down key
100% Shift + Right key shift + Right key
Whole display Shift + left key shift + left key

6.4.2.2. Mark

Delete Mark F6 F6
Copy/Move mark F7 F7
Develop mark F8 F8

6.4.2.3. Development

Develop Ctrl + S command + S

6.4.2.4. Change of Image

Previous image F11 ---

Next image F12 ---
 6.4.3. Shortcut Key List

  Thumbnail mode Combination mode Preview Mode

Key (Windows) Key (macOS) Operation Single Multiple Single Multiple Single Not for
selection selection selection selection selection development
[F1] [F1] Open software manual * * * * * *
[F2] [F2] Exposure bias tool * * * * * ---
[F3] [F3] Gray balance tool * * * * * ---
[F4] [F4] Skin color tool * * * * * ---
[F5] [F5] Immediately batch * * * * * ---
develop selected
images
[F6] [F6] Delete mark * * * * * *
[F7] [F7] Copy/Move mark * * * * * *
[F8] [F8] Develop mark * * * * * *
[F9] [F9] Switching display * * * * * *
floating/control
[F11] --- Previous image * * * * * *
[F12] --- Next image * * * * * *

Ctrl+[A] command+[A] Select all images * * * * --- *

Ctrl+[C] command+[C] Copy development * * * * * ---
parameters
Ctrl+[E] command+[E] Rotate left * * * * * *
Ctrl+[F] command+[F] Folder * * * * * *
Ctrl+[G] command+[G] Display grid --- --- * * * *
Ctrl+[H] --- Histogram * * * * * *
Ctrl+[M] command+[M] Tone curve * * * * * *
Ctrl+[O] command+[O] Open file * * * * * *
Ctrl+[P] command+[P] Print * * * * * *
Ctrl+[R] command+[R] Rotate right * * * * * *
Ctrl+[S] command+[S] Develop * --- * --- * ---
Ctrl+[T] command+[T] Crop tool --- --- * * * ---
Ctrl+[V] command+[V] Paste development * * * * * ---
parameters
Ctrl+[W] command+[W] Switch display mode * * * * * *
Ctrl+[X] command+[X] Initialize development * * * * * ---
parameters
Ctrl+[Y] command+[Y], Redo * --- * --- * ---
shift+command+
[Z]
Ctrl+[Z] command+[Z] Undo * --- * --- * ---

Ctrl+[0] command+[0] Display --- --- * * * *

magnification:Whole
display
Alt+Ctrl+[0] alt+command+ Display --- --- * * * *
[0] magnification:100%
Ctrl+[+] command+[+] Display --- --- * * * *
magnification:Zoom in
Ctrl+[-] command+[-] Display --- --- * * * *
magnification:Zoom out

Shift+[Up key] shift+[Up Key] Display --- --- * * * *

magnification:Zoom in
Shift+[Down shift+[Down key] Display --- --- * * * *
key] magnification:Zoom out
Shift+[Right shift+[Right key] Display --- --- * * * *
 key] magnification:100%
Shift+[Left key] shift+[Left key] Display --- --- * * * *
magnification:Whole
display

[PageUp] [page up] Page up/left on * * * * --- ---

thumbnail window
[PageDown] [page down] Page down/right on * * * * --- ---
thumbnail window
[Home] [home] Top/Left edge on * * * * --- ---
thumbnail window
[End] [end] End/Right edge on * * * * --- ---
thumbnail window

* This is the default setting. You can change to another key at "9.4. Shortcut keys settings".

6.5. How to Use Storerooms

In the "Tastes/Parameters" sub-control, there are convenient ways to store and paste the development parameters.

6.5.1. Copy Development Parameter

A basic method of operation is described in "7.5. Copy Development Parameters to Storerooms" and "7.6. Set Development Parameters to
Multiple Images".

This function is used to apply the development parameters, which are adjusted and set for one image, to other images. This is the same
function as copying and pasting the development parameters. However, This function can store the four development parameters
simultaneously.

6.5.2. Save Development Parameter Temporarily

The development parameters are determined after having finished adjustment. But it is sometimes necessary to temporarily record the
development parameters on the way of adjustment.
Because if you have the temporary parameters, you can restart to adjust the parameters from the point where you lost the way, not from
the beginning.

6.5.3. Compare Development Parameter

The "Storerooms" can save not only the development parameters but also developed images, temporarily. When using this feature, you can
compare two developed parameters.(*1)

The two parameters are temporarily registered And then you can compare the image switching the parameter.
We recommend you to use the this function in the "Zoom tool" mode. Then you can enlarge the portions of the whole image and compare
them easily.

*1 To utilize this function maximally, you need to set "Standard" or "Maximum" in "Cache settings" on "Function settings" dialog.
Please refer to '9.3.3.1. Cache settings' for the setting. Please understand that using this function will maximize usage of memory.

back
prev menu next

Copyright (C) 2004-2018, Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co.,Ltd. All rights reserved.
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 /
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 SOFTWARE MANUAL
back
prev menu next

7. Development Parameter Operation

7.1. Copy development parameters

You can copy the development parameter of the selected image to other images by utilizing the paste buffer.

First, select image to be copied, and copy the development parameters and image properties to the paste buffer with
[Parameters (P)]-[Copy development parameters (C)] from the menu or [Ctrl] + C.

Next, paste the development parameters or image properties recorded in the paste buffer to a single or multiple selected
images.

Pasting methods are different for "Development parameters" and "Image properties". The following explains how to paste.
7.1.1. Paste development parameters

This is the method for pasting overall "Development parameters" as a batch.(*1)

By the menu command [Parameters (P)]-[Paste development parameters (P)] or the shortcut key [Ctrl]+V, you
can paste the entire development parameter from the paste buffer to the selected images.

*1 The "Crop tool", "Spotting tools", and "Partial correction tool" are treated as special parameters not
included in the whole, and are not copied. Please copy these parameters using the "Partial paste of
development parameters" function.

7.1.2. Partial paste of development parameters

Use when pasting partial development parameters and

parameters that are not development parameters (crop tool,
spotting tools, and Partial correction tool) that are recorded in
the paste buffer.

The menu command [Parameters (P)]-[Partial paste of
development parameters] displays the "Partial paste of
development parameters" dialog. Clicking [Paste] button pastes
the selected part of the parameters to the target images.

7.1.3. Partial paste of image properties

Use this when copying the editing contents of "Image
properties" to other images.

Information from an image with no edited "Image properties"
cannot be copied to other images.

The "Partial paste of image properties" function is turned off
when "Image properties" edited contents are not recorded in
the paste buffer.

First, copy development parameters and image properties into
the paste buffer from "Copy development parameters".

Next, display the "Partial paste of image properties" dialog with
[Parameters (P)]-[Partial paste of image properties] from the menu.

Edit items in "Image properties" will be displayed in the "Partial paste of image properties" dialog.

Check the items from "Image properties" for pasting and click the "Start" button.
 * Please note that if you paste "DateTime" of photograph taken, the edited contents for "DateTime" will be a
different date and time.
Please refer to "4.20.6.2. DateTime" for details.

7.1.4. Special handling of pasted development parameters

When copying development parameters through pasting development parameters or partial paste, some development
parameters are processed through a special conversion.

Furthermore, development parameters that have settings for "On" and "Off" are specially handled.
7.1.4.1. Paste Cropping Area
When pasting the "Crop tool" by the "Partial paste of development parameters" function, "Crop tool" is
appropriately converted according to the image orientation or the development parameter.

When the orientation of the image is different, "cropping area" is turned 90 degrees.
When the image is transformed by "Rotation/Shift lens effect" function, the "cropping area" is relocated to
become identical the relative position in the default valid area.

This conversion adjust only a position and an orientation, but the size of the cropping area is not changed.
The extension area settings are pasted just as it is.

When pasting the parameter which does not specify a cropping area, the "cropping area" of the target image
will be initialized.
7.1.4.2. Pasting Shift lens effect
Top-bottom and left-right shifts in the shift lens effect parameters of the "Rotation/Shift lens effect"
category are parameters that depend on the aspect of the image. Whether the image is horizontal or vertical
is one criterion.

Therefore, if the shift lens effect parameter set on a horizontal image is pasted on a vertical image, "Top-
bottom shift" and "Left-right shift" parameters will appropriately convert them.

This conversion is performed when images are rotated in 90degree units.

7.1.4.3. Pasting the Partial correction tool

When pasting the partial correction tool with the "Partial paste of development parameters" function, partial
correction areas will be changed appropriately according to the rotation angle.

When the orientation (rotation of 90 degree units) of the image is different, the area being partially corrected
is also rotated 90 degrees.

When the filter is rotated, it is turned relative to the orientation of the image being pasted.

When operations such as rotation of the image or digital shifts are added to the image being changed, it is
repositioned so that the relative position of the initial area of effect is the same.

The revision of the partially corrected area is adjusted for position and orientation, but the size of the area
and rotation information are not changed.

The partial correction tool's Filter area list is overwritten and pasted on the image being pasted.

Therefore, please be aware that if the image being pasted already has a list of Partial correction tool Filter
areas, the Filter area list and those parameters before being pasted will be lost.

7.2. Save Development Parameters

You can record and save development parameters of a selected image as a

file.

Click on in the "Tastes/Parameters" sub-control, or use [Parameters
(P)]-[Save development parameters] in the menu to begin processing.

SILKYPIX automatically records and saves the latest status of edited
development parameters, but please use this if you want to save the status of
development parameters at will.

7.3. Load Development Parameters

You can load the development parameters from the saved parameter file (.spd)
by the "Save development parameter" function, or from the developed image
file (.jpg/.tif) by SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer
Studio 8.

Click on in the "Tastes/Parameters" sub-control, or use [Parameters
(P)]-[Load development parameters (L)] in the menu to begin processing.

If you select multiple images in the "Thumbnail" mode or the "Combination"
mode, you can load the development parameter to all selected images.

* By SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 ,
the development parameter is embedded into the developed image file
(.jpg/.tif). And you can load the development parameter from this developed
image file.

For example, how to operate and use the features are noted below.

(1) You must save the developed image file (.jpg/.tif) with Exif information to embed the development parameter into the
file.
(2) Please select the target images to load.
* If you select multiple images, you can load the development parameter to all selected images.
(3) Display "Tastes/Parameters" sub-control by clicking the [Tastes/Parameters] button.
(4) Click the [Load development parameters] button on the "Tastes/Parameters" sub-control.
(5) The "Load development parameters" dialog will be displayed.
Designate the location in which JPEG / TIFF image files were saved in (1) above in the "File name" field.
(6) Change the "File type" field as needed.
(7) Select the source JPEG/TIFF file and then Click the [Open(O)] button.
(8) The development parameter will be loaded to all selected images.

7.4. Initialize Development Parameters

Return development parameters of one or multiple selected images to initial

status. If default parameters are set, default parameters will be applied.

Click on in the "Tastes/Parameters" sub-control, or use [Parameters
(P)]-[Initialize development parameters (I)] in the menu to begin processing.

7.5. Copy Development Parameters to Storerooms

In the "Tastes/Parameters" sub-control, you can save the development parameter

in the storerooms temporarily, and you can also restore the development parameter
from the storerooms.

You can utilize this feature to save the development parameter temporarily during
operating one image, or to copy the development parameter from one image to other
images.

The Storerooms has four rooms (ROOM) that you can freely utilize, and a special room (Latest) that automatically stores
the latest editing parameters.

Click the button at the left side of the storerooms to save the development
parameter of the selected image. Then a subscription time is displayed at the
storerooms and it becomes active.

Click the active storerooms to paste the development parameter to the selected
images.

This feature can be utilized for the comparison of two development parameters, too.
7.5.1. Paste the latest editing development parameters
 The latest status of edited development parameters is always stored in a room for temporary registrations, shown
as "Latest" at the bottom.

By pasting image parameters stored in this room to other images, you can continue working on other successive
images under the editing status of other images being operated on up to that point.

Editing results of one image can be applied to other images as is, if images were taken under roughly the same
photographic conditions or are successive, such as when photographed in a studio or when photographed in
successive mode. This can also efficiently adjust the development parameters of multiple photographs by starting
editing from that point, even if not kept exactly the same.

* Temporarily registered development parameters remain on until the software is ended. Use "Save development
parameters" if you want to save the development parameters because they will otherwise be cleared when the
software is closed.

7.6. Set Development Parameters to Multiple Images

You can set the development parameter stored in the storerooms to multiple
images continuously. Click the button at the right side of the storerooms
in the "Thumbnail mode" or the "Combination mode".

Then the operation mode is changed to continuously paste mode. In this mode,
you can set the development parameter to the target image by clicking on the
thumbnail, and you can repeat this action continuously.

Click the button at the right side of the storeroom once again to return to
the previous mode.

7.7. Operations for Multiple Selected Images

When multiple images are selected, the parameters of all images can be edited as a batch.

There is an image called the "Representative Image" when multiple images are selected. The image of the
"Representative Image" is displayed in preview and the selection display in the thumbnail window is brighter than other
images.

As for "Copy development parameters", "Save development parameters", "Copy development parameters to
Storerooms" and "Add taste", development parameters for the "Representative Image" are applied.
7.8. Select Taste

You can select the development parameter from the list of taste. You can improve efficiency of your work flow by
registering the taste that is used frequently.

About "Taste", please refer to '4.1.1. Taste'.

Please see "4.1.1.1. All category tastes" and "4.1.1.2. Other tastes" concerning how to select tastes.

7.9. Add taste

You can register the development parameter of the selected image as "taste". You can improve efficiency of your work
flow by registering the taste that is used frequently.
You can register in the taste section the current selected image's development parameters. The registered taste
parameters that you use often can be moved up toward to top to make your operation more efficient.

Please see "4.1.1.3. Add taste" concerning how to add tastes.

7.10. Default parameters settings

You can register the taste as the default parameter, which was registered to "All parameters" of "Taste category".

For more details, please refer to the '9.5. Default parameters settings'.

7.11. About "SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8" Development Parameters

You can import development parameters of SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8. SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 applies the
imported development parameters to an image for rendering a preview and a developed image.

SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 does not support all operations for development parameters provided in SILKYPIX®
Developer Studio Pro8. This is why you cannot adjust development parameters only available in SILKYPIX® Developer
Studio Pro8.

It depends on a category of development parameters whether you can paste them to another image or save them to a
taste.

SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 handles development parameters only available in SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 as
the following table.

Development parameters by SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro 7 or previous versions are handled the same way.

Development Category Open Load/Save Paste Partial paste Add, Add,

Parameters in file/folder development development of import, import,
SILKYPIX® (*1) parameters parameters development and apply and
Developer parameters "All apply
Studio Pro8 category "Other
tastes" tastes"
Multi-light White balance * * * * * *
source
compensation
Shading center Lens aberration * * * * * *
controller
Effect (Portrait Effects (Portrait * * * * * ---
beautification) beautification/Add
noise)
Range of Effects (Portrait * * * * * ---
effects beautification/Add
(Portrait noise)
beautification)
Amount (Add Effects (Portrait * * * * * ---
noise) beautification/Add
noise)
Size (Add Effects (Portrait * * * * * ---
noise) beautification/Add
noise)
Partial Partial correction * * --- --- --- ---
correction tool tool
L Tone curve Tone curve * * * * * *
Monochrome Monochrome * * * * * ---
controller controller
Underwater Underwater photo * * * * * ---
photo controller
controller

(*1) SILKYPIX® automatically generates a "development parameter file" for an editing image. When SILKYPIX®
Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 opens a file or a folder, an auto-generated
"development parameter file" is read automatically. Reading an auto-generated file restores the previous
editing state. For further details, please see "10.4.3.1. Development Parameter File and Collateral
Information File".

back
prev menu next

Copyright (C) 2004-2018, Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co.,Ltd. All rights reserved.
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 /
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 SOFTWARE MANUAL
back
prev menu next

8. File Operation and Printing

This software supports operations to delete, copy and move the image which is displayed in the thumbnail
mode or the combination mode.

8.1. Delete Procedures

Images can be deleted either by a method of deleting images marked for deletion or by a method of deleting selected images.

With either method, the default operation is to move images to Trash box. In other words, images are not completely deleted and can
later be returned to their original file from the Trash box. (*)

If you wish to completely delete an image, enter a command from the menu or with the shortcut key while pushing the [Shift] key.

Please see "8.3. Files to be Deleted, Copied, or Moved" for details on files for deletion.

* Files on drives that do not have Trash box, such as external HDDs and network drives, cannot be moved to Trash
box and are deleted. Please be careful.

8.1.1. Delete marked images

One method for deleting images is to first mark images to be deleted with
a mark that reserves them for deletion, and then delete the images
marked for deletion all together.

Utilize this method if you are sorting images that may be considered for
deletion.

To reserve deletions, right click in either the thumbnail display or
preview display, and select [Delete mark] from the context menu.

To delete multiple marked images for deletion together, select [Setting
for marks] from the context menu.

The "Delete mark" is the reservation mark to delete. When you put this mark, the
image will not be deleted at this moment.

After attaching the "Delete mark" to all of the images which you want
to delete, the menu command [File (F)]-[Delete marked images (E)]
throws away the marked images to the Trash box.

If you hold down the [Shift] key at the same time, files will not be
moved to Trash box, but will be completely deleted.

8.1.2. Delete selected images

After selecting all of the images which you want to delete, the menu
command [File (F)]-[Delete selected images] or [Delete] key throws
 away the selected images to the Trash box.

If you hold down the [Shift] key at the same time, files will not be
moved to Trash box, but will be completely deleted.

8.2. Copy/Move Procedures

There are methods for copying and moving marked images and for copying and moving selected images.

Please see "8.3. Files to be Deleted, Copied, or Moved" for details on files that are to be copied or moved.

8.2.1. Copy/Move marked images

One method for copying or moving images to another folder is to first

mark images with a mark that reserves them to be copied / move, and
then copy / move the images marked for copying / moving all together.

Utilize this method if you are sorting images that may be for copying /
moving.

The "Copy/Move mark" is the reservation mark to copy/move. When you put this
mark, the image will not be copied/moved at this moment.

To move the marked images, execute [File (F)]-[Move marked images

(M)] and then specify the folder into which the images are moved.

To copy the marked images, execute [File (F)]-[Copy marked images

(C)] and then specify the folder into which the images are copied.
 8.2.2. Copy/Move selected images
To copy/move the selected images, execute [File (F)]-[Copy selected
image] or [Move selected image] and specify the folder into which the
images are copied/moved.

Copying and moving selected images can be performed by dragging the selected thumbnail and dropping it into the "Folder"
sub-control.

If the folder being copied / moved is a folder within the same volume, you can move it by dragging it without any key
operations and copy it by dragging it while holding down the [Ctrl] key.

If the folder being copied / moved is to a different volume, you can drag and copy without any key operations and move it by
dragging while holding down the [Shift] key.

8.3. Files to be Deleted, Copied, or Moved

Since this software is compatible with the DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) Standard which has been adopted into the most
digital cameras, multiple files that have the same base name are handled as the identical group of images.

For example, if three files such as IMG_0001.RAW, IMG_0001.JPG, and IMG_0001.MOV exist in the same folder, these three files are
handled as a group at the time of operation.

In other words, when you delete an IMG_0001, these three files are deleted as a group. So the same thing happens at the time of
copying and moving.

However, if "Treat the same base name (file name without extension) files as a single image" under "Function settings" is OFF, only
image files (RAW data, JPEG / TIFF images) are subject to operation.

In the DCF Standard, it is prescribed that the files that have the same base name are handled as a group.

For example, the file is composed in the output media as follows by the camera which is being based on this standard.

IMG_0002.RAW ... RAW file

IMG_0002.JPG ... JPG file created with RAW file simultaneously

IMAG0002.THM ... Thumbnail file

IMAG0002.WAV ... Sound clip associated with image

SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 creates a working file for an image and handles it as a part of
the group.

This software records and saves development parameters in a file named IMAG0002.RAW.8.SPD in the sub-folder "SILKYPIX_DS."
These files created in the "SILKYPIX_DS" sub-folder are for file operations.
Temporary files can also be deleted, copied and moved. Files with ".spi" extensions may be deleted, copied or moved at the same
time. These are temporary files. Temporary files are deleted, copied or moved within the Temporary Folder. In this way, for example,
when you copy or move a file, you do not have to recreate a temporary file, but just use it after it has been moved.

If you move or copy a file using a utility other than this software, files under "SILKYPIX_DS" are not treated as a set, so please be
aware that development parameters accompanying images are not copied.

* When using the Spotting tool, files with an ".SPF" extension will be created, and when using the Partial correction tool, files with an
".SPB" extension will be created at the same time. These files will also reflect file operations.

8.4. Rename/Batch rename

The following two methods are functions for renaming file names of images for editing.

(1) Rename
You can use this function when one image is selected in the thumbnail mode or the combination mode.

(2) Batch rename

You can use this function when multiple images are selected in the thumbnail mode or the combination mode.
When you rename a file, the following rule is applied to the both cases Rename/Batch rename.

(1) Only a base name (a file name without extension) can be renamed. The extension cannot be renamed.
(2) Files that have the same base name with a different extension and exist in the same folder are renamed
simultaneously.
However, if "Treat the same base name (file name without extension) files as a single image" under "Function
settings" is OFF, only image files (RAW data, JPEG / TIFF images) are subject to operation.

8.4.1. Rename
When an image is selected in the thumbnail mode, right click to display
the context menu. Then select [Rename (M)] to display the "Rename"
dialog.

You can rename the file by inputting the base name that you want to use
in the control box.

8.4.2. Batch rename

When some images are selected in the thumbnail mode or the

combination mode, the menu [File (F)]-[Batch rename] displays the
"Batch rename" dialog.

You can also display the "Batch rename" dialog by selecting [Batch
rename] in the context menu. By inputting the base name that you want
to use in this dialog, you can rename the files that have the same base
name and exist in the same folder collectively.
(1) Setting Rename Rule
Specify basename in each 3 parts, "[Part1]", "[Part2]", and "[Part3]."
[Part1] Specifies optional word. You can use control characters. (*)
[Part2] Selects from the prepared word.
[Part3] Specifies digit number of sequential number and the first figure.

When the control character area A is used, [Base], [Focal length], [F number], [Shutter speed], [ISO speed], [Date], and
[Time] button input the corresponding control character automatically.

When the [Default] button is clicked, "Part1" is initialized. The control character can be inputted directly from your
keyboard using conventional name.

* There are the control characters for batch rename. (This is the same control character as for "Default
filename to save".)
%N Basename of the RAW data file ("Basename" means a part of filename except the
extension)
%L Focal Length
%F F Number
%T Shutter Speed
%I ISO Speed
%Y Date Time - Year (2 digit)
%y Date Time - Year (4 digit)
%M Date Time - Month
%D Date Time - Day
%h Date Time - Hour
%m Date Time - Minute
%s Date Time - Seconds
%% Method of describing '%'

(2) Processing the same file name

When the same filename exists even after being renamed, you can select either to expand the file name automatically or
display the confirm dialog every time.

(3) Specifying letter case of extension

Specify to use capital letters or small letters for an extension. You can specify either not to change the current
extension or change into capital letters or small letters.
 Batch rename Dialog

8.5. Printing

This function prints selected images on a printer.

This function has two printing formats, one is "Normal printing" that prints
one image on one sheet, the other is "Contact sheet" that prints multiple
images on one sheet.

The menu command [File (F)]-[Print (R)] displays the "Print" dialog.
8.5.1. Basic Setting

8.5.1.1. Print format

You can specify the print format. There are two different formats, one is
"Normal printing" that prints one image on one sheet, and the other is
"Contact sheet" that prints multiple images on one sheet.

If you select "Contact sheet", you can select the aspect ratio of the
frame for each image, which is 1:1, 4:3, 3:2, or 16:9.

In the print previews, printing that can be performed is the "Printable area," for the paper whose white range is
currently set.

The range of oblique lines shown bordering the paper is the "Edge" set on the printer.

As the "Edge" is the range occupied by the printer, this range cannot be printed.

In addition, when settings are changed to "Borderless" in the printer properties, that range is also included in the
"Printable area."

Under normal printing, the printing range of the image within the "Printable area" is the "Print range frame," shown in a
light orange.

In the contact sheet, the "Printing range frame" for each image is displayed in a light purple.
 Normal printing Contact sheet (4:3)

[Setting for Normal printing]

Margin

When this is checked, you can add a color to the margins of the
printable area.

The "Color Selection" window opens when you click . After
adjusting colors with the slider or color circle, the color is set
when you click the [OK] button.

Frame

When checked, you can attach a frame line to the image within the printing range frame.

The "Color Selection" window opens when you click .

After adjusting colors with the slider or color circle, when you click the [OK] button the color is determined.

Designate the size of the frame lines in mm units.

[Settings for contact sheets]

Number of Horizontal Count

When the contact sheet is selected, you can specify the number
of images to be located on one horizontal line, the range is
between 2-20 images.

Maximum height of text

The character size is automatically adjusted to match the size of
the printing area per image, but you can set an upper limit to the
size here.

Print text settings

Set texts located under the image.

Initial settings print in three rows as in the figure to the right:
"Filename"; Date and time file shot or updated ("4 digit year,"
"Month," "Day," "Hour," "Minute," "Second"), "F Number
Shutter," "Shutter Speed," and "ISO speed."

Initialize

Return to the initial conditions of printing texts set by clicking on .

8.5.1.1.1. Editing print text

Open the "Edit print text" window and set text displayed on the contact sheet.

(1) Click on and open the "Edit print text" window.

(2) After clicking on the position which arranges items to be used in the edit box at the bottom left of the
window, click the button for the item you will use.

(3) The control characters for the item selected in (1) will be displayed in the edit box.

Control characters that can be displayed are as follows.
[List of control characters]

%L Focal Length

%F F Number

%T Sutter Speed

%I ISO Speed

%l Lens information

%c Camera model

%Y Date Time - Year (2 digit)

%y Date Time - Year (4 digit)

%M Date Time - Month

%D Date Time - Day

%h Date Time - Hour

%m Date Time - Minute

%s Date Time - Seconds

%n Filename

%C Comment

%t Title
(4) In addition to settings with item buttons, you can display character strings by inputting them directly in
the edit box.

(5) Click to return to the defalt.

(6) If the image contents for the print character string at the top of the edit box are correct, click the
[OK] button.

(7) If you click the [Cancel] button, you will return to the "Print" page without the new contents
reflected.

8.5.1.2. Print range

You can specify the print range if you select "Normal printing".

Offset Please specify the offset from the top left of the sheet.
Size Please specify the offset from the top left of the sheet.
Select whole It makes a print area the whole sheet.
Centering It puts a print area in the center in the sheet.

8.5.1.3. Image layout

8.5.1.3.1. Automatic layout

You can specify how to arrange the location of each image in the print area.

(1) [Rotate to minimize margins]

If you enable this feature, the image is automatically rotated to minimize the borders.

(2) [Crop to fit to a paper without margins]

If you disable this feature, the image is placed fully within the print frame. It usually result in a border area left at
the side of the image.

If you enable this feature, the image is fully filling out the area of the print frame. The image will be trimmed
usually.
8.5.1.3.2. Arbitrary layout

Set the location of the image within the printing area.

You can change numerical values of magnification and offset and make adjustments to position with the controls, but
you can also adjust positions by sight through direct operations on the preview image.

[Operations on the preview image] You can perform operations similar to "Zoom tool".
Offset adjustments Drag and move the image.
Adjust magnification Adjust magnification with [Shift] key + dragging.

8.5.1.4. Print image

When the printing format is set to "Normal printing," you can adjust the printing range directly on the image for printing
by dragging the printing range frame anchor shown on the image for printing.

8.5.1.5. Other

Resolution SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 expands/reduces an

image according to the print resolution, which is sent to the printer. If you set larger value,
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 makes larger image
which is sent to the printer.
The larger value makes the better quality of printing but makes larger image data and
required larger memory.
Number of You can specify the number of copies here.
copies
Printer When the "Printer settings" button is clicked, the OS standard the "Print Setup" dialog
settings will be displayed.

8.5.2. Enhancings 1

8.5.2.1. Color management

There are two formats of color management for printers on SILKYPIX.

If you do not understand "Color management", select "Color management on printer side" and select "sRGB" as the
print color space.

This is the standard setting if color management is not to be performed.

Please refer to "10.4.5.5. Color management for print output" concerning color management.

8.5.2.1.1. Perform color management

This is a method that sends data converted to Print Color Space by SILKYPIX to the printer and prints it.
If you print using this format, you must not make any color corrections on your printer. Select a mode such as "No
color corrections" and be sure to not perform any color conversions on your printer.

Please refer to your printer manual concerning printer settings.

This is a method for quite easily performing color management on a PC environment in which you can choose an
appropriate "print color space."

(1) Work color space

Designate a color space for SILKYPIX to perform development processing.

Choose either sRGB or Adobe RGB.

(2) Print color space

Display a list of color spaces (= color profiles) installed on your OS. Select an appropriate color space from this
list.

The color space you should choose is determined by the combination of printer and paper you use.

However, the print color space that can be used by SILKYPIX must be RGB. Please note that color spaces other
than RGB, such as CMYK, cannot be used. (*1)

Depending on the model of the printer, there may be cases in which the printer maker offers a color profile (=
ICC profile) for the printer.

There are also cases in which the paper manufacturer offers a color profile for a paper and printer combination.

Please use a profile created with special calibration tools or the like.(*2)

The color profile must first be installed onto the OS.

If a color profile is installed on Windows (7 / 8.1 / 10), select a color profile from Explorer, right click and open
the context menu. Select "Install Profile".

*1 Generally, the color space of color profiles offered by manufacturers of inkjet printers for home
use is RGB, so you can use this without any problems.
*2 SILKYPIX uses the color management function installed in your OS to perform color
management. Therefore, SILKYPIX cannot use color profiles of a format not supported by your
OS.
Please refer to "Color profiles compatible with SILKYPIX" for details.

(3) Matching method

Original colors are not necessarily maintained if converted to a print color space determined by SILKYPIX
development results.

SILKYPIX development results are created in the sRGB or Adobe RGB color space designated by the work color
space, but there may be colors expressed in this color space that cannot be reproduced in the print color space.

Therefore, color conversion is performed in case of a different color space, but results of color conversion differ
depending on the following four matching methods.

Printing photographic images generally uses "Perception" or "Maintain relative color gamut." Choose a matching
method appropriate to the photograph's hues and your aims.
Perception Perform color conversion that stresses the visual relationships of colors
such as continuity of gradation and hues. The absolute coordination of
colors is changed, but it has a visually natural finished.
Saturation Perform color conversion that stresses saturation. Choose this if your aim
is to maintain high saturation more so than color reproduction.
Maintain relative color This performs color conversion that maintains relative color relationships
gamut that stress hues and gradation. Colors that cannot be found in the
(Default setting) designated color space are adjusted to the closest colors that can be
reproduced.
Maintain absolute color This converts colors while maintaining the color's absolute coordinates.
gamut Colors that cannot be found in the designated color space are clipped.
Choose this to express correct absolute colors.

8.5.2.1.2. Color management on printer side

Color management is performed by SILKYPIX even if this format is selected. The SILKYPIX output is converted to the
sRGB or Adobe RGB color space.

Select this mode for the following cases.

(1) When you do not fully understand "Color management"

(2) When you use the printer's "Automatic correction" function or similar
(3) When the color profile for the printer you use is not provided by the maker
(4) When SILKYPIX is not compatible because the print color space on a special printer such as that for
commercial use is something other than RGB

With this format, SILKYPIX sends an image converted to a print color space designated by sRGB or Adobe RGB to the
printer.

If you are not sure, choose "sRGB" from "Print color space."(*1)

You must make appropriate color management settings on your printer if you perform appropriate color management
with this format.

Please refer to your printer manual concerning printer settings.

*1 Generally, inkjet printers for home use are adjusted for printing sRGB images.
Be sure to make appropriate settings on your printer if the SILKYPIX print color space is set to
"Adobe RGB."
If the printer is set to "sRGB" and the SILKYPIX print color space is set to "Adobe RGB," printed
colors will be light.

8.5.3. Enhancings 2
"Enhancings 2" is ON only when "Normal printing" is selected.

8.5.3.1. Unsharp mask

This is an adjustment item in effect only under "Normal printing". Use if
you want to perform additional unsharp mask when printing (Outline
emphasis processing: A type of sharpness processing).

Please use this feature apart from the sharpness of the development
parameter if you want to make up the sharpness to measure up to the
blur of printing.
The "sharpening" of the development parameter should be adjusted for
each image to increase resolution.

On the other hand, the "Unsharp mask" set here has the same effect
on all images printed at the same time, so it will compensate lowered
resolution from ink runs that occur during the printing process.

Please refer to '10.1.9. Proper Use of Sharp in Development
Parameters and Unsharp Mask when Developing / Printing' for more
details.

There are three types of adjustment items. You can adjust in terms of amount(%), radius(pixel) and threshold(level).

Amount You can specify the "amount" to apply "unsharp mask". The larger value makes the
stronger sharpness.
Radius It sets the thickness of the edge of the outline emphasized. The larger value makes the
thicker edge, and the smaller value makes the thinner edge.
Typically, setting the range between 0.5-1.0 is recommended.
Threshold If the value is set smaller, the outlines are emphasized regardless of the clearness of the
edge. If the value is set larger, only the outlines are emphasized which has clear edge.
You can prevent the emphasis of the noise with this parameter.
Typically it is set to '1'. Please adjust this parameter to balance noise and sharpness.

8.5.3.2. Imprint data

This item is effective only for normal printing. You can imprint the date
and time the photograph was taken when printing.

In addition to the date and time the photograph was taken, you can also
include image information, optional characters and credit images on the
development results.

You can imprint the date and time the photograph was taken and image
information by selecting prepared data for imprint data.

Creating "Imprint data" is required for imprinting a credit image you
prepared.

Only JPEG and TIFF images can be selected as images to be imprinted.
Semitransparent images are also compatible with imprinting because it
is compatible with TIFF with transparent color information.

(1) Imprint data Select which data for imprint data you will use.
(2) Settings Make settings of data for imprint data.
Please refer to "9.6. Imprint data settings" for details.
(3) Composition Select which data for imprint data you will compose.
mode For printing and develop, select the appropriate composition mode while looking at
the preview display.
Automatic size Resize the composed characters and image to meet the output printed
adjustment image size.
This adjusts so that the relative size is maintained.
Normally, this setting is used.
Composite by the Compose keeping the designated size of the composed characters and
fixed-size image as is.
Use when the size of characters to be imprinted during printing is fixed.
Edit data for imprint data if the position of the characters and image to
be imprinted is not appropriate.

8.6. Print Preview of Multiple Images

If you select multiple images in the thumbnail mode or the combination mode, you will print multiple pages as one copy.

In this case, you can change preview page by clicking the buttons, which are located in both sides of the page area.

8.7. Plug-ins
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 is compatible with plug-ins.

When a separate plug-in is installed, the plug-in icon is displayed in the toolbar. They are added from [File (F)]-[Plug-ins] in the
menu.

By selecting an image from the thumbnail display and selecting a plug-in, you can process the selected image using the function with
the extension of the plug-in.

back
prev menu next

Copyright (C) 2004-2018, Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co.,Ltd. All rights reserved.
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 /
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 SOFTWARE MANUAL
back
prev menu next

9. Option and Setting

9.1. File output settings

The menu command [Settings (S)]-[File output settings (F)] displays the "File
output settings" dialog.

9.1.1. Taste

You can save the status of "File output settings" as a taste.

You can easily recall settings you often use by registering tastes.

(1) Selecting a taste

You can switch "File output settings" by choosing a registered taste from a dropdown list.

This operation can be performed by choosing a taste from the "File output settings" dropdown list, but you
can also make selections from the "Develop" dialog, or from the Batch develop dialog.

If settings need to be changed based on the usage of the developed image file, you can switch settings at
the development processing stage by registering the setting to taste without calling up the "File output
settings" dialog.

(2) Registering a taste

You can register the current status of "Development save settings" as a taste.

When you click on , the "Add setting taste" dialog will be displayed. Give an appropriate name to the
taste to be registered and click on the [OK] button.
9.1.2. Setting of File Type

In this software, you can save a TIFF file format and a JPEG file format.

Settings for recording and saving in JPEG / TIFF formats will be explained here.
JPEG is a format for compressing and saving images through irreversible compression. It is a format adopted for
general use as a recording format for photographs taken with digital cameras.

TIFF is a format for saving images without deterioration through no compression or reversible compression. Use
this if you will further process images on other software.

Make settings here for recording and saving in JPEG / TIFF. Determining which format, JPEG or TIFF, you will
record and save is set at the time of development processing.
(1) JPEG settings

Make settings when saving as a JPEG image file.

The higher the quality, the less deterioration to the image, but the
size of the data to be recorded will be larger.
 (A) Quality Typical settings are included. Select an image quality for recording that is based on
your aims.
"High quality" is equivalent to JPEG image quality recorded on digital cameras.
"Type" and "Quality" can be set at will only when "Custom" is selected.
(B) Type Culled color information and Exif information existence are the two main types when
compressing images.
(C) Quality This is a coefficient for compressing images by a method called quantization.
When 100 is indicated, there is no image degradation through quantization.

[Culled color information]

JPEG images are saved after converting RGB color information into YCC color information. RGB is
the three primary colors of light, while YCC represents brightness and two color differences.

If the two color differences are lost and only Y (= brightness) remains, you will have a monochrome
image.

With JPEG, brightness is treated as more important information than color difference. When the
image is compressed, the culled colors that are the color information lower the quantity of data.

"YCC444" is a recording format that does not cull color differences. Select "YCC444" if you want to
minimize degradation of the image quality.

"YCC422" is a recording format that culls half of the color differences in contrast to brightness.
"YCC420" is a recording format that saves only 1/4, culling 3/4 of the color differences.

When color information is culled, the expression of border colors becomes rough.

[Differences between "Exif conforming" and "With Exif information"]

Exif is an image file format standard for digital cameras.

"Exif information" refers to information defined by Exif. It contains information such as the date and
time the photograph was taken and camera settings when shot.

If the "Exif conforming" type is selected, it follows the rules set out by Exif standards and buries
"Exif information" in the JPEG image.

If the "With Exif information" type is selected, it buries "Exif information" in the JPEG image, but is a
format not based on Exif standards.

Recording in a JPEG format called YCC444 is not prescribed by Exif standards, so it is expressed
this way on this software.

* You can check degradation of image quality by setting JPEG saving settings on the preview display at
"Develop".
Please refer to "5.1.2. Settings" for details.

(2) TIFF settings

Make settings if saving as a TIFF image file.

"Type" and "Compression format" can be set at will when
"Custom" is selected.

(A) Type You can select "RGB 8bit" or "RGB 16bit."

If you will further process development results from SILKYPIX with photo retouching
software, saving to the 16bit higher gradation is advantageous.
SILKYPIX is not compatible with recording and saving to color spaces other than
RGB, such as CMYK.
(B) Compressed You can select from three formats: "Uncompressed," "LZW low compression" and
Format "LZW high compression (LZW + Prediction compression)" (*1).
"LZW low compression" and "LZW high compression" are reversible compressions, so
 there is no degradation to image quality.

*1 Please note that some software is not compatible with "LZW high compression (LZW + Prediction
compression)."

9.1.3. Default folder to save

You can specify the default folder to save the developed JPEG/TIFF
files. This is a default setting for the "Save as" dialog and you can
modify to any folder for saving every time.

This setting does not affect for the "Batch develop" dialog, because it
has another setting for itself.

9.1.4. JPEG/TIFF options

When the development result is saved in the JPEG/TIFF file, incident
information is saved together, for which option is set on the Option for
JPEG/TIFF.
This setting does not have any influences on the results of the picture.
Only the incidental information recorded in the image is influenced.

(1) Resolution
The recorded "resolution" in JPEG and TIFF is defined here. The default setting is 300dpi.

Even if you increase the dpi setting, the resolution of an outputted picture does not change at all.

The value set here is recorded in Exif information, and used as a standard to convert it into an actual size
when the image is displayed or is printed.

If a software is not compatible with the dpi information, this setting does not have any meaning.
If you do not understand this setting well, please use the default setting.

(2) Record ICC profile

You can specify whether to record the ICC profile which indicates
color space into an output JPEG/TIFF file. It is checked in the
default.

When you record the ICC profile, it is recorded using a method that conforms with the standards of either
JPEG or TIFF.

If you are using the photo retouching software which is compatible with color management, namely, a
recorded profile, it can transfer the color space information correctly.

(3) Discard SILKYPIX parameters and image information

This setting allows you not to record the information into a JPEG/TIFF file, which is the information about
taking a photograph and the development parameter of SILKYPIX®.
This setting is not checked in the default.

The photography information is recorded in the information tag of Exif, which includes all data of the
photography and the time and date. The development parameter of SILKYPIX® is stored in "Makernote" tag
of the Exif information.

Please use this setting if you do not want to disclose the information about taking the photograph and
developing with SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8.

(4) Discard thumbnail

This setting allows you not to record the thumbnail into a JPEG/TIFF file, This setting is not checked in the
default.
 (5) Discard orientation tag
This setting allows you not to record the orientation information to the "Orientation" tag of Exif. This setting
is not checked in the default.

(6) Set 'CustomRendered' as 'Custom'

This setting is specified to record "CustomRendered" tag of Exif as "Custom" or "Normal". This setting is
checked in the default.

When this setting is checked, it is recorded as 'Custom process' to the 'CustomRendered' tag. It indicates
the special processing was performed, and a next process is expected to disable or minimize any further
processing.

If this setting is disabled, it does not record a "Custom rendered" tag.

If this setting is checked, for example, the image processings automatic correction will not be performed
when requesting the print of the photograph by the DPE service.

If you expect some image processing next to a process, please remove the check from this setting.

Since SILKYPIX® assumes the output of the complete image which incorporated the intention of the user, it
expects a next process to disable or minimize any further processing in the default setting.

(7) Capitalize extension

This setting is a capitalize the extension of JPEG / TIFF image files when you save the develop.

The default setting is disable.

(8) Set date taken to file creation date

This is a setting for creating / updating the date and time as a file attribute in JPEG / TIFF image files that
were recorded and saved from development results. The default setting is disable.

As for the date and time a file was created / updated, the date and time development processing took place
is recorded, by default.

If this setting is enabled, the date and time of the photograph for the image being developed is set as the
date and time a file was created / updated.

If the date and time of the photograph for the image being developed is not recorded, the date and time the
data file for the image being developed is updated is deemed to be the date and time of the photograph.

Furthermore, if the date and time of the photograph is edited with image properties, the edited date and time
of the photograph is set.

9.1.5. Output options

These are the setting how to develop to a JPEG/TIFF file. These setting affect the developed image itself.

9.1.5.1. When an image is rotated

This setting is for the method of rotation processing. It is set to

"Rotated image is written." by default.

(1) Rotate and save images

When this setting is checked, a developed image will be rotated as same orientation as a preview
image.

(2) Rotation info is written in Exif info.

Development results are not rotated. Rotation information is recorded as Exif information. The image
itself is not rotated. Instructions for rotations are recorded as information. Please note that if this
setting and "Discard orientation tag" are enabled at the same time, rotations may not be accurately
reflected when saved.

When you use the software which is compatible with the orientation information (like this software),
the picture will be displayed which is rotated with the orientation information. In this case, you cannot
distinguish the differences whether this setting is checked or not.

You can arrange the rotation direction of the developed image by setting this to "Rotation info is
written in Exif info.", so utilize this if you want to use the same actions when doing further processing
such as with photo retouching software.
9.1.5.2. Output color space
You can specify the working color space and the output color
 space.

Regardless of the color space which has been set as a
development parameter, you can execute development with the
color space of "sRGB" or "Adobe RGB."

It is useful, for example, if you would like to print out with "Adobe
RGB" color space and also save JPEG files for web site with
"sRGB" color space, you need not change each development
parameter.

The following four are choices for "Output color space".
(1) Specify in "development settings"
You can set either sRGB or Adobe RGB as the output color space in development parameters.

Developments are processed in an output color space of either sRGB or Adobe RGB as designated in
development parameters if this setting is selected.
(2) sRGB color space
Develop with the output color space fixed at sRGB, regardless of the development parameters.
(3) AdobeRGB color space
Develop with the output color space fixed at Adobe RGB, regardless of the development parameters.
(4) Convert to designated color space
Convert and save to the color space designated in development results. Color space designations are
performed in the ICC profile.
You can choose only RGB-XYZ or RGB-Lab format ICC profiles within ICC profiles registered in the
OS. SILKYPIX ® is not compatible with the CMYK color space.

Developments are processed in an output color space of either sRGB or Adobe RGB as designated in
development parameters. Output results are converted to the designated color space.

Please note that even if the designated color spaces are the same, if the output color spaces
designated in development parameters are different, results will not be the same.

If this item is selected, be sure to enable the "Record ICC profile" item.

9.1.6. Default file name to save

When saving development results, the default name set as JPEG and
TIFF image file names is given. By default, RAW data files are set to the
same base name ("%N" control characters).

This is a default setting for the "Save as" dialog and you can modify to
any filename for saving every time.

This setting is also used for the batch develop.

You can set the control character here. Click [Base], [Focal Length], [F
Number], [Shutter speed], [ISO speed], [Date/Day], or [Time] button,
the related control character is input automatically.

If the [Default] button is clicked, it will initialize to "%N". You can also
use your keyboard to input any character directly.

[Control characters for specifying default filename]
%N ... Basename of the RAW data file ("Basename" means a part of filename except the extension)
%L ... Focal Length
%F ... F Number
%T ... Shutter Speed
%I ... ISO Speed
%Y ... Date Time - Year (2 digit)
%y ... Date Time - Year (4 digit)
%M ... Date Time - Month
%D ... Date Time - Day
%h ... Date Time - Hour
%m ... Date Time - Minute
%s ... Date Time - Seconds
%% ... Method of describing '%'

* This is the same control character as for the "Batch rename" function.
9.2. Display settings

Make settings related to the preview display and thumbnail display.

The menu command [Settings (S)]-[Display settings (D)] displays the "Display
settings" dialog.

* Please refer to "9.8.3. Select skin" concerning switching skins (= background image).

9.2.1. Color management

This setting specifies the color management for your
display/monitor.

* This setting is only available on the Windows version.

If you check "Enable display color management" on this dialog, the color management is enabled and the selected
monitor profile is applied for the displayed image.

The preview image cannot display accurate colors if it is a JPEG / TIFF image recorded in an input color space
other than sRGB and if the output color space is set to something other than sRGB when color management is
disabled.

Appropriate color conversion is performed and displayed even when the input and output color spaces are
something other than sRGB if color management is enabled.

However, even if color management is enabled, accurate colors will not be displayed if the monitor being used is
not appropriately calibrated and the monitor profile applied to the monitor is not set.

If accurate colors are not displayed, you cannot adjust colors accurately. Enable color management and make
appropriate settings.

* In the macOS version, this automatically succeeds the monitor profile set on the macOS and displays the
program. Therefore, there is no "Color management" item in the macOS version.

Please refer to "10.4.5. Color management" for details.
9.2.1.1. Monitor profile
If "color management" is enabled, you can
specify a monitor profile as follows.

Use the default monitor profile set in the OS.

Monitor profiles listed in the dropdown list are
RGB-XYZ format RGB-Lab format profiles
within the profiles registered in the OS.

If you want to use a monitor profile not found in
this list, you must first register it to the OS.

Monitor profile refers to ICC / ICM profiles for
color management in monitors.

The most desirable method is to prepare a
monitor profile especially for the monitor, upon
calibrating the monitor with special software.
Using a monitor profile prepared appropriately
with this method is the limit of feasible color
management on this monitor.

Even if you do not have special software for creating a monitor profile, a monitor profile for the monitor may
be available, depending on the monitor's manufacturer. Please check the manufacturer's home page.

Please refer to "10.4.5.4. Color management on monitor displays" for details.
 * If colors differ when compared to other software, the cause may be that one of the software's color
management has not been enabled, or the monitor profile being used is different.

9.2.2. Thumbnail window

(1) Image width

Set the width of images when displaying thumbnails in pixel units.

You can select a pixel width that has no blank spaces in the thumbnail window by clicking on the round mark
at the bottom of the slider.
(2) Sort thumbnails
You can specify the display order of the thumbnail.

Please refer to "3.3.2. Sort thumbnails" for details.

9.2.2.1. When display mode is combination mode

Both the preview window and thumbnail window are shown at the same time under combination mode.

You can set the location of these two windows and the scroll direction of thumbnails.
9.2.2.1.1. Location of thumbnail window

You can set the Thumbnail Window to be

located over, under, to the left or right
of the preview window.

9.2.2.1.2. Thumbnail scroll direction

You can set the scroll direction of
thumbnails.

When set to "Vertical direction", a
vertical scroll bar is displayed on the thumbnail window, and when set to "Horizontal direction", a
horizontal scroll bar is displayed.

In addition, the method for moving the representative image when multiple images are selected
depends on the scroll direction of thumbnails.

Please see '3.3.1.3. How to Change "Representative Image" when Multiple Images are Selected' for
details.
9.2.2.1.3. Show rating on thumbnail
You can switch between Display / Non-
Display of "Rating" on the thumbnail.

By clicking on the "Show rating on
thumbnail" check box and removing the
check mark, you can remove the rating
from each image of the thumbnail, and it
will not be displayed.

In addition, please see '3.4.3. Rating'
concerning settings for Rating.

9.2.3. Preview window

9.2.3.1. Preview rendering method

(1) Detailed rendering (Coarse preview → Development preview)

This setting first displays simple results quickly, and then switches to full development results in
stages as parts are completed. Use this under normal circumstances.

(2) Fast rendering (Coarse preview)

 This setting shows only the coarse preview, without making a full development preview, if preview
display magnification is under 100%.

Test to see if SILKYPIX's responses are slow during the process of adjusting development
parameters while looking at the preview display, such as when the PC you use has little memory or
the PC you use has a low CPU processing capability such as notebook computers.

You will need to check at a display magnification over 100% when adjusting parameters such as
sharpening and color distortion that can only be confirmed on full development previews, but you can
largely control the CPU load and memory consumed and easily adjust parameters.

9.2.3.2. When double-clicking on preview window

Select actions by double clicking on the preview display.

9.2.3.3. Grid Settings

(1) Hide "Grid settings" dialog in grid mode

When this setting is disabled, the grid settings dialog is displayed while the grid is displayed. The
default setting is disable.

You can make settings for grid position and interval on the grid settings dialog, but even if the dialog
is not displayed, changing the grid position can be made through operations on the keyboard ([Ctrl]
key + left drag), so if the display is not needed, disable it.

(2) Show grid while adjusting "Rotation/Shift lens effect"

If this setting is checked, the grid is automatically displayed in a few seconds while editing
rotation/shift lens effect parameters. This setting is valid in the default.

9.2.3.4. Partial Correction Tool Settings

(1) Brush overlay color

This is a setting for overlay color displays shown when drawing / editing the Brush in the Partial
Correction Tool. "Red" is set as the default value. In addition, you can choose "Green," "Blue,"
"Black," and "White."

9.2.3.5. Opening a folder in preview mode

Set actions when a folder is opened in preview mode status.

(1) Stay in preview mode

The mode does not change, staying in preview mode.

(2) Change to thumbnail mode

Switch to thumbnail mode at the same time you open a folder.

(3) Change to combination mode

Switch to combination mode at the same time you open a folder.

9.2.3.6. Background colors

You can select the background color when displaying a Preview.

The initial setting is set to "Gray (default)". There are a total of four colors, "White", "Black" and "18%
gray" in addition to "Gray." You can make your selection by clicking on the background color.

9.2.3.7. Blink preview frame during preview rendering

When this setting is ON, the "In progress" mark mark is displayed at the right of the status area at the
bottom of the software while developing. Also, the preview display frame flashes. The initial setting is ON.

9.2.3.8. Insert margins for "Fitted display" / "Whole display"

When this setting is on, you can set the margins around the photograph for "Fitted display" and "Whole
display". The colors of the photograph become clear when the photograph is surrounded by a margin.

Please turn the setting OFF if you want to remove the margins and display the photographer larger.

9.2.4. Others
 (1) Enable smooth scrolling
When this setting is on, you enable smooth scrolling through thumbnail displays and preview displays. This
setting is on by default.

9.3. Function settings

The menu command [Settings (S)]-[Function settings (U)] displays the "Function
settings" dialog in which you can set a method of saving the rotation for
JPEG/TIFF/DNG, a brightness level of exposure bias tool and so forth.

9.3.1. Functions

9.3.1.1. When a JPEG/TIFF/DNG image is rotated

When rotating the image of JPEG/TIFF/DNG
files, there are two ways to record the
rotation information. You can specify
whether or not to overwrite rotation
information in the original file.

(1) Save the rotation information to the parameter file (Never modify the original file)
The rotation information will be recorded in a parameter file, and the original file is not modified.

(2) Modify the orientation tag (Modify the original file)

The rotation information will be recorded into the original file which will be modified.

Since the rotation information is overwritten in the original file, other software (*) besides SILKYPIX®
Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 can recognize rotation information.

However, if no rotation information is recorded in the original file, rotation information cannot be
overwritten, and it is recorded in the parameter file (.spd).

* Software must be compatible with rotation information which is recorded in the orientation tag of Exif.

9.3.1.2. Luminance level of exp. bias tool

You can set a "luminance level" at the point

where you click with the "Exposure bias
tool". The exposure bias is adjusted to meet the luminance level as you set here. The default luminance
level is 85%.

If setting this value 85% even when not using a gray card, you can adjust an exposure bias to a certain level
easily by clicking the brightest portion such as a white paper with the "Exposure bias tool", because the
reflectance of a white paper is approximately between 80 to 90%.

A luminance level of 85% means that the luminance of the point clicked with exposure bias tool estimated
85% brightness.

There is one thing you must consider. "85% brightness" is not the "pixel value after image processing," but
the "brightness level (= amount of light energy)." The final process in image processing is adding processes
such as tone, gamma and tone curve, so the final pixel value has no comparative relationship to "Brightness
level."

When pixels are processed at a brightness level = 85%, sRGB is converted to about 93%, and when processed
at the SILKYPIX default "tone", to a pixel value of about 97.5%.

In other words, under the SILKYPIX default value set at 85%, when areas of white objects in photographs are
designated by exposure bias tool, this setting will obtain a reasonable exposure.

As an example of utilizing and applying this function, we will explain methods for adjusting exposure using an
18% gray card.

This is a method of taking a photograph at "18% gray card" and setting a reasonable exposure by setting the
brightness level of the "18% gray card" to 18% in the photograph.

Specifically, under settings of 18% for the value of "Exposure bias tool settings," the area of the "18% gray
card" shot in the photograph is designated with "Exposure bias tool".

This method is the same as determining exposure through spot photometry with an "18% gray card"
positioned in image angles using a simple light meter or the light meter in the camera.

Furthermore, when pixels with a brightness level = 18% are processed, it is converted to a pixel value of
 around 46%, even with sRGB and the SILKYPIX default setting.
9.3.1.3. Luminance level of the black level tool

The black level for a point you clicked is set

with the black level tool. Black level is set
to the brightness level you set here. The initial value is 0%.
9.3.1.4. Threshold of highlight warning

You can set a threshold value to execute

the highlight warning.
This value must be specified as a ratio to the maximum pixel value of the developed image.
9.3.1.5. Threshold of shadow warning

You can set a threshold value to execute

the shadow warning.
This value must be specified as a ratio to the maximum pixel value of the developed image.
9.3.1.6. Threshold of focus peaking

Set the threshold for performing focus

peaking.

The detectable range grows when a lower value is set.

And the detectable ranges lowers when a higher value is set.
9.3.1.7. Set automatic level correction

This designates the ratio (%) of shadow /

highlight within the histogram after
automatic level correction.
9.3.1.8. Tooltip

Set the tooltip display.

(1) Information button
Display the tooltip with the information button. When you push the information button, a manual for
the concerned portion will open.
(2) No information button
Display the tooltip without the information button.
(3) Do not display tooltip
Do not display the tooltip.
9.3.1.9. Handle only RAW images

You can select this option to operate a RAW data file only.

When this setting is not checked, RAW/JPEG/TIFF files are
displayed together.

When this setting is checked, only a RAW data file is displayed.

* The RAW data extension for EOS-1D and EOS-1Ds is "TIF," so if this setting is checked, you will not
be able to process such RAW data.
* Files in DNG format are handled as a type of RAW image.

9.3.1.10. Develop JPEG/TIFF images

You can switch settings for whether JPEG/TIFF images will be developed.

This is the same as "4.8.4. Develop JPEG/TIFF images".
9.3.1.11. Treat the same base name (file name without extension) files as a single image

This is a setting to determine whether or not to treat RAW data and JPEG / TIFF images with the same
name as a group.

When OFF, RAW data and JPEG / TIFF images with the same name will be displayed on thumbnails.

The default value is ON due to compatibility with DCF standards.
9.3.1.12. Open last accessed folder when starting
When this setting is ON, the software will close under conditions with the previous folder open, and if you
start the software without designating a file or folder by drag and drop, it will open the last folder to be open
before running. The initial value is ON.
9.3.2. Operations

(1) Continue a tool operation after using the tool

by clicking
The eyedropper tool consists of "Exposure bias tool", "Gray balance tool", "Skin color tool", "Chromatic
aberration tool", "Gray balance tool for underwater photo" and "Add point" tool for Tone curve.

When this setting is checked, a tool mode does not change even if you specify a point or area with these
tools once. And you can continue to operate with the same tool.

When this setting is not checked, these tools function as a one shot tool. And tool mode will be changed to
the previous mode after using a tool.

In addition, when you use these tools with [Shift] key, the "one shot" and the "continuous operation"
function oppositely to the setting.

(2) Delete without confirmation

You can set whether to confirm or not when you delete a file.

If this setting is not checked, you need to confirm when you delete a file.

If this setting is checked, you can delete a file without confirmation.

(3) Do not display confirmation dialog when starting batch development

Set whether or not to confirm when batch development begins.

If this setting is not checked and the "Batch development status" sub-control is not open, a confirmation
dialog will be displayed.

If this setting is checked, a confirmation dialog will not be displayed.

(4) Do not display error message during batch development

Set whether or not to display a message when a batch development error occurs.

If this setting is not checked, a message will be displayed when an error occurs.

If this setting is checked, a message will not be displayed even if an error occurs.
9.3.3. Performance

9.3.3.1. Cache settings

Set frequency for utilizing cache.

SILKYPIX records cache data to memory and temporary files during
the development process.

There are no settings for temporary files. A total maximum size of
around 10GB is created in a Temporary folder.

Restrictions Restrict utilization of cache.

You can apply this setting if you are using a
PC that does not have a lot of memory.
Standard It's a standard setting.
(default)
Maximum Maximize the use of Cache
This records the maximum amount of cache
data to memory.
You can apply this setting if the PC you use
has more than 2GB of memory and sufficient
capacity in temporary folders.

9.3.3.2. Specify temporary folder

You can specify the folder in which this software creates a virtual
storage file. Initial values are set to the OS standard temporary
folders.

Please check "Specify temporary folder" checkbox, and specify a
 folder by clicking the [Select] button.

If you can specify a folder in a physically different drive from the drive which OS is installed, performance
may improve.
When you specify a drive, you should specify the drive which has sufficient free storage space and also runs
at as high speed as possible.
* The total amount of temporary files that SILKYPIX creates may be around 10GB.

9.4. Shortcut keys settings

Many SILKYPIX functions can be assigned shortcut keys.

Functions that are thought to be frequently used have pre-assigned shortcut keys by default, but you can freely modify
and make settings for your own usage.

When you select [Settings (S)]-[Shortcut keys settings (K)] from the menu, the "Shortcut keys settings" dialog, from
which you can customize shortcut keys, will appear.

The keyboard styled GUI located at the bottom of the dialog is called the "Software keyboard". You can use it instead of
pushing your real keyboard keys.

9.4.1. GUI Operation methods

(1) Function category

Select the functions to be displayed in the list.

If you select "All functions", the number of functions is so great that it may be difficult to locate the
"Function" you want. In this case, you can reduce the number of functions displayed in the list here.

When a selected "Function" can be maintained, the status of the selection does not change, even if
the display is switched here.

(2) List
Display a list of "Function" to be displayed and the "Current shortcut key(s)" that are assigned to
those functions.

"Function" whose key assignments have been changed are displayed in red for emphasis.

"New shortcut key(s)" displays only those functions whose key assignments have been changed.

(3) Software keyboard

This is an input control that can be used instead of the real keyboard, and is also an information
control that shows the status of "keys".

Clicking on a "key" that can be set performs the same actions as pushing a "key" on the real
keyboard and that "key" is assigned to the selected "Function".

The four tabs, [Single key], [Ctrl +], [Shift +] and [Ctrl + Shift +] indicate combinations with the [Ctrl]
key and [Shift] key.

[Single key] indicates pushing only a single "key" without using either the [Ctrl] key or [Shift] key.

[Ctrl +] indicates pushing a "key" while holding down the [Ctrl] key.

(4) Initialize
Initialize SILKYPIX's default shortcut keys settings.

The contents of changes from current key settings are displayed in a list. Changes will not be made
until you click on the [OK] button.

(5) Export
Save shortcut keys settings as displayed in the current list to a file.

This includes settings changed through the "Shortcut keys settings" dialog that have not been
confirmed.

(6) Import
Import shortcut keys settings saved in a file.

The contents of changes from Current shortcut key(s) settings are displayed in a list. Changes will
not be made until you click on the [OK] button.
9.4.2. How to assign a shortcut key(s)
This explains the procedures for assigning a "Shortcut key(s)" to a "Function".

(1) Open the "Shortcut keys settings" dialog

There are three ways to open the "Shortcut keys settings" dialog. The "Shortcut keys settings"
dialog will be displayed through any of these methods, but if you designate a special "Function" and
open the "Shortcut keys settings" dialog, a dialog for the selected status of that "Function" will
open.

a) Select [Settings (S)]-[Shortcut keys settings (K)] from the menu

b) Open the "Shortcut keys settings" dialog from various items on the menu
If you want to assign a shortcut key to a "Function" found in the menu item, right click on the
menu item to display a sub-menu. Select "Shortcut keys settings" from there.

The "Shortcut keys settings" dialog will be displayed as the status of the selected "Function".

c) Open the "Shortcut keys settings" dialog from an icon on the toolbar or elsewhere
If you want to assign a shortcut key to a "Function" set to an icon, right click on the icon to
display a sub-menu. Select "Shortcut keys settings" from there.

The "Shortcut keys settings" dialog will be displayed as the status of the selected "Function".

(2) Select functions you want to assign shortcut keys

Depending on how you open the "Shortcut keys settings" dialog, the intended "Function" is already
selected, but if you open the "Shortcut keys settings" dialog using method (a) above, select a
shortcut key from the list of Function you want to assign.

(3) Assign a shortcut key to selected "Function"

With the intended function selected, you can assign the designated "Shortcut keys" to the function by
either using the software keyboard displayed at the bottom of the dialog or by pushing the key on the
real keyboard.

You can assign up to a maximum of 4 "keys" to one function.

"Shortcut keys" available for assignment are limited. Please refer to "9.4.3. Shortcut keys that can
be assigned" for details.

To delete an assigned "Shortcut key", either right click on the list item or push the [Del] key.

If multiple "Shortcut keys" are assigned, a menu will be displayed and you can designate which
"Shortcut key" to delete.

When you assign a "Shortcut key" already assigned a "Function" to another "Function", the
"Function" assigned to the "Shortcut key" to that point will be automatically deleted and the
intended "Function" will be assigned.

If "Shortcut keys" assignments are added, deleted or changed from the settings to that point, the
concerned key on the software keyboard will change colors, making it easy to see the difference with
settings before the change.

9.4.3. Shortcut keys that can be assigned

"Shortcut keys" that can be assigned "Functions" are limited. You can check the "Software keyboard"
display to see keys that are available for assignment.

"Shortcut keys" can be pushed as single "Keys" or used in a combination with the [Ctrl] key and/or [Shift]
key. Four combinations are available for one "Shortcut key" in conjunction with the [Ctrl] key and [Shift]
key.

[Ctrl] key and [Shift] key combinations are displayed in "Tabs" on the "Software keyboard".

Only the 11 [F2]-[F12] "Keys" are available for settings as single "Shortcut keys".

"Functions" are assigned to "Shortcut keys" such as [F1], [Del], [Page Up] and [End]. These are "Reserved
keys" whose settings cannot be changed.
9.4.3.1. Reserved keys
"Functions" are assigned to these "Shortcut keys". As "Reserved keys", their settings cannot be
changed.

These "Keys" are assigned standard "Functions" assigned by your OS or other software.

[F1] [PageUp] [PageDown] [Home] [End]

Ctrl+[A] Ctrl+[C] Ctrl+[V] Ctrl+[+] Ctrl+[-] Alt+Ctrl+[0]
Shift+[Up Shift+[Down Shift+[Right Shift+[Left
Arrow] Arrow] Arrow] Arrow]

Please refer to "6.4.3. Shortcut Key List" concerning assigned "Functions".

9.5. Default parameters settings

"Default parameters" is the parameters applied when there have been no

adjustments made to development parameters.

You can change "Default parameters" to any development parameters on the
"Default parameters settings" dialog.

The menu command [Settings (S)]-[Default parameters settings] displays the
"Default parameters settings" dialog.

You can register the taste as the "Default parameters", which was registered
to "All categories" of "Taste category".

"Default" is the default setting prepared by SILKYPIX®.

If you select a "Partial tastes" for the "Default parameters", it is mixed for
"Default" and the "Partial tastes"(composite development parameter) is
assigned as the Default parameters.

[Attention]
The "Default parameters" must be modified carefully. When you modify
the "Default parameters", the developed result of all images which a
development parameter isn't set to is changed all together.

If an image has set development parameters, it will not be affected, but even images that were perused or which
have yet to be processed will not maintain compatibility with past views if development parameters have not been
set.

* You can check whether a development parameter was set or not by "Tastes/Parameters" dropdown list in
"Parameters controls". If the development parameter was not set and it is same as the Default, it's taste is
displayed with green underline font.
* "Default parameters" affect only RAW images. For JPEG/TIFF images, "Default parameters" are predefined
values and cannot be changed.

9.6. Imprint data settings

Changes to "Imprint data" and editing and creating "Imprint data" are
performed through "Imprint data settings".
(1) Imprint data list
A list of registered "Imprint data" will be displayed.

There are two kinds of "Imprint data". These two are maker data prepared by our company and user data created
by you.

Maker data
This is displayed with a red background. These cannot be deleted or exported. If edited, they will be
registered separately as user data.

User data
This is displayed with a green background.

(2) Edit Edit selected data.

(3) Create new Create new data.
(4) Copy Create a copy of selected data.
(5) To upper Move display position of selected data up one.
(6) To lower Move display position of selected data down one.
(7) Hide / Show This display or closes the display of the selected data.
Maker data cannot be deleted, but this setting will cause data to no longer be displayed in the list.
(8) Delete Delete selected data.
(9) Rename This changes the name of the selected data.
(10) Export all Export all user data and save to a file.
(11) Export Export selected user data and save to a file.
(12) Import Import user data saved to a file.

9.6.1. Edit imprint data

Data items for imprint data can be edited with

the edit imprint data function.

The following items can be changed from this
screen.
 Data name
Characters for imprinting
Image for imprinting
Base size of data

Image data created by cameras comes in various sizes, and flexibility is needed to deal with it.

As for imprint data, the camera creates data that makes settings for a standard size. It automatically adjusts the
position and size to the size of the image that is output when printed and saved based on the position and size of
the standard size, and imprints the characters and images.

(1) Edited image display area

Display an image of data being edited.

(2) Name
Designate a name for the imprint data. This name is displayed when selecting imprint data.

(3) Edit control

Perform additional editing of images and characters for imprinting as a layer.

This is divided in to layer control, settings for each layer and settings for standard size.

9.6.1.1. Layer settings

Perform additional editing of images and characters for imprinting as

a layer.

(1) Add layer

You can add images and/or characters.

(2) Copy layer

Copy selected layer.

(3) Delete layer

Delete selected layer.

(4) List of layers

You can edit a layer by selecting a layer from here.

You can turn a layer on or off using the Layer On / Off button.

A layer on the list will be superimposed.
9.6.1.2. Character settings
You can edit characters to be imprinted, character position, size,
font, style, hemming and color.

You can edit a layer by selecting a layer from here. Edit others with
detailed settings.

(1) Standard point

Designate which point is standard for characters and arrangement.

You can designate top-left, top-center, top-right, bottom-left, bottom-center, or bottom-right.

The standard point is displayed as a red point in the left preview.

(2) Position from standard point

Designate how far removed horizontally and vertically from standard point the position is.

Set the position of a point on the edge of the image that was set as the standard point from the point on
the edge of the image data that was set as the standard point.

(3) Size
Set character size. The width of characters is automatically determined by characters for imprinting.

The composition mode for imprint data when printing and developing can be designated.

When composition mode automatically adjusts the size, if the standard size of imprint data is changed to
match the size of the image, the height will change at the same ratio. By doing so, whatever the size of the
image, it can imprint the height at the same ratio as the standard size.

If a fixed size is being used in the composition mode, imprinting will be performed at the set size.

(4) Setting details

Edit character font, style, hemming, color and characters for imprinting.

It is possible to use control characters in the character string. Click on [Focal length], [F number], [Shutter],
[ISO speed], [Date], [Time], [Comments] and [Title] to automatically enter control characters.

[List of control characters]
%L Focal length
%F F number
%T Shutter speed
%I ISO speed
%l Lens
 %c Model
%Y Date/time of photograph – year (2 digits)
%y Date/time of photograph – year (4 digits)
%M Date/time of photograph – month
%D Date/time of photograph – day
%h Date/time of photograph – hour
%m Date/time of photograph – minute
%s Date/time of photograph – seconds
%n Filename
%C Comment
%t Title
%% 'Description method for ‘%'
%{ Description method for ‘{'
%} Description method for ‘}'
%r Description method for Enter
%?x{string} Conditional imprinting
Designate characters such as L, F or T after ‘%' control characters in the ‘x'
following ‘?". Designate characters for display if conditions are met in "characters".
Conditional imprinting is a function that takes into consideration conditions of the
"characters" displayed as characters for imprinting, displays only if they meet set
conditions, and if they do not meet the conditions, does not display them.

For example, the focal distance is described as the control character "%L", but by
applying this ‘L' to ‘x' for conditional imprinting and setting ‘L' "%?L{character}", if
the focal distance is recorded or edited, this will become the condition for displaying
the "characters".
If defined as "%?L{The focal distance is %L}", and the focal distance has been
recorded or edited as "50mm", "The focal distance is 50mm" will be
displayed.Nothing will be displayed if there is no focal distance data.

9.6.1.3. Image settings

You can edit images for imprinting, image positions and size.

Select an image layer you want to edit from the list of layers and
edit with the displayed controls.

(1) Standard point

Designate which point is standard for images and arrangement.

You can designate top-left, top-center, top-right, bottom-left, bottom-center, or bottom-right.

The standard point is displayed as a red point in the left preview.

(2) Position from standard point

Designate how far removed horizontally and vertically from standard point the position is.

From the point on the edge of the image data that was set as the standard point assigned control,

set the position of a point on the edge of the image that was set as the standard point assigned control.

(3) Size
 Set the width and height of the image.

Size sets the size of the image when reading the image.

The composition mode for imprint data when printing and developing can be designated.

When composition mode automatically adjusts the size, if the standard size of imprint data is changed to
match the size of the image, the height will change at the same ratio. By doing so, whatever the size of the
image, it can imprint the height at the same ratio as the standard size.

If a fixed size is being used in the composition mode, imprinting will be performed at the set size.

(4) Selecting image

Read an image. You can read JPEG and TIFF images.

If it is a TIFF file with alpha information, alpha information will be turned on.

Utilize this if you want to imprint semitransparent images and the like.
9.6.1.4. Base size

You can change settings for the base size of imprint data and preview displays of the edited image display area.

(1) Base size

Set position and size to the standard size of characters and images for imprinting with imprint data.

Set this standard size.

The composition mode for imprint data when printing and developing can be designated, but if a fixed size is
being used in the composition mode, imprinting will be performed at the set size. When composition mode
automatically adjusts the size, the ratio of image and character size will remain the same as the base size
and the size will change to fit the paper and output size.

(2) Preview
The preview display will display the base size by default.

This can be displayed as a preview for whatever size is automatically adjusted if another size.

For example, you can check how much the size has been automatically adjusted for set imprint data at L
size.

9.7. Import and export settings

The following settings can be exported and saved to a file, and

saved settings can be imported and restored.

File output settings

Display settings
Function settings
Shortcut keys settings

By utilizing this function, you can backup settings or move them to other PCs.

Setting data that is exported is recorded in "SILKYPIX setting file (*.sps)".
9.7.1. Export

To export settings, select [Settings (S)]-[Export settings] from the menu. This will cause the "Export" dialog to
appear.

(1) Save file

Designate a folder and file name for the file to be recorded.

(2) Settings to be exported

Select the settings you want to save. Whether only one of four settings or all four settings, they will be
recorded and saved in a single "sps file".

Settings in the designated file are exported when you click the [Save (S)] button.
 * When you import a setting file exported from SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer
Studio 8 in a previous version, some settings are lost in a previous version.

9.7.2. Import
Import exported setting data and restore settings.

To import settings, select [Settings (S)]-[Import settings] from the menu. This will cause the "Import " dialog to
appear.

When a setting file is selected for import from here, checks will be placed by items that can be imported. Make
selections by putting a check on the items you want to import and click on the [Open (O)] button. Settings from
selected items will be restored.

9.8. Options

9.8.1. Delete access history

This function deletes an access history to
folders.
9.8.2. Initialize window positions and display states

This function initializes the location of all

controls to the default.
9.8.3. Select skin

This function allows you to change the

background skin of this software. It
displays the "Select skin" dialog, and you
can select a skin on the dialog.

This new skin is only visible after
restarting SILKYPIX® Developer Studio
Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8. To
display with the new skin, please close this software once and re-execute it.

9.8.3.1. Large-sized skin

Some of the available skins have "Large-sized skin" after their name. These skins are displayed about 1.4 times
the size of normal skins.

If you use a monitor with a high resolution and the software and feel that buttons or sliders are small, this will
improve visibility and make mouse operations easier.
9.8.3.2. Skins for high-resolution monitors

Some selectable skins that have "(big size)" after the name, also have "For high-resolution monitors."

If you feel that the buttons or sliders are small for the high resolution monitor you use, please use these settings.

9.9. Troubleshooting settings

You can set following settings according to the instruction from our support when troubles occur in your system
environment.

Note that when you change settings by your own judgment, there is a possibility that a program does not run normally, or
the performance drops significantly.

9.9.1. Initialize user configuration files

Initialize SILKYPIX user configuration files by selecting [Help (H)]-[Troubleshooting]-[Initialize user configuration
files] from the menu.

When you perform this process, you return to the original conditions for all settings such as function settings,
display settings, file output settings and setting for trouble shooting, as well as folder history, window locations, etc.

After performing this operation, the program will shut down, so please restart it. It will start with settings in their
initialized conditions.
9.9.2. Product key registration test
Test whether or not you can use on-line registration for your product key from your PC.

When you select [Help (H)]-[Troubleshooting]-[Product key registration test] from the menu, the "Product key
registration test" dialog will be displayed.

Click on the [TEST] button to begin the test.

If "You can register the product key in this environment." is displayed, you can perform online registration of your
product key from your PC under current conditions.

If "You cannot register the product key in this environment." is displayed, you cannot perform online registration of
your product key from your PC under current conditions.

If it is determined that you cannot perform online registration of your product key, enter your "Serial number" and
"Product key" in the "Product key registration" dialog and register offline by clicking on the "Offline registration"
button.

Please see "1.2.2.2. Offline Registration of Product Key" for details on offline registration.

9.9.3. Troubleshooting settings

9.9.3.1. Prohibit parallel processing during developing

In order to achieve smooth operation

even during complicated processing,
SILKYPIX® has adopted multithread
processing and multiprocessing in a
positive way and achieved high
performance by operating
microprocessors with high efficiency.

As the result, there is a possibility that
SILKYPIX® decreases performance of
the other software which are running
simultaneously because the
microprocessors are handling heavy
loads during development processing.

In addition, because the
microprocessors are handling heavy
loads, hardware operational failure has
been reported. For example, a high
temperature warning because of
increased temperature of the
processors, unstable operation,
rebooting a PC and so forth.

In order to avoid these trouble, this
setting controls microprocessor activity
ratio and limits temperature rise.

Furthermore, if you want to specify
more enhanced setting for limiting
temperature rise, refer to '9.9.3.2.
Develop slowly'.
9.9.3.2. Develop slowly

This setting aims for verifying trouble of

CPU thermal runaway caused by
temperature rise.

When this setting is checked, all
development processes such as creating preview and thumbnail, develop, batch develop and so forth are
executed slowly.

By executing development process slowly and reducing the amount of load placed on CPU, heat generation
of CPU can be controlled.

If the thermal runaway occurs while executing development process and changing development parameters,
you should check this setting.

If the thermal runaway does not occur when you check this setting, there may be a problem about the
countermeasure of heating in your PC environment.

If you continue to use a PC in this condition, the thermal runaway may give some damage to your PC, for
example, break the data recorded in a hard disk.

This "To develop slowly" aims for only discovering trouble. Even though a PC runs with stability in this
mode, it is dangerous to use it continuously in this condition.

In case of thermal runaway, there is a high possibility that breakage of data recorded in a hard disk will
occur. This is quite different from a case that program runs abnormally and completes.

At the worst, the OS itself will not start up, and all data will be lost. We strongly recommend you not to use
your PC continuously in this "To develop slowly" enabled.

[If you believe SILKYPIX is not properly operating due to thermal runaway]
When this damage occurs, you need to stop using this software and execute the following measures.

(1) Is there any obstacle around a cooling fan in a PC?

You need to check whether dust clogs a fan or a fan is covered with dust. If it is too dirty, you
should clean it according to a manual of your PC.
(2) Is PC installed at an appropriate place?
You need to check whether a wall blocks ventilation of fan or thermal radiation because a wall
is too close to a PC. You should avoid locating a PC where heat stays. Rather you should
install it where ventilation is good.

If a room temperature is high, you should be careful for heat radiation from a PC. You may
install it near to an air conditioner.
(3) Please consult a manufacturer.
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 runs a CPU with high
efficiency. Because of this, we say that a temperature of CPU gets higher than a case of
running other software.

However, if a PC does not stand the heat, a problem does exist in a PC.

If thermal runaway occurs even in an appropriate locating condition, there is a possibility that
PC's countermeasure to heat is not perfect.

You should consult a manufacturer about this thermal runaway.

You may be suggested to initialize BIOS or update it. You need to follow directions given from
a manufacturer to take measures.
(4) In case of a custom-built PC, please enhance countermeasure for cooling.
Is grease between CPU and heat sink sufficient? Is capacity of fan enough? Is ventilation in a
PC ensured? Please enhance a heat radiation capacity. It is quite effective to open a PC and
to blow air directly from a fan into it.
9.9.3.3. Delete manufacturer name from Exif information

This setting aims for avoiding the trouble which the Exif information is displayed incorrectly by some other
software like an Exif viewer tool.
9.9.3.4. Restrict simultaneous file access
Restrict simultaneous access to files on multiple processors. Normally, using multiple processors allows
quicker processing, but there are cases, depending on the machine and environment you use, when
processing is concentrated on file access, causing it to slow down. In such a case, use this setting.

back
prev menu next

Copyright (C) 2004-2018, Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co.,Ltd. All rights reserved.
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 /
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 SOFTWARE MANUAL
back
prev menu next

10. How to Handle SILKYPIX® Perfectly

10.1. Techniques

10.1.1. Speed up Refreshing of Preview

In order to speed up the preview display, this software first displays the outline preview, while executing the
development preview processing in the background. The development preview is performed for each part of the
image, which replaces the corresponding part of the coarse preview one by one.

However, when you want to adjust development parameters based on the developed image, you must wait until the
development preview is completed.

We will describe about techniques for reducing the time that is required for completing the "Fomal development
preview".

(1) Displaying required portion

Display only a required portion of a scene by reducing a window. then the developing time becomes shorter.

Since this software is designed to develop and update an image for each part of the image one by one,
reduction of a window decreases the time for developing.

(2) Increasing display magnification

Increasing the display magnification to display the required portion of an image. This has the same effect as
the case (1).

(3) Set the Color distortion to 0.

Color distortion in this software reduces not only high-frequency color noise but also low-frequency color
noise. This function incurs high CPU usage.

Therefore, set the parameter of color distortion to 0 when adjusting other parameters. After that, use the
color distortion, so that you can reduce the time for completing the development preview.

(4) The "Demosaicing sharpness" setting in the "Development settings" sub-control are lowered.
Demosaicing sharpness settings can be adjusted continually by the development engine this software uses. In
most cases, setting to raise the Demosaicing sharpness settings brings good results, but processing is
slowed.

For this reason, as well as the case of the color distortion, set the slider to the "min" side when adjusting
other parameters. Then time reduction is achieved.

Please also refer to "10.1.4. Relationship between Demosaicing Sharpness and Picture Quality".
Also related to this, you can set it so that full development previews are not shown in minimized display and to
control the CPU load and memory consumed. Please see "9.2.3. Preview window".
10.1.2. Utilizing Difference between Exposure Biases of Camera and SILKYPIX®

The exposure bias on cameras slows down shutter speed, opens the aperture and in some cases reduces light with
ND filters, thereby changing the amount of light falling on the image sensor.

On the other hand, exposure bias when developing corrects the exposure recorded in RAW data and develops the
photograph.

For example, consider performing exposure bias of +1.0EV.

By performing exposure bias of +1.0EV on a camera, the amount of light recorded on the image sensor is doubled.

Performing exposure bias of +1.0EV at the time of development, development processing is performed with the
amount of light recorded in RAW data doubled.

As a result, both are the same, but they each have their own advantages and disadvantages.

A drawback of increasing exposure bias when developing is that noise is doubled. Compared to exposure bias on
the camera, you may result in a photograph with a bit more noise.

However, there are huge merits to exposure bias when developing. One is that it gives you the ability to control
over exposed highlighted portions.

When performing exposure bias on a camera, if the exposure bias is too large, it may not record over exposed
highlighted portions. There is no information for portions that go over the image sensors dynamic limit, even in RAW
 data, and there is nothing to retrieve when developing, even when developing with lowered sensitivity. (*1)

Also, the appropriate amount of exposure bias must be determined and settings on the camera be changed when
performing exposure bias on the camera. You can reduce the time and labor when shooting and concentrate more
on taking your photograph by performing exposure bias at the time of raw development.

Furthermore, exposure bias on the camera often influences the shutter speed, and you must take care concerning
camera shake or the subject moving.

Increasing sensitivity during raw development normally lessens noise if at around +1.0EV. This is considered an
effective photographic method for digital photography.

Also when it is difficult to determine an exact exposure under shooting conditions such as backlight or so on, take
a picture with a little underexposed value using the exposure bias.
For more details, please see '10.2.1. Photography without Backlight Compensation'.

There is a more advanced technique. When it is so dark that you have to use a slower shutter value or a faster
lens, one smart way is to try to use a low shutter speed or aperture value to result in an underexposed image. For
more details, please see '10.1.3 Utilizing Difference between ISO Speed Adjustment of Camera and Exposure Bias
of SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8'.

*1 Depending on the type of camera, developing with a lowered sensitivity of around –0.5 to 1.0EV is possible,
and you may be able to save skipped portions, but many cameras cannot save whiteouts with lowered
sensitivity at development.

10.1.3. Utilizing Difference between ISO Speed Adjustment of Camera and Exposure Bias of SILKYPIX®
The ISO film speed adjustment on the camera usually changes it at an analog level before digitizing the voltage
output from an image sensor.

For example, with the ISO film speed doubled, information is doubled and sampled with an amplifier from the image
sensor in the camera.

Light quantity recorded by an image sensor does not change just because the ISO film speed is adjusted. Doubling
the ISO film speed halves the light quantity recorded by the image sensor.

There are hardly any differences from performing developments with an increased sensitivity of +1.0.

For example, compare photographing with a camera set at ISO 400 and photographing set at ISO 200 and exposure
bias of –1.0EV (one step under). Other photographic conditions such as shutter speed and diaphragm stop are the
same.

The amount of light recorded by the image sensor for these two photographic methods is the same. The RAW data
photographed at ISO 400 is converted and recorded at double the amount of light.

When developing the RAW data photographed at ISO 200 into a photograph, sensitivity must be raised to +1.0EV.
However, photographs developed with increased sensitivity are almost the same as photographs taken with ISO
400.

When comparing these two photographs, the amount of light recorded by the image sensor is the same and both
are processed in terms of double the amount of light in the end, and the only difference is whether it was
performed in the camera or at the time of development.(*1)

When set and photographed at ISO 400, if highlights are ignored, it is impossible to restore them. However, the
possibility of being able to save them by adjusting sensitivity rises if you set and photographed with ISO 200 at an
exposure bias of –1.0EV (one step under).

As one application, it becomes possible to confidently take photographs of a dark subject that you have to take by
raising the ISO film speed on the camera and working with the shutter speed and diaphragm stop to underexpose
on purpose.

Please also see "10.2.3. Turning Exposure Compensation Dial into ISO Speed Dial".

*1 The processing of photographs at ISO 400 and doubled in the camera can perform processing to remove noise
in the camera at an analog level, which is slightly advantageous for the image quality.
However, the difference is not that great, such that the technique of underexposed photography has merits,
such as when there is a possibility that highlights may be skipped.

10.1.4. Relationship between Demosaicing Sharpness and Picture Quality

This software allows you to adjust the resolving power parameter of demosaic process. This parameter is called
"Demosaicing sharpness" in SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8.

If you increase the "Demosaicing sharpness", a resolution gets higher and a developing time gets longer.

If you decrease the "Demosaicing sharpness", a resolution gets lower, however, a developing time gets shorter.

Therefore, in order to obtain good quality, we recommend you to set the "Demosaicing sharpness" to a certain
large value (about 80).
It is almost correct to think that if you set the "Demosaicing sharpness" higher and higher, a better and better
quality picture can be created. But if a RAW data contains a lot of noise, there is a possibility of resulting in
highlighted noise.

In this case, you should set the "Demosaicing sharpness" lower.

When you take a photo of a fine patterned object, spurious resolution may be occurred. Lower demosaicing
 sharpness can reduce such spurious resolution.

However, lower demosaicing sharpness causes color noises on a fine patterned object. In such a case, you also
adjust "color distortion" on "Noise reduction" sub-control to improve a photo quality.

10.1.5. Adjustment for Over-saturation

When taking the high saturated object, the color has sometimes become white in the highlight portion.

This phenomenon is called "Over-saturation" in this manual.

This section describes how to adjust for over-saturation.

(1) Reason for Over-saturation

In the first place, why does the over-saturation occur?

When the surface of the object is smooth, you observe the light reflection directly and sometimes it looks
like white. This is not the "over-saturation".

The "over-saturation" is the phenomenon that the object has been recorded as white by the camera, which
looks like the saturated red with human eyes.

It is caused by having exceeded the light which can be recorded when taking photograph or when developing
image.

At the digital image, there is a limit in the lightness which can be recorded. This limit becomes lower as a
color becomes more saturated.

It is described by using R, G, and B in this section. The monitor of the PC makes the color by mixing R,G,
and B pixels which are adjusted brightness.

On the assumption that a red pixel emits the darkest light in R=0, and it emits the brightest light in R=255.
Regarding G and B, assumption is the same.

The brightness which the human being feels is the sum of the brightness of R, G, and B. (*1)

For example, in a case of white color, R, G, and B have the same emitted brightness. In other words, when
R=100, G=100, and B=100, the color looks white.

This means white color (achromatic color) has a representation range from R=0, G=0, B=0 to R=255, G=255,
B=255.
As the converted brightness, the representation range is from 0 to 765(=255+255+255).

Next, let's consider light red color (pink). In a case of light red, R has a larger value than that of G and B. For
example, R=200, G=100, and B=100.
At this time, the values of G and B are a half of the R value. When this ratio is maintained, the color looks
the same.

For example, in a case of darkened light red, the values are R=100, G=50 and B=50. When it makes brighter,
the values become R=200, G=100, and B=100.
When it makes more brighter, for example, in a case of the most brightest light red, the values become
R=254, G=127, and B=127. (*2)

From this condition, if adjusting the color much more brighter, what will happen? On paper, the values should
become R=300, G=150, and B=150.

However, since R=300 cannot be represented in reality, then the actual value of brightness becomes R=255.
As the result, the three values are R=255, G=150 and B=150 in this case.

What about setting the color much more brighter? The values R=510, G=255 and B=255 become R=255,
G=255 and B=255. This is pure white color!

Roughly speaking, the "over-saturation" occurs in this way.
In case of this light red color, the limit values that the hue does not change are R=254, G=127 and B=127.
And the brightness that human eyes can sense is 254+127+127=508.

This means that although the brightness of white can be represented up to 765, the brightness of light red
can be represented only up to 508.

How about a case of deeper red color? For example, let's consider a case of deeper red with values as
R=200, G=50 and B=50.
The values of the most brightest deeper red that can be represented are R=252, G=63 and B=63. This means
that its maximum brightness is 252+63+63=378.

Therefore, when a color is deeper and deeper, brighter representation cannot be possible.

So when an exposure bias is adjusted to a light color subject, the "over-saturation" occurs at a deep color
subject.
This is the reason for the "over-saturation" occurrence.

(2) Adjustment for Over-saturation 1 (Exposure bias)

You can adjust "exposure bias" parameter against "over-saturation".
Since the over-saturation is caused by adjusting the exposure bias to a brighter color, you can ease the
over-saturation by adjusting a exposure bias to the certain level.

However, in many cases, a light color subject looks too dark.

(3) Adjustment for Over-saturation 2 (Saturation adjustment)

 You can adjust "saturation" parameter on the "Color" sub-control against "over-saturation".
When "saturation" is lower, a brighter representation is possible. So by lowering the "saturation", you can
ease the over-saturation.

However, in many cases, when lowering "saturation" as easing over-saturation for high saturated color, a
very light color image is created because saturation at the other portions becomes too low.

(4) Adjustment for Over-saturation 3 (Highlight controller)

This software has a function to control the method for clipping the color of the region where brightness
exceeds any representation limit of R, G, and B in a range.

For example, let's consider the former example of the brightness with values of R=300, G=150, and B=150.

This software internally processes the color in wider range color space than the actual representable range.
For this reason, this software can keep the real color values such as R=300, G=150 and B=150 internally.

However, when the values are outputted, they are clipped in the range of 255 for each R, G, and B.

If only the R is clipped to 255 simply, hue, saturation and brightness are out of balance. Its original
brightness is 300+150+150=600.

When the "highlight controller" is set to give brightness highest priority, the color clipping is executed with
priority of brightness 600 instead of color.
For example, the values are R=255, G=173 and B=172 (*3), and brightness can be maintained as 600.

However, this increases "over-saturation" level.

When the "highlight controller" is set to give brightness lowest priority (give saturation highest priority), the
color clipping is executed with priority of color in this time.

Here we omit the explanation with numerical values in case of priority of color. But please remember that
the default value of "Chroma-Luminance" parameter is 25, and you can ease "over-saturation" by setting
this value lower.
Here we omit the explanation with numerical values in case of priority of color.
Since in case of priority of color, the default brightness is 64, you can remember that modification of over-
saturation is possible by setting the value from 64 to 0.

In addition, in this case, you can also adjust the priority between saturation and hue. For details, please refer
to '4.9. Highlight controller'.

(5) Adjustment for Over-saturation 4 (Fine color controller)

By using the "highlight controller", you can ease an over-saturation region, however, this does not have
sufficient effect to save a high-saturated color completely.

Rather, as remaining a highlighted portion, this function is very effective when you adjust its representation.

The "fine color controller" function can provide more effective method.

The method is to lower both saturation and lightness of only the color with which the over-saturation has
occurred.

By adjusting only the color with which the over-saturation has occurred, it is possible to execute the
adjustment of over-saturation without giving any effect to the white portion that has low saturation. Please
refer to '4.10. Fine Color Controller' for the use of the function.

(6) Adjustment for Over-saturation 5 (Dynamic range)

This function allows you to ease over-saturation by compressing gradation in the area of the highlights.

Please refer to '4.9.4. Dynamic range' for more details.

*1 In reality, sensitivity of human eye differs according to a hue. Although the brightness which the human being
feels is not a sum of the brightness of R, G, and B actually, we simplified the matter for the sake of
explanation.
*2 Since the non-linear characteristics which is called gamma is applied to the actual RGB data (for example,
sRGB data), the reality is not so simple as such. The explanation is on the assumption that the RGB value is
a linear value and the values of R, G, and B are in proportion to the light quantity that is emitted from a
monitor.
*3 Actual processing of this software is more complicated. It is because that the actual lightness is not as
R+G+B (*1), and the gamma characteristics is applied (*2). In order to help users understand the functional
operations, we just simplified the actual matters.

10.1.6. Color Gamut and Adjustment Outside of Color Gamut

There are some cases that exceed the presentable color range, when taking photograph of the high saturation color
or when increasing "saturation" during development process.

The 'Highlight/Shadow/Outside of the Color Gamut Warnings' function gives a warning regarding the portion that
exceeds the presentable color gamut.

This software can handle two color spaces such as sRGB and Adobe RGB. In theses color spaces, all of existing
colors can not be expressed.

On the other hand, when taking a photograph with a RAW file, a camera can capture the colors accurately that are
in the color gamut which is much wider than that of the case that these color spaces can handle.
 On this account, in a case of a flower etc. with high saturation, colors may exceed the color gamut (presentable
color range) that these color spaces can handle.

This software can handle the color gamut completely which a camera can capture and also this software can clip
the color that exceeds the range at the final stage of the development processing.

The warning function for out of color gamut gives a warning to a portion with a clipped color.
Since the colors that are out of the color gamut are clipped and compressed into the color gamut of sRGB and
Adobe RGB, details are compressed as if they are like being crashed.

Even as the over-saturation does not occur, if you feel that details of the highly saturated portion are lost, you
need to check whether colors are out of the color gamut or not.

Even if the colors that are out of the color gamut become darkened by adjusting the "exposure bias", a warning is
still given, not like the case of the over-saturation.
Describing with the values of R, G, and B, it is a highly saturated portion as if one or even two among R, G, and B
takes a negative value.

For example, although a color with values as R=255, G=0 and B=0 is the most saturated red that can be
represented in this RGB color space, a camera has captured red color with much higher saturation. When it is
developed, it may have values like R=255, G=-20, and B=-20. Of course, such a color cannot be outputted, and it is
clipped. So details with high saturation are looked like being crashed.

For example, even if an actual flower has subtle details of saturation between R=255, G=-20, B=-20 and R=255,
G=-30, B=-30, its development result has exactly the same colors without gradation.

However, since this software keeps the colors that are out of the color gamut, the details can be restored by
lowering their saturation.
You can try to lower the saturation until the warning disappears by using "saturation" parameter on the "Color"
sub-control or by using thefine color controller.

The colors in such a range are difficult for printing devices such as a printer and so forth. Especially, bright
magenta and blue-red colors between red and blue are the most difficult colors for printing devices.

In addition, a monitor for a PC can display bright colors with high saturation, however, these colors are difficult for
a printer and other printing devices.

A monitor is a light-emitting device but printed materials display colors by absorbing light.
For this reason, when presenting colors with high saturation, the colors are darkened.

As a result of printing, if the colors are pressed as if they are like being crashed, lowering lightness might be
effective.

10.1.7. Sharpening Image

When the photograph is not sharp and you feel that it is lacking vigor and sleepy, please adjust a development
parameter according to the following.

(1) Exposure Bias

When you develop the RAW data, you can reproduce the scene by taking out only a necessary part from the
wide lightness information captured by a camera at the time of development.

If you take a photograph by JPEG, you have to set the exposure bias to decide brightness of a photograph
at the time of taking a photograph. However, if you take a photograph by RAW, you can adjust brightness at
the time of development after taking a photograph.

Like the "Crop tool" function that cuts out unnecessary portion, the adjusting exposure bias means
cropping the range of lightness that you want to represent.

Please adjust the portion where you want to express to moderate brightness by adjusting "exposure bias".
We hope that your picture can restore its lightness and vigor.

(2) Tone Adjustment

By adjusting the "tone", you can determine how to compress or expand the lightness that a camera
captured.

First, please set "contrast" parameter larger. This is the operation which adjusts white portion more white
and black portion more black, and narrows the range in which you want to represent and expands to the
device presentable range. A picture might have vigor by this operation.

Now, where is a boundary for determining contrast emphasis? That is contrast center.
your picture is bright, you can move the contrast center up and make contrast around the bright portion. If
it is dark, you can move the contrast center down and make contrast around the dark portion.

How is it? Hopefully the problem is improved.

If flare appears on a picture or if you receive impression that it is dusty, you can try to increase a black
level.

Do you feel that a picture is tightened?
If you feel that a picture seems to be a sleepy because of backlight, a distant view and so forth, you can
tighten black color by increasing the black level.

(3) Sharpness Adjustment

If a picture has been adjusted up to this level, perhaps the picture is cool now.

As the rest, focus is almost ...

From now on, let's adjust sharpness of outline by enlarging a focused area in a picture (more than 100%
display magnification).

First of all, let's maximize the sharpening.

The outline of a picture becomes clear, and you might have well-shaped impression.

However, if you look at it very carefully, you might discover that a noise was also increased simultaneously
and the outline which was originally very clear seemed to be unnatural because it was too much emphasized.

In order to delete this unnatural impression, you should reduce the sharpness. Now adjustment is over.
10.1.8. How to Take Advantage of Dynamic Range
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 allows you to control "dynamic range"
recorded in RAW data.

Almost all DSLR cameras have some top margin they can record a little lighter energy of ray than white point
because there are the different sensitivity between R, G, and B sensor.

Dynamic range controller makes the best use of such sensor information, and provides you the function to
compress highlight.

In highlight area, this function makes it possible to be smooth and emphasis gradation until white point and to keep
saturation like as a film.

However, you cannot restore the gradation if you take a photograph with overexposure.

It is easy to overexposure if there is high contrast or much brightness delta in the scene.

Then if you take a photograph with a little underexposure, you can record whiter energy than pure white point in
the RAW data. And you can resume brightness with "Exposure bias" function and also use this "dynamic range"
function.

Please try to take a photograph with a little underexposure, and make wealthy highlight expression with this
function.

Please refer to "4.9.4.1. Method for Effectively Utilizing Dynamic Range" for details.
10.1.9. Proper Use of Sharp in Development Parameters and Unsharp Mask when Developing / Printing
This software includes "Sharp" that can be set as a function to emphasize borders and increase definition, as a
development parameter when developing independently for one image, as well as "Unsharp mask" when developing
or printing.

The other is "unsharp mask" function for saving developed scenes or printing scenes, which is common parameter
for all images same as jpeg quality or print resolution parameters.

"Sharpening" parameter is for each image, and you can adjust the balance of resolution and noise with 100% or
more zoom in preview.

On the other hand, unsharp mask is processed uniformly when developing or printing, so depending on the purpose
of the photograph, use this for applying additional outline emphasis.

As an example, settings for development processing of a photograph with three uses will be explained.

The first is to develop with the original image resolution for the purpose of saving a general purpose JPEG image
file. The second is to reduce the size and develop for uploading to the WEB or viewing on a PC. The third is for
printing on a printer for viewing.

For the first purpose, namely, saving a general purpose JPEG image file with the original image resolution,
sharpening as a development parameter setting would be suitable. This usage is basic because this usage for
recording and saving with the original image resolution in tact is the most basic development processing method.

The second use reduces and saves the photograph. Develop with a setting that applies unsharp mask in order to
compensate the feeling of lowered resolution lost when reducing the size.

The third use is development for printing. Resolution is lost from blurs and such from ink on the paper during the
printing process. Therefore, set unsharp mask to compensate for a lack of resolution from the printing process.

In this way, sharpness is in the end adjusted as a development parameter in the original resolution, while unsharp
mask is designated as an added outline emphasis depending on its usage. It will be unnecessary to readjust
development parameters according to purpose.

Appropriate unsharp mask set values will differ depending on the reduction rate and the device for viewing the
reduced development results.

As the reduction rate increases, the need to strengthen unsharp mask emerges.

Also, the appropriate quantity changes depending on the size of the display on the device for viewing, and as the
display size grows smaller or as the viewing distance gets farther away, the need to strengthen unsharp mask
emerges.

It would be convenient to remember that the reduction size and amount of unsharp mask is determined by each
device being used.

For example, when viewing on a 50-inch plasma TV, develop a dosage of 70% at an unsharp mask radius of 0.5 for
the size contained in the display's dot size (for example, 1366 x 768).

For a slide show on a PC, develop a dosage of 100% at an unsharp mask radius of 0.6 for a size contained within
1024 x 768.

For viewing on a cell phone, develop a dosage of 150% at an unsharp mask radius of 0.6 for a size contained within
 320 x 240.

For transferring to a music player, develop a dosage of 200% at an unsharp mask radius of 0.7 for a size contained
within 176 x 132.

These are examples of some conditions.

Once appropriate settings are made, you will be able to perform later development processing at almost the same
set parameters.

Even when printing, appropriate unsharp mask settings will differ depending on the size of the printing, printer
resolution and the paper being used.

You should remember that appropriate unsharp mask settings are driven by each printing condition.

10.2. Photographic Techniques

10.2.1. Photography without Backlight Compensation

When taking a photograph against the sun or the light source without exposure compensation, you have to usually
adjust by increasing a "exposure bias" since a subject is taken in underexposure.

Of course, it is better way that you adjust exposure compensation at the time of taking a photograph. However, it
takes a time to adjust exposure compensation even if the shutter chance appears suddenly.

If you are taking a photograph in RAW format, give the first priority to the photo opportunity. Because this
opportunity will never come again.

In a case of the photograph recorded in RAW format, the "exposure bias" can be post-processed after taking a
photograph.

Exposure bias on RAW can be done after taking pictures as well.
When using the camera which has a large-sized sensor with high S/N value and wide dynamic range, you can take a
photograph without exposure compensation even if it is a backlight condition.

There is a way to take many photographs by giving the first priority to the photo opportunity. RAW makes such a
new photography possible, which was not available in the past.

Because the sensor size of the digital single-lens reflex camera is big and there are many capable cameras, try
taking photographs at the minimum ISO film speed and do not worry about backlighting.

And enjoy the exposure bias on SILKYPIX ®.
10.2.2. Should RAW be Photographed in Underexposed?

Some portion is true and some portion is false.

Even in case of taking a photograph in RAW format, the most idealistic way is to take a picture at the maximum
exposure level that image sensor linearity can be secured.

Because a noise increases and a picture becomes rough when a photograph is taken in underexposure.

However, there is a case that things do not go that way.

(1) High contrast scene in which a subject is irradiated strongly or a subject is metallic
Some portion will be overexposure even if the correct exposure setting.

In this case, detail of the highlighted portion is not lost by adjusting the exposure bias at the time of
development if a photograph was taken in underexposure.

(2) When the correct exposure cannot be determined

You might miss a photo opportunity or spoil the atmosphere of surroundings because you have difficulty in
determining the exposure at the time of taking a photograph.

If a photograph is taken in underexposure, an adjustment is available at the time of the development,
however, if you lost a part of image you cannot adjust it.
For these reasons, it is said that "RAW should be photographed in underexposure".

As another reason, you can ease a decline of a color reproduction by taking in underexposure.
Please refer to "10.3.2. Linearity and Saturation of Image Sensor".

* For FUJIFILM FinePix S3 / S5 Pro

Low sensitivity pixels on S3 / S5 Pro have only about 1/16 the sensitivity of high sensitivity pixels, so even
with lots of exposure you will not easily skip.

1/16 sensitivity differences are equivalent to 4EV, and of that about 2EV strength is used internally to
reproduce overexposed parts up to around 2EV more than the brightness usually skipped.

Therefore, there is no need to underexpose, even for subjects with large differences in brightness as
introduced here.

However, in the completely saturated area of the high sensitivity (S pixel) sensors, an image is generated
with information only of low sensitivity (R pixel), so noise may increase and the gray balance on the outer
edges of the image may degrade with a wide-angle lens.

Therefore, avoiding extreme overexposure is safe.
 10.2.3. Turning Exposure Compensation Dial into ISO Speed Dial
For dark subjects or speedy subjects being followed with a long lens with focal distance, there are many times when
high sensitivity photography is necessary.

It is difficult to take a picture with an insufficient shutter speed even though it is full aperture.

Perhaps, in a situation like that, you increase the ISO speed.

However, changing the ISO film speed can be quite daunting. Not everyone is used to the operations needed to
change the ISO speed while taking pictures on a digital camera.

Instead, you can easily operate exposure bias with a method that was used with any camera from the times of film.

Therefore, do not raise the ISO film speed. Adjust the exposure bias dial to underexpose and work the shutter
speed and diaphragm! This is a technique allowed only with RAW photography.

In case of taking a photograph by RAW, a sensitization is available at development process, and its result is almost
the same as the case of increasing ISO speed on a camera. In some scenes, a result would be much better than
that.(*1)

From the time you set to record in a RAW file, the exposure bias dial changes to an ISO speed dial.

*1 Please see "10.1.3. Utilizing Difference between ISO Speed Adjustment of Camera and Exposure Bias of
SILKYPIX®".

10.2.4. Appropriate Exposure for RAW Photography

Here, define the term Appropriate Exposure as the optimal exposure which can represent a scene most beautifully.

Note that here, user preferences such as your liking for color deviation in dark region, or for colors just before the
highlighted portion goes out and so forth, are excluded.

The appropriate exposure expose the brightest portion of a picture, where its details must not be lost, to the
maximum value that linearity of image sensor can be secured.

In other words, the appropriate exposure gives the maximum light quantity that will not cause a lost of the portion
on the RAW data.

This exposure allows you to use full of a dynamic range of an image sensor, you can obtain a clean picture with
little noise.

Please refer to '10.3.2. Linearity and Saturation of Image Sensor' for more details.

When taking a picture with this exposure, its value is different from the appropriate exposure that an exposure
meter indicates.

The exposure that an exposure meter indicates is determined by assuming an average reflectance of a subject. In a
case of the RAW photography, adjustment is available at the development. Therefore, the maximum exposure value
that the highlighted portion will not be gone is the best.

Although, it is very difficult to determine the exposure.

The best way is that you adjust the exposure until the maximum exposure value after taking a picture. When you do
that, use the highlight warning preview mode of a camera to check the picture. Also, adjust the maximum exposure
value to the point that highlighted portion will not be gone.

Since the highlight warning preview displays a case of recording it in a JPEG file, for some cases, it is good to give
more exposure. It depends on the camera you are using.

Please refer to '10.3.2. Linearity and Saturation of Image Sensor' and '10.3.1. Desensitizing at Development' for
more information about these advanced techniques.

10.3. Advanced Techniques

10.3.1. Desensitizing at Development

Regarding the highlighted portion that has gone on the RAW data, even if you execute the desensitizing at the
development, the details are not displayed.

However, some cameras can record not only the region represented as white when the exposure bias amount is 0,
but also brighter region in RAW data.

In order to check whether your camera can do it or not, do an experiment with this software as shown below.
First, take a picture as the highlighted portion of details that looks brighter continuously will be gone.

Then, adjust the "Exp. bias" slider to the - side. At this time, if you see the details appear on the region which has
gone when the "Exp. bias" was set to 0, your camera can record the region which looks more brighter than white in
RAW data.

If you execute this experiment carefully, you can find the breaking point from which details of the highlighted
portion do not appear at above a certain exposure bias value. (*1)

For example, the detail appears at a value up to -1/2EV. However, it will not appear when the value is more than
that.

At this time, this means that your camera has recorded the RAW data with an allowance of 1/2EV.

To put it the other way around, the upper 1/2EV level of sensor's dynamic range has not been used.

In some cameras, such function only works when ISO speed is increased.

Although the highlighted portion will not be gone up to 1/2EV, it is not good to take a picture by using the region
 fully.

Because linearity may have been lost already in the region.

In order to use the region fully, check a test shooting whether its color representation can be achieved to the level
that you satisfy. There is no other way in this case.

If you know techniques up to this level, for example, in a certain subject, you might create a clean picture with little
noise by setting the exposure bias amount as 1/2EV.

*1 There is a function to restore the highest using the R, G, B sensitivity differences of sensors in this software.
This function will be a hindrance in conducting this experiment, so it is best to confirm that the "Light
compensation" in "Highlight controller" sub-controls is "0". In addition, set "Dynamic range" to "0EV" at
the same time.
* For FUJIFILM FinePix S3 / S5 Pro
The super CCD honeycomb SRII sensor, arranged with two different kinds of sensitivity sensors in a
checkerboard pattern, is installed on S3 / S5.

You can capture an extremely large range of luminance by combining high sensitivity and low sensitivity pixel
information.

Therefore, there will be a different appearance if you use a dynamic range mode = WIDE setting on S3 / S5.

Low sensitivity pixels on S3 / S5 Pro have only about 1/16 the sensitivity of high sensitivity pixels, so even
with lots of exposure you will not easily skip.

1/16 sensitivity differences are equivalent to 4EV, and of that about 2EV strength can be used. Reproduce
overexposed parts up to around 2EV more than the brightness usually skipped.

On this account, there is no need to be overly concerned with overexposure when taking photographs on a
WIDE dynamic range with S3 / S5. Using the exposure bias on this software, there is always the possibility
of reduced sensitivity development up to around –2EV.

10.3.2. Linearity and Saturation of Image Sensor

An image sensor is made of CCD or CMOS and outputs a signal corresponding to a given light quantity.

However, at a certain level, even the light quantity is increased, the output level of the signal does not increase
anymore. This is Saturation.

When saturated, whiteout will transpire in highlighted portions, even when photographed in RAW.

This does not mean that you can use the sensor fully up to right before the saturation occurs.

Degradation of color representation occurs when the given light quantity is out of the region where the output
signal is proportional to the light quantity.

Normally a camera is designed to create a JPEG picture with this proportional region.

However, it is not a perfect proportion and it includes allowable range that shows the level that can be allowed at
maximum.

If the allowable ranges differ between a camera manufacturer settings and your setting, use your own setting. The
difference doesn't mean fault of your camera.

You just try to adjust the exposure bias toward underexposure until the exposure enters in your allowable range.

It is possible to take photographs that have higher color reproduction characteristics by underexposing within an
acceptable permissible range.

If you are able to prevent degradation of color representation by taking a picture with underexposure setting, a
noise may increase.

Since that is a capability of a camera sensor, you have to find a middle ground between the color representation
and the noise.

In a contrary sense, in a case of some subject, you may set the exposure out of the allowable range of a
manufacturer setting.

In this case, set overexposure within the range which is described in '10.3.1 Desensitizing at Development', to
obtain a clean picture with little noise.

In this case, you can obtain a clean image with little noise by overexposing within the range explained in
"Desensitizing at Development".

10.4. Knowledge

10.4.1. Color Temperature and Color Deflection

"Color temperature", which is used to express colors in the light source, will be explained.

An object heated to a high temperature will emit light. We all know that lava erupting from a volcano, iron liquefied
in a steel furnace and charcoal used at a barbeque all emit light in colors ranging from orange to dark red.

The color of this heated object varies with the temperature of the object. When an object is heated, gradually
raising the temperature, it first begins to shine red. Before long it changes to orange and yellow. As the object
continues to heat up, it will burn a bluish white.

When an object's color is expressed as temperature using these properties, the temperature is called the "Color
temperature." It is common for the color of the light source to be described as this "Color temperature."

"Color temperature" is defined as the correlation between temperature and color when an idealized body, known as
a black body, is heated. Units are in K (Kelvin), or absolute temperature. 0K (absolute zero) = about –273degrees
celsius.

Think of sunlight as being an actual representative light source. Because the surface temperature of the sun is
about 6000 degrees, the color of the light emitted from the sun is about 6000 degrees Kelvin. In actuality, blue light
is gradually dispersed and absorbed as it passes through the atmosphere, and by the time it reaches the Earth's
surface, it is observed as a color temperature of around 5,000-5,500K.

Think of a light bulb lit up in a room. The filament in the light bulb is heated to about 2000-3000 degrees and emits
light, so the color temperature is about 2000-3000 degrees.

There are light sources that emit light by methods other than simply heating an object to a high temperature so
that it will emit light. Such light sources would include fluorescent lamps and mercury lamps.

For these light sources, color is expressed in "color temperature" of the visually closest black body radiator.

To be specific, plot the color of the light source on a CIE 1960 UCS coordinate system and draw a perpendicular
line at a right angle to the radioactive locus of the black body from there. The "Color temperature" of that part is
used.
All colors on this perpendicular line are said to have the same "color temperature" and this line is called the is
temperature line. Furthermore, the deviation of the radioactive locus of the black body, which is the length of this
perpendicular line, is called the "color deflection" in this software.

Some digital cameras and color meters express the light source color only as "color temperature," because it is
mostly possible to express the light source color for natural light only as "color temperature."

In SILKYPIX, a parameter called "Color deflection" is included so that you can more precisely specify a light
source color. You can easily make appropriate adjustments to white balance.

In addition, measuring the slight deviation from black body emissions becomes clearer, because the sunlight that
makes it to the surface of the Earth has to pass through the atmosphere and clouds.

The amount of that deflection differs depending on the weather and location, but in terms of CIE 1960 UCS uv
distance, it is around 0.003-0.004, and is converted to a color deflection in this software of 3-4.

This is the reason that the color deflection value of the preset white balance in this software is not 0.

10.4.2. Exif Information

Exif information is information from when the camera took the photograph which indicates the characteristics of the
image. It is standard in almost all digital cameras.

An outputted file can include the photography information such as shutter speed, aperture, shooting date, Exif
thumbnail picture, color space information, and so forth by recording the Exif information can be recorded in the
outputted file.

The standard in this software is Exif 2.3, and you can output color space information in a form based on Exif.

This information is effective when handling output files on software compatible with Exif information.

In addition to sRGB color space information, Adobe RGB color information can also be recorded from the Exif 2.21.
However, because there is only few software that can support the information, we recommend you to use
'Embedding ICC Profile' when you record color space information.
10.4.3. Files Created Automatically

10.4.3.1. Development Parameter File and Collateral Information File

These are files for storing development parameters, reservations / marks, rotation information, etc. The
extensions for "Development parameters" are ".spd."

There are cases when they are automatically created one by one for image files for development and cases
they are created explicitly with the "Save Development Parameters" function.

You can restore the status of a saved development parameter by reading the development parameter
recorded and saved in the "Development parameters files".

A "Development parameter file" is always automatically created when you edit an image for processing on
SILKYPIX. This automatically created "Development parameter file" is automatically read during the next
editing and restored to the previous editing status.

The automatically created "Development parameter file" is recorded and saved under a file name such as
"file name of image for processing" + ".8.spd" within the "SILKYPIX_DS" sub-folder, which is automatically
created in a folder with the file for image processing.

The size of the "Development Parameter File" differs depending on the adjusted development parameters,
but it is normally around 10-20KB.

However, when "Spotting tools" are used, it is saved with the file name of "File Name of Image for
Processing" + ".8.spf" and may expand to more than several MB.

Furthermore, if a Brush in the "Partial correction tool" is used, a file name of "File name for processed
image" + ".8.spb" will be saved.

Develop parameter files are created in a temporary folder if a folder is read-only or creating and changing a
"Development Parameter File" is forbidden because an already existing ".spd" file is read-only.

The development parameter file prepared in the temporary folder will be erased when the application is
closed.
10.4.3.2. Virtual storage files
 SILKYPIX uses its own independent virtual storage files for efficiently processing large amounts of image
data.

There are two SILKYPIX virtual storage files called DefaultTCCBSectionNNNN.lck and
DefaultTCCBSectionNNNN.vm0 (NNNN is 0000-9999), and these files are created in the temporary folder.

The initial value of the temporary folder is the OS standard temporary folder, but this can be changed
through "Save Development Parameters" in "Function settings".

These virtual storage files are automatically created when the software begins and are deleted when the
software is closed.

Contents you set through the SILKYPIX setting functions such as "Function settings" and "Display settings"
are recorded and saved in environmental setting files.

Environmental setting files are files called "SPDUser1.ini," and are stored within a sub-folder with the
product's name, which in turn is created within a sub-folder called "ISL" in the OS standard user folder.

The OS Standard user folder differs for each user of Windows 7 / Windows 8.1 / Windows 10, so settings
are managed by each user.

10.4.3.3. Temporary file

SILKYPIX uses its own cache function to efficiently process large amounts of image data.

Temporary files are created in a sub-folder called "SILKYPIX_GlobalCache" in the temporary folder, and are
stored within folders created in a hierarchical order within that.

The initial temporary folder is the standard temporary folder on your OS, but it is possible to change this
with "Save Development Parameters" in "Function settings".

These temporary files are created when reading or editing image files to be developed.
10.4.3.4. Other

SILKYPIX automatically creates folders and files other than those listed above for internal processing, but
basically, you do not need to be concerned with them.

These folders and files are created in sub-folders called "ISL" in standard user folders on your OS, and are
stored in sub-folders further created under the product's name.

10.4.4. DNG (Digital Negative) format compatibility

In this software, you can develop the DNG (Digital Negative) formatted file (from this onward, it is indicated as
DNG).
DNG is the unified standards for RAW data, which is proposed by Adobe Systems Incorporated. By the use of the
conversion utility produced by Adobe Systems Incorporated, RAW files of various cameras can be converted to
DNG files.
By the use of this utility, you can handle the RAW data that are varied according to a camera as common formatted
data.
Please refer to the web sites of Adobe Systems Incorporated for details.
10.4.4.1. DNG Overview
Refer to the DNG Standards, which are on public view by Adobe Systems Incorporated for details. In this
section, we explain about DNG in order to help users understand operation of this software.

The DNG consists of the RAW image data taken from an image sensor, the parameters that indicate
characteristics of the image data, color representation information, photography information (information
when a picture is taken), thumbnail information and so forth.

In addition, it can contain the Linear RAW image data that have information of 3 colors per pixel instead of
RAW image data.

In this software, regarding the RAW image data, it is called RAW format. Regarding the Linear RAW image
data, it is called Linear RAW format.

When you use the DNG converter, you can select either the RAW format or the Linear RAW format in the
optional setting at the time of conversion.

Since the RAW format keeps the color array that an image sensor has, the demosaic process (process to
create a color structure) can be done in this software. This contributes to the maximum usage of this
software.

Since the Linear RAW format contains data after the demosaic process is done, even in a case of camera
with the image sensor's color array which this software cannot handle, it is possible to developed the data
by the use of this format.

When the specified white balance is recorded, this information can be recognized as the photography
information, and you can use a camera-set value (being set when a picture was taken) as white balance.
Color representation is executed with the color representation information.
10.4.4.2. DNG Files Available with this Software
In the DNG Standards, it is possible to contain RAW data with an array of various image sensors. However,
 there is a limit for this software when it handles DNG files.
In this section, we explain about the DNG files, which this software can develop.

(1) DNG files with RAW format and Linear Raw format taken with the camera, which is compatible with this
software.
In case of the DNG files that are converted form the RAW files taken with the camera that is
compatible with this software, it is possible to develop them regardless of a format type, not
exclusively to the RAW format and the Linear Raw format(*1)

In addition to the color representation with this software, it is possible to execute the color
representation on the basis of the color representation information contained in the DNG files.

You can select a "Color representation" from the "DNG" color profile for reproducing colors based
on color reproduction information included in DNG files.

Parameters that have an influence on Demosaic (Demosaicing sharpness settings in the
"Development settings" sub-control) cannot be used if in LinearRAW format.

*1 Only LinearRAW formats can be used if a DNG file converted from an RAF file with shooting
elements in a X-Trans CMOS sensor such as FUJIFILM X-Pro or a honeycomb arrangement
such as FUJIFILM FinePix S2 / S3 / S5 Pro.

(2) DNG files with RAW format taken with the camera, which is not compatible with this software.

of DNG files taken with 3 color filters having Bayer pattern such as tetragonal array or rectangular
array, it is possible to develop with this software.

Color reproduction is performed by color reproduction information included in DNG.

This software (this version) does not support the RAW format with the array which is not explained
the above. So you should convert them to the Linear RAW format.

(3) DNG files with Linear RAW format taken with camera, which is not compatible with this software.

In a case of DNG files taken with 3 color filters having Bayer pattern such as tetragonal array or
rectangular array, it is possible to develop with this software. In a case of DNG files taken with 3
color filters, it is possible to develop with this software (There is a case that DNG files taken with the
CCD camera of complementary colors system which has 4 or more color filters cannot be handled).

However, since the demosaic process has already been executed, the parameters ("Demosaicing
sharpness" in the "Development settings" sub-control) that affect the demosaic process cannot be
used.

The color representation is executed on the basis of the color representation information contained
in the DNG files.

When you develop the RAW data taken with the camera which has a special array such as a
honeycomb array with this software, you should convert them to the DNG files with the Linear RAW
format.

(4) Compressed format

DNG Files with compressed format and uncompressed format can be handled.

10.4.5. Color management

A summary of color management and an explanation of color management on SILKYPIX are given here.

Accurately performing color management is necessary for correctly reflecting color adjustments made while looking
at the monitor on JPEG / TIFF files and print outs output by SILKYPIX.

One cause of the problem of the "printed photograph and the image seen on the monitor being different" is that
color management is not performed correctly.

It is difficult even for specialists in a special environment to accurately perform color management, but please keep
in mind that accurate color management to a certain degree is possible for everyone.

10.4.5.1. What is color management?

As the name color management implies, it is "managing" "colors".

Generally, monitors have functions that adjust hues and brightness. Using these functions, you can adjust
reds, greens, brightness and darkness. When using your PC for a purpose other than image processing, the
correct way to use the monitor is adjusting colors and brightness to make it easy to look at.

However, for PCs that perform image processing, defects may arise if you adjust the monitor the way you
like it. This is because if you view images you have processed on another PC or print them out, the colors
and brightness displayed on your monitor will not be accurately reproduced.

Color management is a system for managing colors to reproduce the same colors as far as possible, no
matter what PC an electronic image is viewed or what printer is used to print it. It is required for image
processing.

The keywords for performing color management on SILKYPIX are "color space" and "color profile."

Both are for defining the color space when expressing colors as electronic information. Please think of
"color space" as being a name for this definition and "color profile" as the definition of color space.

Basically, the "color spaces" used on SILKYPIX are "sRGB" and "Adobe RGB" (*1). These two color
spaces are common and widely used in the PC world, but there are many other color spaces defined for
other uses and special industries.

Both "sRGB" and "Adobe RGB" are color spaces that are defined by RGB (*2). 8bit RGB has values in 256
stages, from 0-255, for each R, G and B element, making it possible to express around 16 million colors, but
the way the RGB values are assigned absolute values of colors on color charts differs between "sRGB" and
"Adobe RGB." One-turn wide color spaces that cannot be expressed on "sRGB" can be expressed on
"Adobe RGB."
So what are the specific differences between "sRGB" and "Adobe RGB"? One way to describe information
for each color reproduction is a "color profile." For standardized color spaces like "sRGB" and "Adobe
RGB", many image processors, including SILKYPIX, accurately process them even without their color
profiles, but for other color spaces, it is common to attach a "color profile" to define the color space.

One large difference between "sRGB" and "Adobe RGB" is that the three stimulation values (RGB values
of the color space triangle endpoints) shown in the expressible color space are different and these color
coordinates are described in the "color profile" of each.

Please refer to '10.4.5.7. "sRGB" vs "Adobe RGB"'.

*1 By designating a color profile in the input color space of JPEG / TIFF images and the output color
space when storing JPEG / TIFF images, color spaces other than "sRGB" and "Adobe RGB" can be
used.
*2 A coordinate system other than RGB may define a color space, such as a color space for a printer
being CMYK.

10.4.5.2. Color space and color profile

First, we described "color space" as a name. The range of colors that can be handled is determined when
the color space is determined.

All electronic devices that handle electronic images have a range (limitation) to the colors they can express.
For example, for monitors, the brightest green that can be displayed differs depending on the model of
monitor. Of course, the same is true for models of printers, but the range of colors that can be expressed
also differs depending on the paper being used.

Not only output devices, but also input devices such as scanners have color ranges of detectable colors
that differ depending on the device.

In this way, the color range that can be expressed for each electronic device that handles electronic images
has its own independent color space, and a "color profile" is attached as information to define these color
spaces, or can be created with a special tool.

"sRGB" and "Adobe RGB" which were first introduced are standardized color spaces and are not things
that indicate the range of colors that can be expressed on special electronic devices.

"Color space" is a general word that indicates the method and range of expressions provided by the "color
profile." A "color profile" is information that defines the "color space" and specifically exists as a file in a
format known as ICC or ICM.

A "color profile" can largely be divided into two types, those that prepare and create for devices (special
color space for specific electronic devices) that perform color management and those that define
standardized color spaces like "sRGB" and "Adobe RGB."

Color profiles for monitors are called "monitor profiles" on SILKYPIX. It is possible to express accurate
colors on a monitor by turning on "Turn on color management" and setting an appropriate "monitor profile"
through the display settings.

On SILKYPIX, you can select only RGB-XYZ format or RGB-Lab format as the color profile for your printer.
A color profile defined by the CMYK coordinate system cannot be used.

Please refer to "10.4.5.4. Color management on monitor displays" and "10.4.5.5. Color management for print
output" for details on color management for monitors and printers.
10.4.5.3. Color management performed on SILKYPIX

Color management is performed on SILKYPIX taking the following three items into consideration.

(1) Determine color space (input color space) of images to be developed

When processing RAW data, the characteristics of the RAW data are measured at our company for
each type of device. This is equivalent to the color space of the RAW data. RAW data is automatically
processed based on this data, so the RAW data's input color space is not necessary.

When processing JPEG / TIFF images, it is necessary to correctly designate the color space
recorded for the image. The input data's color space is called "Input color space" on SILKYPIX. (*1)

Basically, two color spaces, sRGB and Adobe RGB, are compatible with SILKYPIX as "Input color
spaces". Determining whether to use sRGB or Adobe RGB is based on Exif / DCF information.

If an ICC profile is attached to the JPEG / TIFF image, the color space on the ICC profile is the input
 color space. In this case, it is possible to designate a color space other than sRGB or Adobe RGB.

SILKYPIX® performs color management using the OS functions. Please note that if an ICC profile
incompatible to the OS color management system is attached, colors cannot be reproduced
accurately. (*2)

Images that SILKYPIX cannot automatically determine will use sRGB, so please explicitly set the
"input color space" manually for cases in which images that are recorded with Adobe RGB cannot be
automatically determined.

*1 *1 In addition to "input color space," the color space of images that SILKYPIX outputs is called
"output color space." Also, in general, a color space used within software during image
processing is called "work color space," but SILKYPIX uses its own wide area "work color
space."
*2 On Windows, the PCS (Profile Connection Space) can only designate an ICC profile in XYZ
format as the input color space. Colors cannot be correctly reproduced if the PCS has
attached a Lab format ICC profile to the JPEG / TIFF image.

(2) Accurate color reproduction on images displayed on monitors by using monitor profiles
If color management is turned on through "Display settings", the designated monitor profile is used
and color management on monitor displays is performed. Appropriate monitor profile settings are
required to perform correct color reproduction on images displayed on monitors.

Please refer to "10.4.5.4. Color management on monitor displays" for details.

(3) Designating color space (output color space) when saving JPEG / TIFF development results or when
printing output
You can select either "sRGB" or "Adobe RGB" as the color space at output.

When saving to files, the set color space is recorded to the JPEG / TIFF image as a recording format
based on Exif 2.3 and DCF 2.0. You can also record ICC profiles as development result save settings.

You can also designate the ICC profile, convert to an output color space other than sRGB / Adobe
RGB and output. Please refer to "9.1.5.2. Output color space" for details.

When printing with a printer, perform appropriate color management with the printer settings. Please
refer to "10.4.5.5. Color management for print output" for details.
Output color space settings will differ depending on the next process and how the output image will
be used.

There are cases when "Adobe RGB" is designated when inputting photographs for printing, but you
must appropriately make selections according to usage for images that are used by you yourself.

Currently, recognition of color space for handling electronic images on PCs is low. Especially if
distributed to a third party that is not designated, it is safe to designate sRGB, including print
requests on DPE and Web exhibitions.

As for image data saved with Adobe RGB, correct color management will not be performed on
following processes and colors cannot be accurately reproduced.

(4) Color profiles compatible with SILKYPIX

SILKYPIX performs color management using the color management functions installed on the OS.

(Windows 7/Windows 8.1/Windows 10=ICM2.0/WCS, macOS=ColorSync)

Therefore, color profiles of a format not supported by the OS cannot be used on SILKYPIX.(*1)

*1 There are cases in which other company's software may be independently compatible even with
color profiles of a format not supported by the OS.
Please understand that there are other color profiles that can be used on other company's
graphic software and manufacturer's development software that cannot be used on SILKYPIX.

10.4.5.4. Color management on monitor displays

When processing images with SILKYPIX, you adjust colors and brightness looking at the monitor. Naturally, if
the colors displayed on the monitor are not correct, the adjusted results will not be accurately reflected on
the development results.

It is desirable to set appropriate conditions for your monitor and create a color profile for the monitor you
use with special tools in order to display colors on your monitor as accurately as possible.

There are cases in which monitor profiles (monitor color profiles) measured and created in advance by the
manufacturer are included on recent monitors. Even if you cannot create a color profile with special tools,
you can mostly reproduce correct colors by using these.

If no monitor color profile is included and you do not have tools for creating one, use monitor settings to
make adjustments so that you can reproduce colors as accurately as possible.

Make adjustments to the monitor display using a method as highly ranked as possible from those listed
 below. As a monitor unit, make adjustments so that colors will be displayed as accurately as possible.

(1) Select "sRGB" or "Adobe RGB" mode if the monitor allows color space settings.
Many types of devices have only an "sRGB" setting because monitors that allow "Adobe RGB"
settings are monitors for image processing and expensive.

(2) For monitors that allow color temperature settings, please select 6500K.
Many monitor standard settings are above 9000K, and white is displayed as a blue-white.

(3) If color adjustments are possible by adjusting R, G, B, display white and gray and adjust so that white
and gray can be accurately reproduced.

Next, select a monitor profile appropriate to that monitor. Acquire a monitor profile using a method as highly
ranked as possible.

(A) If you have special tools for creating a monitor profile, follow the instructions for the tools, calibrate
your monitor and create a monitor profile.
(B) Sometimes a monitor profile created by the manufacturer is included or released on the Web. Please
use such a monitor profile if available.
In this case, it is necessary to make the monitor designated settings. If you make adjustments to color
and brightness as you like, color management cannot be appropriately performed.
(C) If you cannot acquire a monitor profile using any of the above methods, select an existing ICC profile
that fits the first monitor adjustments.
If you do not really understand, it is safe to select the sRGB ICC profile (sRGB IEC 61966-2.1)

SILKYPIX default values are set with color management on and use the OS standard monitor profile.

Please refer to "9.2.1.1. Monitor profile" for setting monitor profiles.
10.4.5.5. Color management for print output
There are two ways for SILKYPIX to perform color management for print output.

One is a method for performing color management on the printer without SILKYPIX performing color
management that takes the printer into consideration.

In this case, the color space on the image transmitted to the printer is designated as sRGB or Adobe RGB
by SILKYPIX.

In order to perform color management on the printer, it is necessary to make settings using printer settings
so that these color space images print correctly.

Many printers have default settings that make automatic corrections and print with memory colors. In order
to correctly reproduce colors, it is necessary to turn on color management and make sure that the color
space of the printed image matches the color space that SILKYPIX outputs.

Please refer to your printer's manual concerning printer settings.

Another method is to perform color management in which SILKYPIX takes the print output into
consideration.

In this case, it is necessary to make appropriate print color space settings with SILKYPIX's detailed printer
settings.

Using the ICC profile that the printer maker and paper manufacturer provides is the best method for
performing color management. The ICC profile you should select differs according to the combination of
printer and paper you use.

Please refer to information that the printer maker and paper manufacturer provides concerning the way to
select the best ICC profile.

One important note is that if you print using this method, it is necessary to use the printer settings to set a
mode so that the printer will not make color corrections. If the printer makes color corrections, the color
correction process will duplicate that of SILKYPIX and colors will not be accurately reproduced.

Please see your printer's manual concerning printer settings.
10.4.5.6. Restrictions to color management

Even with the most accurate color management, there are limitations to color management and things do not
always go as you plan.

(1) Limitations to display device

The range of colors available on many monitors is to the degree of sRGB. Monitors that can display all
or most of the Adobe RGB color gamut are expensive monitors for image processing.
Please understand that if you set the output color space to "Adobe RGB" and edit images, there are
color gamuts that cannot be expressed on the monitor.

For example, with sRGB, RGB = (255, 0, 0) but with Adobe RGB, RGB = (219, 0, 0). If displaying on a
monitor that cannot display anything but the sRGB color gamut, the Adobe RGB deep, pure red will
 display a gradation of RGB = (0, 0, 0)-(219, 0, 0), but over that, (219, 0, 0)-(255, 0, 0), will all show the
same color.

Similarly, the sRGB green maximum value of RGB = (0, 255, 0) is RGB = (144, 255, 60) with Adobe
RGB. Greens have an extremely large color gamut that cannot be displayed.

When compared with printing devices, the color gamut available for display on light-emitting devices
like monitors is greatly different. Therefore, even if appropriate color management is possible, colors
will differ more or less when compared to print output.

If you are using a monitor for image processing, color management is taken into consideration and the
setting method is probably included in the manual, but unfortunately, many monitors do not take color
management into consideration.

Liquid crystal monitors are such that they are especially not suited to image processing as colors
cannot be accurately reproduced and tone expressions are not smooth.

Even if monitor profiles are applied, the problem of a lack of gradation cannot be solved. Rather,
turning on color management may have ironic results such as accentuating tone sharpness.

(2) Limitations to printing devices

The evolution of recent printers has been tremendous. The quality of inkjet printers for home use
makes it difficult to distinguish if it is better compared to silver-salt printing.

However, the available color gamut differs depending on the type of printing, including silver-salt.
Inkjet printers are good at expressing bright colors while silver-salt printing is good at expressing
darker colors.

In either case, when comparing to light-emitting devices such as monitors, the ability to reproduce
colors with high saturation is remarkably inferior. No matter how much appropriate color management
is performed, there are many colors that cannot be expressed on printed items but which are
available on the monitor.

Furthermore, as mentioned earlier, colors differ more or less when comparing images displayed on a
monitor. This is so not just because the available color gamut of each differs, but also because
differences in reflective colors and characteristics of light emitting colors are influenced.

Reflective colors such as on printed matter are strongly influenced by the source of light. White paper
may look yellowish if viewed under a light bulb, but bluish if viewed under a fluorescent lamp.

The standard light source for sRGB / Adobe RGB is 6500K, so if you check hues of printed matters
from a printer, it would be ideal for you to perform this under a light source of 6500K, but that would
be difficult.

10.4.5.7. "sRGB" vs "Adobe RGB"

Recent digital single-lens reflex cameras record and save JPEGs based on Exif 2.3 / DCF 2.0 and "sRGB"
and "Adobe RGB" are available as selections for the color space.

What is a good way to distinguish between "sRGB" and "Adobe RGB"?

The biggest difference when comparing the two color spaces "sRGB" and "Adobe RGB" is the difference in
the available range of the color gamut. "Adobe RGB" covers a larger color gamut than "sRGB." "Adobe
RGB" has a particularly vivid range of emerald green and can express the greens of trees and blues of the
oceans in a way that "sRGB" cannot.

Also, please understand that though it may seem that "Adobe RGB" is superior, there are some
disadvantages and it is necessary to be mindful of them when using it.

First, there are few monitors that can display the entire gamut of "Adobe RGB", and if photographs from
these gamuts are viewed on normal monitors, it will seem as if the gradation has degraded and become thick.
It is necessary to use a monitor that is compatible with "Adobe RGB" or print and check hues when
outputting with "Adobe RGB".

In addition, color management on the monitor is indispensable for accurately displaying "Adobe RGB" images
on the monitor. If you view "Adobe RGB" images on a monitor that has not had accurate color management
performed, hues will look darker than reality. If you perform color management in this kind of environment
and view in a correct environment, you will see some considerably glaring hues. Please note that many
problems of incompatible colors caused by not performing accurate color management are reported.

Most photographs are satisfied with a color gamut available with "sRGB". If an image satisfied by "sRGB" is
recorded in "Adobe RGB", the range of colors is naturally covered, but you will lose color gradation. The
number of colors expressed when recorded in 8bit RGB, whether in "sRGB" or "Adobe RGB", is around 16
million. It can be said that "Adobe RGB," which covers a larger color gamut, has intervals that are course,
while "sRGB" is smoother.

The three endpoints of "sRGB" (absolute R, G, B) are the RGB color coordinates, (255, 0, 0), (0, 255, 0) and
(0, 0, 255) respectively. When these absolute colors are expressed in "Adobe RGB", they become (219, 0, 0),
(144, 255, 60) and (0, 0, 250). If recorded in 16bit TIFF, it is not necessary to pay much attention to
gradation, but please understand that in 8bit, you will greatly sacrifice gradation.

If your chief usage is viewing on PC monitors or distributing to unspecified third parties, output in "sRGB" is
recommended. Images are generally treated as "sRGB" on environments that have not had color
management performed on them.

If "Adobe RGB" is designated as the format for inputting data, there may not be any choice, but as for
outputs in "Adobe RGB", accurate color management functioning is a condition for all later processing.
 Accurate color management must be performed, not only on your PC environment, but also on the
environment of third parties to whom "Adobe RGB" images circulate.

Please note that thoughtlessly switching settings to "Adobe RGB" can be the source of trouble.
10.4.5.8. Troubleshooting
The cause and measures against some typical problems related to color management will be related here.

(1) Colors differ between displaying the same image on a monitor with SILKYPIX and with other software
Color management settings on monitors with SILKYPIX and with comparable software are different.

Either color management on both sides will be off or both will be on and set the same monitor profiles
so that the same color will be displayed.

In order to display accurate colors, color management on both sides must be on and appropriate
monitor profiles set.

(2) Colors differ between images displayed on the monitor and results printed on the printer with SILKYPIX
Unfortunately, it is not possible to get two output results that are in complete accord, but if there are
huge differences, there is a high probability that color management has not been correctly set
somewhere. Try checking in the following order.

a) Has the monitor color management been appropriately performed?

It is desirable to use monitor profiles calibrated and created with special tools, but it is possible to
reproduce good colors by using the monitor profiles for the type of device you use that the
manufacturer provides.

If you purchased your PC as a set and your PC has an integrated monitor, there are cases when a
monitor profile is set in advance, but please note that there are many cases when default values are
not accurately set. As long as you do not designate a monitor profile for the monitor you are using,
accurate color displays will be difficult.

Calibrating monitors is the first step in color management. If you are aiming for accurate color
reproduction, prepare some monitor calibration tools.

b) Has the printer color management been appropriately performed?

There are two kinds of methods capable of printer color management with SILKYPIX.

If settings for color management are made with SILKYPIX, you must set the status (= no corrections,
corrections off, etc.) so that corrections are not made on the printer side.

If settings for color management are made on the printer side, it is necessary to make settings using
printer settings so that images output in "sRGB" or "Adobe RGB" are printed reproducing accurate
colors.

Please note that if processing occurs on both SILKYPIX and the printer, accurate results cannot be
achieved.

Please refer to your printer's manual concerning printer settings.

c) Be mindful of environmental light

When looking at printed matters, hues are influenced by the surrounding lights (electric lights and sun
light). When viewing printed matters under light bulbs or fluorescent lamps, they look different
depending on the color temperature of the surrounding light.

Monitor displays are also influenced by the surrounding light, but since the influence is less than that
on printed matters, the way you see colors will differ even when compared under the same light
source.

In order to accurately view colors, it is necessary to view them under a surrounding light of 6500K (a
cloudy day outdoors). It is difficult to actually view printed matters under these conditions, but if
viewed in surrounding light other than this, it is necessary to make comparisons keeping in mind that
colors will differ by that much.

d) Limitations through differences between light emitting devices and reflecting colors
Monitors are light emitting devices. Colors are shown through light's three primary colors (RGB).
Printed matters are items viewed as colors reflected from the surrounding light. Colors are shown
through colors' three primary colors (CMY). So to begin with there is a difference in the way we look
at different methods to express colors.

Furthermore, the color gamut available on a monitor is different from that available on a printer. The
difference in ability to express bright color and darker colors is big, and unfortunately no matter how
precise you perform color management, there are limitations to color agreement.

Basically, color differences from this cause cannot be avoided. In order to minimize differences as
much as possible, use a monitor for image processing that is capable of Adobe RGB, use a device
that has as high ability as possible to reproduce colors on a printer and use the best printing paper.

When pursuing color management, it will inevitably cost a certain amount.

However, seeking after actual precise color management is limited to the business world, such as the
printing business. To begin with, if images are to be viewed by third parties, it is impossible to know
under what surrounding light they will be viewed. Generally, it is not necessary to be that particular
 about color reproduction.

What is important is performing color management within the available range and putting colors
together in a range that is permissible after recognizing that differences in reproducing colors will
result in differences in viewing.

(3) A tone jump (contour like band of colors = Mach band) can be seen on an image displayed on the
monitor with SILKYPIX.
If a tone jump is seen on the monitor display but not on printed matters, it is possible that the monitor
display has reached its limits.

If a grayscale (a gray gradation pattern) is seen on a monitor that has not had color management
appropriately performed, colors other than gray may be seen. It may seem there are shades of green
or magenta due to a light shade of gray.

In addition, if a similar grayscale is observed, colors should change in uniform stages from dark (=0) to
light (=255), but there are places where colors suddenly shift, or on the other hand, places where
colors do not change and cases in which gradation is not uniformly changed.

This is a phenomenon that can be seen in a comparatively high number of liquid crystal monitors,
which are not for image processing. If you are using this kind of monitor, there are times when the
problem of gradated expression of colors cannot be solved, but remains even if the monitor has been
calibrated.

(By correctly calibrating the monitor, seeing colors other than gray in the grayscale will be cancelled.
Also, the problem of gradated expression will disappear if the device is a monitor for image processing
and the calibration results are reflected in the monitor.)
10.4.6. Thermal Runaway
Thermal Runaway means that a CPU cannot handle a micro-processing task correctly because of heat. Just as its
literal sense, a CPU runs recklessly.

In some cases, Blue-Back (an error message is displayed on a blue screen) occurs or a PC itself resets for
protection from heat or power turns off.

If such symptoms occur, you have to suspect this thermal runaway.

If such symptoms occur while executing this software, we recommend you to refer to '9.9.3.2. Develop slowly' and
check whether the cause is thermal runaway or not. Then take measures to cope with this trouble.

back
prev menu next

Copyright (C) 2004-2018, Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co.,Ltd. All rights reserved.
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 /
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 SOFTWARE MANUAL
back
prev menu next

11. Supported Camera List

Our company is striving to be compatible with as many cameras as possible.

To see the latest list, please refer to the following URL.

SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 Supported Cameras

URL:https://silkypix.isl.co.jp/en/commons/supported-cameras-dsp8/

SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 Supported Cameras

URL:https://silkypix.isl.co.jp/en/commons/supported-cameras-ds8/

back
prev menu next

Copyright (C) 2004-2018, Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co.,Ltd. All rights reserved.
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 /
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 SOFTWARE MANUAL
back
prev menu next

12. Troubleshooting

12.1. How to check the software version and your registered information

Select [Help (H)]-[Version information] from the menu and the

software information dialog will be displayed.

The version of the software, as well as information regarding your
license, will be displayed here.

If product key registration has been completed, your license serial
number will also be shown.

12.2. Troubleshooting for "Registration of Product Key"

Errors might occur due to problems with online communication when you register the product key attached to the license
that is issued by Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co.,Ltd.

Registering the product key needs internet access.

Please confirm the following points when registering the product key online.

* If you do not have the Internet usable environment, you can register the product key offline.

* The errors might occur due to virus check software, security software, personal firewall, and so forth. Be aware that
these programs tend to monitor and limit connections for software except for those applications which are granted
access. In these cases, please disable such software.

* Once you complete registration, you do not need to make a registration again. When you use SILKYPIX, your computer
does not need to be connected through the Internet.

12.2.1. Inquiries about merchandise

Please make any inquiries you have concerning questions such as how to use "SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 /
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8."
Unfortunately, we cannot answer inquiries that are not directly related to our company's merchandise, such as how
to use your PC or OS, your digital camera or expansion board. We also ask that you ask any questions you have
concerning other companies' merchandise at other companies' support desks.

Furthermore, there are cases in which we cannot offer support if your problem stems from a malfunction on a
device other than one for which our company offers a guarantee.
12.2.1.1. How to make inquiries

(1) Inquire over the Internet

Use the special support form on our company's web page.

Use the support form from our support site on our company's SILKYPIX® web site.

* When using the support form, you must enter your registered license serial number, so please
have it ready.

(2) Inquiries by e-mail

Please follow the [Instructions for Making Inquiries] below and send an e-mail to the SILKYPIX
support center.

E-mail address: [email protected]

(3) Inquiries by FAX

Please follow the [Instructions for Making Inquiries] below and send a FAX to the SILKYPIX support
center.

FAX Number: +81 43 296 8079

(4) Inquiries by mail

Please follow the [Instructions for Making Inquiries] below and send a letter to the SILKYPIX support
center.

SILKYPIX Support Center
Ichikawa Soft Laboratory
Makuhari-Techno-Garden Bldg. CD-5, 1-3, Nakase, Mihama-ku, Chiba-city, Chiba-pref. 261-8501
Japan
[Instructions for Making Inquiries]

Please include the following items when making an inquiry.

(1) Your name

(2) An e-mail address / FAX number / address for replies
When inquiring by e-mail, you may use either your PC or cell phone e-mail address. However,
please understand that when using a free e-mail site or cell phone e-mail, replies from our
company may not be received due to limitations to word count, etc.
(3) Product name: SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8
(4) Product serial number
(5) SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 version (example: Ver.
8.0.2.0)
(6) OS (Example: Windows 7 Professional Service Pack 1 / macOS 10.12.3)
(7) PC (maker and model)
(8) Processor model number
(9) Processor speed (GHz)
(10) Memory (GB)
(11) Drive type (example: HDD / SSD)
(12) Available capacity on drive (GB)
(13) Digital camera (maker and model)
(14) Your inquiry

12.2.1.2. How to check serial number

Please include your serial number when making inquiries

concerning SILKYPIX ®. Please perform the following
operations to learn your serial number.

(1) Click on the [Version information] button or select [Help (H)]-[Version information] from the menu and
the "SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8" dialog will be displayed.
(2) Check the serial number shown in the "SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 / SILKYPIX® Developer
Studio 8" dialog.

back
prev menu next

Copyright (C) 2004-2018, Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co.,Ltd. All rights reserved.
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 /
SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 SOFTWARE MANUAL
back
prev menu next

13. License Agreement

License Agreement

[Important]

Read this license agreement carefully.

* This license agreement ("Agreement") is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and
Ichikawa Soft Laboratory ("ISL") for software products ("Product" or "Software") of Ichikawa Soft Laboratory.
* Opening any packaging or physical media, installation, receiving any serialization codes or any use of this Product indicates
your express understanding and acceptance of the terms in this Agreement.
* ISL expressly prohibits you from installation or use of this Product if you do not agree to all terms of this Agreement. ISL
reserves any and all rights not specifically granted in this Agreement.
* The Product is protected by copyright laws, treaties concerning copyright, and other laws and treaties concerning right of
intangible property.
* You are permitted to use, and not sell, the product. You expressly acknowledge that your rights are limited to use, and that
you are expressly forbidden to rent, sell or resell the product or transfer your use rights.

[Software Product License]

Product name: SILKYPIX® Developer Studio Pro8 English / SILKYPIX® Developer Studio 8 English

1. Definitions

(1) This Product includes the computer software, associated media, materials (documentations such as manuals), and
"online" or electronic documentation.
(2) This software has functions that are available after paying for a license.

2. Condition of Use

(1) This agreement grants you the right to use the software based on agreeing to the users agreement.
(2) Your rights to use this product are contingent upon your licensing the product from ISL or authorized ISL partner.
A license can be used on a maximum of three (3) computers owned by you. You are authorized to create a number
of backup copies of the product only
up to the number of licenses authorized under this agreement.
(3) Only after any required payment and being a customer in good standing will ISL issue you a serial number and
product key (or other form of activation) to enable this software. You expressly acknowledge that you understand
you will only be able to use this software after registering using activation procedures. Please refer to SILKYPIX
web site (https://support.isl.co.jp/en/license/) for licensing procedures and other information.
(4) You are allowed to experience all or part of the software functions without a payment for a period of time that ISL
defines. However, you will not be able to use this software after the period defined by ISL has passed.

3. Communication through the Internet

If the computer on which this software is installed is connected to the Internet, there are cases in which communications
may occur with our company through the Internet in order to provide information on updating software versions or
improving our company's merchandise.

When customers install this software they agree that our company may collect, save and use information concerning this
software, as well as information concerning the computer system on which this software is installed.

However, information gathered from your computer is not information that would identify you personally, but rather
information used only for the purpose of providing information on merchandise and services beneficial to you, as well as to
improve our company's products.

4. Prohibited Matters
 (1) Copyright notice
You shall not remove any copyright notice attached to all copies of this Product.
(2) Do not distribute or redistribute Product Keys
You shall not distribute the Product Key of this Product to any third party.
(3) Do Not Use Unauthorized Product Keys
You will not use a Product Key from any third party other than those provided by authorized distributors or partners
of ISL.
(4) Do not distribute any portion of the Product
You shall not distribute any portion of the Product.
(5) Do Not Alter Product
You shall not alter all or any portion of the Product.
(6) Do not rent, lease, or sub-license the Product
You shall not rent, lease or sub-license the Product, a copy or alteration of the Product, or the Product key, to any
third party.
(7) Do not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Product
You shall not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Product.
(8) Compliance with law
You shall comply with the applicable, governing laws when using the Product.

5. The Validity term of this agreement

(1) This Agreement is effective from the date of the agreement until you discontinue using the Product or terminated.
(2) Any rights granted under this Agreement are automatically terminated if you violate any portion of this Agreement.
At its sole discretion, ISL may waive automatic termination. In the event your rights are terminated, you must
destroy all copies of the product and product components. In the event your rights to use the product are
terminated, you expressly agree and warrant that any applicable penalties or requirements, without limitation, are in
full force under this Agreement.

6. Responsibilities of ISL
ISL provides limited technical and customer service support only for customers who are parties to this Agreement;
technical support is not provided during any trial period.

You can use the Support Services in accordance with ISL's policy and program as written in the user's manual, online
documentations or printed materials provided by ISL.

The additional software codes are regarded as a part of the Product, and the terms and conditions of this Agreement are
applied.

The technical information of the customers provided to ISL as part of the support service may be used by ISL for
commercial purposes, including product support or development. However, ISL shall not use them in a way in which the
customer can be identified.

7. Limitation of Liability

(1) ISL is not liable for any damages arising out of selection, introduction, usage and results of using this product. You
assume the entire risk.
(2) In no event will ISL or its suppliers be liable for any damages (including but not limited to the damages for lost of
revenue, business interruption, loss of business information, and other pecuniary loss) arising out of the use or
inability to use the Product and its documentation even if ISL has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

8. Copyright
All titles and copyrights in this Product and in any copies of this Product are owned by ISL. All titles and rights of
intangible properties in the contents accessed by the Product are owned by its owner, and protected by the applied
copyright laws and the terms of the copyright agreement. This Agreement does not provide any license agreement of
these contents owned by third party. The rights not given explicitly in this Agreement are reserved by ISL.

9. Export Regulation
You shall not directly or indirectly export all or a portion of the licensed software without obtaining the necessary
permission from the Government of Japan or the governments of the relevant countries.

10. Third Party Software

 ISL may provide to you third party products ("Third Party Product") in addition to the Product; Any third party product is
governed exclusively by its own End User License Agreement and terms and not this Agreement, including, but exclusive
to, support and warranty.

(1) Support services

Third Party Product(s) documentation and components are provided as is without support from ISL.
(2) No warranty
Third Party Product(s) documentation and components are provided as is without any warranty, including
merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose and non-infringement, regardless of whether it is oral or written
information. The entire risk as to the results and performance of the Third Party Product is assumed by you.
(3) Exclusion of Liability
In no event will ISL be liable for any damages (including but not limited to the damages for lost revenue, business
interruption, loss of business information, and other pecuniary loss) arising out of the use or inability to use the
Third Party Product and its documentations, even if ISL has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

11. General

(1) The invalidity or unenforceability of any provisions of this Agreement shall not affect the validity or enforceability of
any other provision of this Agreement, which shall remain in full force and effect.
(2) This Agreement shall be governed by laws of Japan. Any dispute arising out of or related to this Agreement shall be
submitted to the jurisdiction of the Tokyo District Court in Tokyo, Japan.

Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd., Makuhari-Techno-Garden Bldg. CD-5, 1-3, Nakase, Mihama-ku, Chiba-shi, Chiba-ken 261-
8501 Japan

back
prev menu next

Copyright (C) 2004-2018, Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co.,Ltd. All rights reserved.